FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF USER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF USER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF MANUAL
If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.
What are the main exterior components of the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050 and their functions?
The main exterior components and their functions are:
(1) Automatic document feeder: It automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned. For the MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070, both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned at one time.
(2) Output tray (exit tray cabinet): Received faxes and printed papers are delivered to this tray.
(3) Job separator tray (upper tray): Output is delivered to this tray. You can also output jobs to the job separator (centre tray) when a relay unit is installed.
(4) USB port (A type): This is used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
(5) Operation panel: This panel hosts the [Power] button, [Power Save] button/indicator, error indicator, [Home Screen] button, main power button, data notification indicator and touch panel. Use the touch panel to operate each of these functions. An NFC touch point area mark also appears on some models (MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070).
(6) Exit tray unit (right tray): Set this tray as the output tray if needed.
(7) Keyboard: Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel. When not being used, it can be stored under the operation panel.
(8) Inner finisher: This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. You can also perform stapling manually.
(9) Front cover: Open this cover to switch the main power switch to “On” or “Off” or to replace a toner cartridge.
What are additional exterior components and paper trays, and their functions?
Additional exterior components and paper trays include:
(10) Saddle Stitch Finisher (large stacker): This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. You can also perform stapling manually.
(11) Paper pass unit: Relay between the machine and the finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
(12) Motion sensor: This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode (Motion Sensor Mode Only). (Can only be used on MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070).
(13) Utility table: You can use this as a work platform, or temporarily place originals or a mobile device. Important: Do not place anything that weighs more than 5kg or otherwise apply a load. Do not place a container that contains water or other liquid. Working on the table while the machine is in operation may cause poor image quality or other problems.
(14) Bypass tray: Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than A4R or 8-1/2″ x 11″R, pull out the extension guide.
(15) Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is installed): Store paper in this tray.
(16) Tray 1: Store paper in this tray.
(17) Finisher: This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
(18) Saddle Stitch Finisher: This staples and folds paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper.
(19) Finisher (large stacker): This staples paper. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output paper. You can also perform stapling manually.
(20) Punch module: This is used to punch holes in output. Requires an inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
(21) Tray 3 (when a stand/2×550/3×550 sheet paper drawer is installed): Store paper in this tray.
(22) Tray 4 (when a stand/3×550 sheet paper drawer is installed): Store paper in this tray.
(23) Tray 2 (when a low stand/550 sheet paper drawer or stand/550/2×550/3×550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed): Store paper in this tray.
(24) Tray 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed): Store paper in this tray.
(25) Tray 3 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed): Store paper in this tray.
What are the main interior components of the machine and their functions?
The main interior components and their functions are:
(1) The main power switch: Use this switch to turn on the power for the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, always keep this switch in the “|” position.
(2) Toner cartridge: This cartridge contains toner. When the toner in a cartridge runs out, replace with new one.
(3) Waste toner box: This container collects excess toner that remains after printing. A service technician collects replaced waste toner box.
(4) Fusing unit: Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper. Caution: The fusing unit is hot. Take care not to burn yourself when removing a misfeed.
(5) Photoconductive drum: Images are formed on the photoconductive drum. Caution: Do not touch or damage the transfer belt. This may cause a defective image.
(6) Right side cover release lever: To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
(7) Right side cover: Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
(8) Paper reversing section cover: This unit is used for reversing paper when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
(9) Waste toner box release button: Press this button when you need to release the waste toner box lock to replace the waste toner box.
(10) Handle: Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
(11) A low stand/550 sheet paper drawer or stand/550/2×550/3×550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer right-side cover: Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2, 3 and 4.
(12) Paper tray right side cover: Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1.
What are the components of the Automatic Document Feeder and Document Glass?
The components are:
(1) Paper feed roller: This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
(2) Document feeding cover: Open this cover to remove an original misfeed. On some models (MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050), this cover is also opened to clean the paper feed roller.
(3) Original guides: These guides help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
(4) Document feeder tray: Place the original with the print side facing up.
(5) Original exit tray: The original is discharged to this tray after scanning.
(6) Original size detector: This unit detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
(7) Scanning area: Originals placed in the automatic document feeder are scanned here.
(8) Document glass: If you want to scan books or other thick originals that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder, place them on this glass.
What are the connections on the side and back of the machine?
(1) LAN connector: Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. Use a shielded LAN cable.
(2) Extension phone socket (TEL)*: When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this socket. (*Optional)
(3) Telephone line socket (LINE)*: When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket. (*Optional)
(4) Power plug
What are the parts of the operation panel and their functions?
(1) Data notification indicator: The indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of a job. When the Job separator or Exit tray unit (right tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed.
(2) Touch panel: Messages and keys appear on the touch panel display. Operate the machine by directly tapping the displayed keys.
(3) Error indicator: Lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the error.
(4) Main power indicator: This lamp lights up when the machine’s main power switch is in the “|” position. Blinks green during the time that the [Power] button does not operate immediately after the main power switch is switched on.
(5) [Power] button: Use this button to turn the machine’s power on and off.
(6) [Power Save] button/indicator: Use this button to set the machine to Sleep mode for energy saving. [Power Save] button blinks when the machine is in Sleep Mode.
(7) [Home Screen] key: Use this button to display the home screen. Use your finger to touch the [Home Screen] key. If you use a pen or other tool to touch the key, it may not operate properly. Risk of malfunctioning if you use with jewelry or other accessories.
(8) NFC touch point area (MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070): You can easily connect a mobile device to the machine by touching the mobile device.
You can change the angle of the touch panel.
How do the Data Notification Indicator and Error Indicator lights indicate the machine status?
| Indicator / Status | Error indicator (red) | Data notification indicator (green) | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Pattern 1 | Pattern 2 | Pattern 3 | ||
| Solidly | Errors that do not stop machine operation, such as almost out of toner. | Job in progress, such as paper feeding or output. | Ready state or other state where jobs can be accepted. | An original has been placed in the document feeder |
| Blinks | Errors that stop machine operation, such as misfeeds and out of toner. | A fax is being received. When the job separator (upper tray) or exit tray unit (right tray) is used for output, this blinks until the output is removed. | ||
| On/Blinking Priority | Blinking Priority | Blinking Priority | Blinking Priority | On Priority |
To set the status indicated by the data notification indicator: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Data Indicator Setting].
To set the error indication: Set in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] – [Common Settings] – [Device Control] – [Error Light Setting].
How do I turn the machine’s power on or off, or restart it?
Operate two power switches: the main power switch inside the front cover, located in the lower left corner, and the [Power] button on the operation panel.
Turning on the power:
1. Turn the main power switch to the “|” position.
2. When the main power indicator lights in green, press the [Power] button.
Turning off the power:
Turn off the power by pressing the [Power] button, then turn the main power switch to the “O” position.
Restart the machine:
Turn off the power by pressing the [Power] button and then press it again to turn on the power.
Important Notes:
– When turning off the main power switch, press the [Power] button on the operation panel and then turn the main power switch to the “O” position.
– In a sudden case of main power outage, turn the power for the machine back on and then turn it off in the correct order. If the machine is left for a long time with the main power having been turned off prior to the [Power] button being turned off, abnormal noises, degraded image quality or other problems may result.
– Turn off both the [Power] button and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the machine.
– If the fax function will be used, and in particular if reception or timer transmission will take place at night, do not turn the main power off.
– When using the fax or Internet fax function, always keep the main power switch in the “|” position.
– In order for some settings to take effect, the machine must be restarted. In some states of the machine, restarting with the [Power] button may not make the settings take effect. In this case, turn off the main power switch and then turn it on again.
What are the different ways to interact with the touch panel?
The touch panel can be operated by the following touch types:
Tapping: Touch the panel with your finger and then lift it quickly. Use this method to select a key, tab or check box.
Sliding: Slide the scroll bar (with your finger touching the panel) to scroll up and down a list with a large number of items.
Long touching: Touch the panel with your finger and hold it for a while. Keep holding (long touching) it on the action panel or characters in the text box to display characters in a balloon.
Double tapping: Touch the screen twice. Use this operation to enlarge the image in the preview.
Flicking: Flick the panel to scroll a preview image quickly.
Pinch: Touch the screen with two fingers and move them toward each other. This is used to reduce the browser and preview display.
Dragging: Drag (slide your finger touching the panel in a random direction) to replace a page in the original during preview.
Spread: Touch the screen with two fingers and move them away from each other. This is used to enlarge the browser and preview display.
How do I operate keys, lists, sliders, and tabs on the touch screen?
Key (tapping):
A. Tap to select an item. The selected key turns into a different colour.
B. Tap numeric keys to enter numbers.
C. Tap to increase or decrease the value. Long touching causes the value to be increased or decreased until you stop touching.
D. Tap to enter a checkmark and enable the setting.
E. Tap to close the screen.
List (tapping, sliding and flicking):
A. Tap to select an item. The selected item turns into a different colour.
B. Slide the bar up and down. It appears when the item does not fit in the screen.
C. Flick the key upwards or downwards. The item scrolls up or down.
Slider (sliding):
A. Slide the knob from side to side.
Tab (tapping):
A. Tap a tab to switch what is displayed.
Preview screen (Double tapping/ Pinch/ Spread):
A. When a preview screen is “pinched”, the screen image is reduced. When “spread”, the image is enlarged. When “Double tapping”, the image is also enlarged.
How can I configure tap operation settings on the touch panel?
You can configure settings for tap operation on the touch panel in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Key Operation Setting].
Key Operation Setting:
– Keys Touch Sound: Controls the key touch sound level, or turns the sound off.
– Make Key Touch Sound at Default Setting: When you specify the exposure in the exposure adjustment screen of each mode, a bleep sounds three times when the reference value is reached.
| Screen in which setting is effective | Initial value |
|---|---|
| Ratio setting screen in base screen of copy mode | Ratio 100% |
| Exposure setting screen in base screen of copy mode | Exposure level: 3 (medium) |
| Exposure adjustment screen in base screen of fax, Internet fax, and network scanner modes | |
| Exposure adjustment screen for Scan to HDD in document filing mode |
Auto Clear Setting:
The time until Auto Clear activates can be set to any number of seconds from 10 to 240 in increments of 10 seconds. If the machine is not used for the duration of time set here, the auto clear function will clear any settings that have been selected and return the screen to the base screen of copy mode or the job status screen.
– Cancel Timer: This is used to disable the auto clear function.
Key Operation Setting (continued):
– Time for Accepting Key Entry: This setting determines how long a key in the touch panel must be tapped until the key input is registered. The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. By lengthening the time setting, key input can be prevented when a key is tapped accidentally. Keep in mind, however, that when a longer setting is selected more care is required when tapping keys to ensure that key input is registered.
– Disable Auto Key Repeat: This is used to disable key repeat. Key repeat causes a setting to change continuously not only each time the key is tapped but while a key is tapped.
– Time for Accepting Key Entry of Long Touch: Select a time when a long key touch is detected.
– Double Tap Interval Setting: Select an interval when a double tap is detected.
What is the Home Screen and how can I customize it?
Pressing the [Home Screen] key on the operation panel displays the home screen on the touch panel. The home screen displays the keys for selecting modes or functions.
Features of the Home Screen:
– Displays the machine’s status other than the job using icons.
– Displays the time.
– Tap a mode to change to that mode.
– Select shortcut keys for modes or functions.
– Use keys to select functions that make the machine easier to use.
– Displays the job in progress or waiting with text or icon.
– Select functions that can be utilized in respective modes. Tap the tab, and the list of function keys is displayed (Action Panel).
– Switch the pages for displaying shortcut keys.
Customization:
– To set the home screen for each “Favourite Operation Group List”: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Favourite Operation Group List] → [Home Screen List]. Perform this setting when user authentication is used.
– To display the External Service Connect shortcut keys: You can add shortcut keys for the External Service Connect functions (Google Drive, OneDrive, SharePoint Online, Gmail, Exchange (E-Mail)) to the home screen.
What do the status icons on the machine display mean?
| Icon | Machine status | Icon | Machine status |
|---|---|---|---|
| (Printer icon) | Printer data is being processed. | (USB icon) | A USB device is installed. |
| (Printed page icon) | Printer data is being printed. | (Field support icon) | The field support system is enabled. |
| (Sending document icon) | Send data exists. | A | Single-byte alphanumeric character entry |
| (Error document icon) | Forward error data exists. | (Lock icon) | A data security kit is installed. |
| (Receiving document icon) | Received data exists. | (Wi-Fi full bars icon) | Connecting to the access point (Level 4) |
| (Confidential fax icon) | Received confidential fax data exists. | (Wi-Fi three bars icon) | Connecting to the access point (Level 3) |
| (Held fax icon) | Received data is held. | (Wi-Fi two bars icon) | Connecting to the access point (Level 2) |
| (Preview fax icon) | Received preview data exists. | (Wi-Fi one bar icon) | Connecting to the access point (Level 1) |
| (OSA icon) | OSA communication is in progress. | (Wi-Fi no connection icon) | Not connected to the access point |
| (Enlarge display icon) | Enlarge display mode is enabled. | (Wireless LAN bad connection icon) | Bad connection of the wireless LAN device in the machine* |
| (Eco mode icon) | Eco mode is enabled. | (Wireless LAN waiting icon) | Waiting for the access point |
| (Maintenance icon) | A maintenance notification is issued. | (LAN cable disconnected icon) | A LAN cable is not connected. |
| (Remote operation icon) | Remote operation is in progress. |
* Contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
How can I configure screen display settings?
You can configure settings for tap operation on the touch panel in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Screen Display Settings].
– Enlarge Display Mode: Displays large characters on the screen. An icon appears in the system area when Large Character Mode is enabled.
– Message Time Setting: The duration of time that messages appear in the touch panel (the time until a message is automatically cleared) can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 12.
– Language Setting: The language that appears in the touch panel can be changed to any language. When user authentication is enabled and a display language is specified in the favourite operation group, that setting is given priority.
– Default Display Setting: Set the screen that appears after auto clear and login. You can select from Easy Copy, Copy, Easy Scan, E-mail, Network Folder, FTP/Desktop, Easy Fax, Internet Fax, Fax, Print Release, Data Entry, Address Book, Address Book (Easy Scan), Address Book (Easy Fax), Document Filing, Home Screen, Exchange (E-Mail), Gmail or the Sharp OSA Screen. The items that can be set vary depending on what peripheral devices are installed.
– Display Favorite Menus as Default: You can specify to display the “Favorite” first during mode selection.
– Display Action Panel as default.: Specify whether or not to display with the action panel on the screen.
– Icon is displayed when LAN cable is not connected.: Show an icon when a LAN cable is not connected.
– Display Confirmation Dialog when job is cancelled.: Show a confirmation dialog box when a job is cancelled.
– Switch the Number of Sets to be Displayed for Job Status: Set whether the remaining number of sets or the final number of sets is shown in the job status.
– Alignment Order of 10-Key: Set whether the numeric keys are arranged in ascending order with “1” in the upper left corner, or “1” in the lower left corner.
– Setting Display from Main Unit: Select settings for the path information of the setting destination displayed when setting mode is set on the machine.
– Display Current Path: Set whether or not the current setting items are shown in the path information.
– Enable link of current path: Set whether the link at the top is enabled.
– MFP Display Pattern Setting: Set the background colour of the touch panel. Each time you change patterns, the touch panel image at the bottom of the screen changes.
How do I change modes on the machine?
Changing mode from the Home screen:
1. Press the [Home Screen] key.
2. Tap the mode icon on the home screen.
Changing mode from the mode display:
1. Tap on the mode display (e.g., where “Easy Copy” is shown).
2. Tap the key that shows the current mode (e.g., “Easy Copy”).
3. Tap for any mode desired from the list that appears (e.g., Easy Fax, E-Mail, Network Folder).
Mode Key Display Settings:
– In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Mode Key Display Setting]. Configure settings for the display of mode keys at the top of the screen.
– Modes to Display: Select the mode keys that you want to display.
– Display Mode Keys on Home: You can enable display of the mode keys in the home screen as well.
What keys are used in the preview screen and what are their functions?
| Key Icon | Function |
|---|---|
| (Edit page icon) | This changes the mode to edit mode. Pages of the original can be changed, rotated, or deleted. |
| (Rotate icon) | This rotates the preview image of whole page in the arrow’s direction. The printing result is not rotated. |
| (Magnifying glass minus icon) | This reduces the image. *Can also be used in Easy mode. |
| (Page view icon) | This displays preview images of respective pages. |
| (Scroll bar icon for zoom) | This displays the scroll bar for enlargement/reduction operations. Moving the slider to the left reduces the image, and moving the slider to the right enlarges the image. *Can also be used in Easy mode. |
| (Thumbnail view icon) | This displays thumbnails of preview images. |
| (Magnifying glass plus icon) | This enlarges the image. *Can also be used in Easy mode. |
| (3D page view icon) | This displays pages in a 3D view. *Can also be used in Easy mode. |
Note: The display position of an image can be moved by dragging it while it is enlarged. To enlarge an image, double-tap it when the preview image is displayed by page.
How can I configure Preview Settings?
Configure preview settings in “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting].
Received Data Image Check Setting:
Select whether or not a preview of received faxes and Internet faxes is shown. This is displayed when a facsimile expansion kit or Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Default List/Thumbnail Display:
– Fax/I-Fax Reception Data: Select whether the default display format of the received fax/I-Fax list screen is list or thumbnails.
– File Retrieve of Main Folder/Quick File Folder*: Select whether the default display format of the document filing main folder and temporary folder screens is list or thumbnails.
– File Retrieve of Custom Folder*: Select whether the default display format of the document filing custom folder screen is list or thumbnails.
– File Retrieve of Direct Print: Select whether the default state of the folder screen for direct print shows the folders as a list or as thumbnails.
*On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
“Fax/I-Fax Reception Data” in “Received Data Image Check Setting” and “Default List/Thumbnail Display” can also be set using [Received Data Image Check Setting] and [Default List/Thumbnail Display] in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting].
How do I delete a page in the preview screen?
1. In the preview screen, tap the (Edit page icon) to switch to edit mode.
2. Tap the page you want to delete, and tap the (Delete icon).
– You can also delete the page by tapping [Delete the Page] on the action panel.
– You can also delete the page by dragging a page to the (Trash icon).
– To undo the deletion, tap (Undo icon). To redo the deletion, tap (Redo icon).
3. Tap the [Edit End] key.
How do I move a page in the preview screen?
1. In the preview screen, tap the (Edit page icon) to switch to edit mode.
2. Tap the page you want to move, and drag it to the new location.
– You can also move the page by tapping [Move the Page] on the action panel and then tap the destination.
3. Tap the [Edit End] key.
How do I rotate a page in the preview screen?
1. In the preview screen, tap the (Edit page icon) to switch to edit mode.
2. Tap the page you want to rotate, and drag the rotate handle (circular arrow icon) to rotate the page.
– You can also rotate the page by tapping [Rotate 180 Degrees] (Copy mode only) or [Rotate 90 Degrees] (Fax and scanner mode only) on the action panel.
3. Tap the [Edit End] key.
How do I set chapter inserts in the preview screen?
When N-Up or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with a chapter insert icon to the first page.
1. In the preview screen, tap the (Edit page icon) to switch to edit mode.
2. Tap the page you want to set chapter inserts.
3. Tap the (Chapter insert icon). The chapter insert icon is displayed on the page.
– You can also set chapter inserts by tapping [Specify Chapter Inserts] on the action panel.
– To cancel the Chapter Inserts setting: Tap the chapter insert icon displayed on the page, or select the page and tap [Cancel Chapter Inserts of Selected Page.] on the action panel.
4. Tap the [Edit End] key.
How do I insert a blank page in the preview screen?
1. In the preview screen, tap the (Edit page icon) to switch to edit mode.
2. Tap the (Insert Blank Page icon), and tap the “+” icon for the location into which you want to insert a blank page.
– You can also insert a blank page by tapping [Insert Blank Page] on the action panel.
3. Tap the [Edit End] key.
How do I delete part of the original image in the preview screen?
1. In the preview screen, tap the (Edit page icon) to switch to edit mode.
2. Tap [Erase Specified Range] on the action panel.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range. Specify the erase range and then tap the [OK] key. To delete the image outside the selected range, tap [Reverse Erase Range] on the action panel.
4. On the action panel, select [Apply This Erase Position to All Pages.] or [Apply This Erase Position to This Page.].
5. As necessary, repeat the steps to specify the erase range and the pages to which it is applied.
6. Tap the [Exit] key.
How do I change settings from the preview screen?
Tapping the tab on the left of the screen allows you to change the settings. You cannot tap the keys for functions whose settings cannot be changed.
How do I use frequently used keys like Numeric keys, Start, Cancel, and CA?
Numeric keys:
Tap a number to enter it. To clear the entered number, tap the [C] key. On the address screen, you can enter characters other than numbers, and a different key layout is provided. You can also move the cursor by using the [←] and [→] keys. Tap the [C] key to delete one character to the left of the cursor.
[Start] key:
Tap to perform a print or send job.
[Cancel Copy] key, [Storing Cancelled] key, [Cancel Scan] key, [Sending Cancelled] key:
Tap to stop copying, printing, or transmission.
[CA] key:
Tap to cancel all settings and restore the initial status in each mode.
What is the Action Panel and how is it used?
Recommended functions are displayed on the action panel when you configure functions in each mode. From the action panel, you can configure functions or combine the configured function with a function displayed on the action panel. If the action panel does not appear, tap the action panel tab.
– The functions displayed on the action panel vary depending on the mode or the functions that have been configured.
– If too many functions have been configured to be displayed on the action panel, you can slide the panel vertically or tap ▼ and ▲ to view all.
– In enlarge display mode, part of the text on the action panel may not be displayed. To display the whole text, long-touch the partially hidden key or slide the tab of the action panel to the left.
To always display the action panel: In “Settings(administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Display Action Panel as default.].
How do I use Favourite Menus and Settings?
When you register frequently used functions you have configured for copying or image sending in favourite, you can quickly call them. Favourite can be used in normal mode.
Favorite Key Setting:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Favorite Key Setting]. Set the information that appears when favourite keys are tapped in normal mode. Click the Copy, Scan, Internet Fax, Fax, and Data Entry tabs to configure settings for the favourite key screens shown in each of the normal modes.
– Favorite Key Number: Sets the favourite key number. The items will appear in order on the screen starting from the item that is set in No. 1.
– Key Name: Enter a maximum of 20 characters for the favourite key name.
– Function Menu: To set functions such as “Other Functions”, select the functions from the pull-down menu.
– Job Programs: To set a program, select one of the preset programs from the program list.
– Not Display: You can hide a set key in the favourite key screen.
How do I register a function in Favourite?
1. Configure the desired function settings on the machine.
2. Tap the (Star icon / Favourite icon) on the screen.
3. Tap [Edit Favorite] on the action panel.
4. Tap the [Register Key] key. Administrator rights are required.
5. Tap the key for the function you want to register.
Notes:
– Favourites can be registered or edited only by authenticated users and administrators.
– Unauthenticated users can call and use the favourites registered by administrators. Settings for calling Favourites and permitting/prohibiting editing can be configured in [User Control] → [Authority Group List] in “Settings (administrator)”.
– To edit favourites, tap (Star icon / Favourite icon) and then tap [Edit Favorite] on the action panel.
How do I call a function from Favourite?
1. Tap the (Star icon / Favourite icon) on the screen.
2. Tap the key for the function you want to call from the Favourite list.
How do I use the Confirmation Screen for Settings?
You can display a list of configured functions and check them. On the initial screen of each mode, tapping the (Checkmark icon) displays the setting confirmation screen.
What are the Eco functions of the machine?
These functions help save power consumption by managing operations of sections prone to high power consumption. The machine provides two power-saving modes:
| Function | Description |
|---|---|
| AUTO POWER SHUT-OFF MODE | If no operations take place, this mode will turn off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state. Although the power-saving rate is higher, the wakeup time is longer. |
| PREHEAT MODE | This mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state. Compared to Auto Power Shut-Off Timer, the power-saving rate is lower, but the wakeup time is shorter. |
In addition to these two modes, using the following functions in conjunction helps reduce even more power consumption:
| Function | Description |
|---|---|
| ECO RECOMMENDATION FUNCTION DISPLAY | Shows recommended copy/print settings for copy, document filing reprint, and direct print. |
| AS SOON AS THE REMOTE JOB IS FINISHED, ENTER AUTO POWER SHUT OFF MODE | The machine returns from Auto Power Shut-Off and enters Auto Power Shut-Off mode as soon as printing is completed. |
| ECO SCAN | The machine is operated with the fusing unit turned off for non-printing operations (that do not use the fusing unit) such as fax and image transmission. |
| Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting | Use this function to set the times for turning the power on and off to reduce power consumption. |
| Specific Date Operation Settings | When you must have the machine perform exceptionally many print jobs or other special operation on a certain day, you can specify the day as a “Specific Date” and define an energy saving pattern only for that day. |
| Toner Save Mode | This mode is used to reduce toner consumption. |
| MOTION SENSOR | This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode (Motion Sensor Mode Only). |
| Sleep Mode Power Level | Select whether priority is given to power saving or wakeup time. |
How are Eco function mode settings configured?
The eco function settings are set in a batch. “Custom Mode” and “Eco Mode” are available. Setting values applied by each mode are as follows:
| Function | Custom Mode | Eco Mode |
|---|---|---|
| Preheat Mode Setting | 1min. | 1min. |
| Turn off Panel Display during pre-heat mode | On | On |
| Auto Power Shut-Off Timer | Fix transition time.: 11min. (for Europe) 1min. (Except for Europe) | Fix transition time.: 1min. |
| As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode. | On | On |
| Sleep Mode Power Level | Low Power | Low Power |
| Eco Scan | On | On (All Modes Except Copy) |
Each Energy Save settings in System Settings is not applied when Custom/Eco mode is used.
To set mode settings: “Settings (administrator)” → select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Mode Setting].
What is Auto Power Shut-Off Mode and how is it configured?
This mode turns off the power to the operation panel and the fusing unit, and makes the machine wait in the lowest power consumption state. Auto Power Shut-Off Timer will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job. Compared to preheat mode, the power-saving rate is considerably higher but the wakeup time is longer.
The [Power Save] button blinks when the machine is in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer.
Auto Power Shut-Off Timer is also activated by pressing the [Power Save] button while the [Power Save] button is not lit. This mode is cleared when print data is being received, fax data is being output, or when the [Power Save] button is pressed while it is blinking.
To set Auto Power Shut-Off Timer: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Auto Power Shut-Off].
A message appears 15 seconds before Auto Power Shut-Off Mode is entered. To close the message and continue normal operation, tap the [Continue] button. The message appears again 15 seconds before the end of the extension of normal operation time. If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears, the machine enters auto power shutoff mode.
To set display of the message: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Display Message When Extending Transition Time to Preheat/Auto Power Shut-Off Mode].
What is Preheat Mode and how is it configured?
This mode lowers the temperature of the fusing unit and makes the machine wait in low power consumption state. Preheat mode will activate when the set duration of time elapses in waiting status without executing a job. Compared to Auto Power Shut-Off Mode, the amount of energy saved is less and the wakeup time is shorter.
In the preheat mode, the [Home Screen] key is lit and the light goes off for the touch panel and the [Power Save] button. The touch panel is cleared when it is tapped or the [Home Screen] button is pressed.
To set preheat mode: “Settings (administrator)” → select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Preheat Mode Setting].
A message appears 15 seconds before Preheat Mode is entered. To close the message and continue normal operation, tap the [Continue] button. If no action is taken within 15 seconds after the message appears, the machine enters preheat mode.
To set display of the message: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Display Message When Extending Transition Time to Preheat/Auto Power Shut-Off Mode].
What is the Eco Recommendation Function Display?
This function shows recommended copy/print settings for copy, document filing reprint, and direct print.
Copying: When you change to copy mode (normal mode), the settings recommended for copy mode appear. Recommended settings: 2-Sided Copy, N-Up, and Image Orientation.
Document filing print: When you tap the [Change Setting to Print] in the action panel on the file list screen of document filing, the settings recommended for this mode appear. Recommended settings: 2-Sided Print, and N-Up.
Direct print: When you tap the [Change Setting to Print] in the action panel on the file list screen of direct print, the settings recommended for this mode appear. Recommended settings: 2-Sided Print, and N-Up.
To use the eco recommendation function display: “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Eco Recommendation Function Display]. This function does not operate in easy mode.
How does the “As Soon As The Remote Job Is Finished, Enter Auto Power Shut Off Mode” function work?
Printing or outputting received fax data in Auto Power Shut-Off Timer turns on the power, and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut-Off Mode immediately after completing the print job. This means the fusing unit is turned on for printing and then turned off again once finished, returning the machine to sleep mode.
To set this function: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [As soon as the remote job is finished, enter Auto power shut off mode.].
How is the transition time to Auto Power Shut-Off mode determined?
There are two ways to determine the transition time:
Fix transition time: The Auto Power-Off transition time is fixed. When this setting is enabled, the [Change transition time by time of day.] option is disabled. If Auto Power-Off is disabled, this set time is also disabled.
Change transition time by time of day: This function controls the transition to Auto Power Shut-Off mode optimally for each time period by analyzing the use of the machine based on job logs obtained during a 4-week period. When this setting is enabled, the [Fix transition time.] option is disabled.
Notes for “Change transition time by time of day”:
– The image transfer control settings are not changed.
– This does not link to the Power On/Off Scheduling. If both are enabled, Power On/Off Scheduling settings precede.
– Pages are counted for each paper size separately.
– When the power supply of the machine was off, there was no job during this time.
The transition times based on usage patterns are as follows:
| Pattern | Transition time | Average outputs per hour* |
|---|---|---|
| Mode1 (Job Start Priority1) | After 1 hour | 700 or more |
| Mode2 (Job Start Priority2) | After 30 minutes | 150 to 699 |
| Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1) | After 5 minutes | 40 to 149 |
| Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2) | After the minimum time period | Up to 39 |
| Sleep Mode Power Level | Low Power: The machine switches to the power saving mode, but it takes some time to recover. Fast Wake Up: Compared with Low Power, the power value rises by a certain degree, but it results in faster recovery. Motion Sensor (MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070): This enables switching of power saving modes by the motion sensor. | – |
* Factory default setting
Automatic Pattern: This function controls the power optimally for each time period by analyzing machine use based on job logs obtained during a certain time period. If the machine does not have the 4-week job log information, it enters template2 (Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1) between 8:00 and 18:00 hours), then Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2).
Manual Pattern (Three-pattern template): You can set a pattern for each time band.
| Template | Pattern | Description of mode |
|---|---|---|
| Template 1 | All Day “Energy Save Priority2” | The machine runs in the “Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)” all the time. |
| Template 2 | 8:00-18:00 “Energy Save Priority1” | The machine runs in “Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1)” between 8:00 and 18:00, and in “Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)” at other times. |
| Template 3 | 8:00-18:00 “Job Start Priority1” | The machine runs in “Mode1 (Job Start Priority1)” between 8:00 and 18:00, and in “Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2)” at other times. |
What are Sleep Mode Power Level and Motion Sensor Mode?
Sleep Mode Power Level:
– Low Power: The machine switches to the power saving mode, but it takes some time to recover.
– Fast Wake Up: Compared with Low Power, the power value rises by a certain degree, but it results in faster recovery.
Motion Sensor Mode (MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070 only):
The motion sensor enables the machine to automatically wake from sleep mode.
What is Eco Scan and how is it configured?
Eco Scan allows non-print jobs such as sending a scanned original to be performed with the fusing unit turned off. When in sleep mode (fusing unit off), if a copy/print job is initiated, the fusing unit turns on. For image send/document filing, the fusing unit remains off.
To set Eco scan: “Settings (administrator)” → select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Eco Scan Setting].
Eco Scan Setting:
Eco Scan Setting is used to execute a non-print operation such as image sending and scan to HDD while the fusing unit is turned Off. Set “Eco Scan Setting” to enabled (checkmark), and select a mode or screen in which to enable Eco Scan Setting. The following modes and screens can be set:
– Home Screen
– Copy
– Image Send
– Document Filing*
– System Settings
– Sharp OSA
– Manual Finishing
*On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
How do I use the Energy Saving Pattern List?
This function analyzes machine usage and controls entry into auto power shutoff mode based on frequency of use. If you want to manage machine power by using an energy saving pattern list, select [Manual] in [System Settings] – [Eco Setting] – [Change transition time by time of day.], and select an Automatic Update Pattern from the pull-down list or one of Original Eco Patterns 1 to 4. To automatically analyze machine usage and update the pattern as needed, set Automatic Update Pattern.
Edit Pattern (Set the Original Eco Pattern):
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Change Pattern Name | To change the pattern name, enter the desired name. |
| Pattern to Be Modeled | Select the stored pattern that you want to base the new pattern on. To copy the settings of a selected pattern, select [Copy the selected pattern.]. |
| Energy Save Setting | Set time periods for machine modes. Select a mode from 1 to 4, and select a day of the week, start time, and end time. |
| Day of the Week | Set the day of week on which you want to enable the mode selected in the Energy Save Setting. |
| Start Time/Completing Time | Set the period of time during which you want to enable the mode selected in the Energy Save Setting. |
How does Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting work?
The machine operator panel can be turned On or Off at a preset time. Up to three (3) patterns can be set. The “Setting 1”, “Setting 2” and “Setting 3” are executed in this sequence if set at the same day of week or at the same clock time. For example, you can set it to be OFF at 9:00 (Start time), ON at 12:00 (before Lunch break), OFF at 13:00 (after Lunch break), and ON at 18:00 (before Finish time).
Important Notes:
– The scheduling function does not support the power management settings in the Preheat Mode and Auto Power Shut-Off Mode.
– The preset power-off time is subject to restrictions: If the machine is running, it’s turned off only after the job finishes. The machine cannot receive printer jobs. It can receive output jobs like faxes. If Time Specified Output is enabled, they output next time the machine is on.
– If power management is also enabled, Power On/Off Scheduling settings precede.
– If the same time is specified, settings are applied in order of “Setting 1”, “Setting 2”, “Setting 3”.
– Power is not turned off if: “Power Up Auto Clear” is in progress, hard disk optimization or restart after setting change is in progress.
– The preset power on/off time is within one minute from when the setting is accepted.
To set Power ON/OFF Scheduling Function: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting].
How can I set up a Voice Alert for motion detection (MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070 only)?
Use the Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting to play an alert message if the motion sensor detects motion during the time that the machine power is off. You can register an email address in “Send the Alert to” to send notification of the detection to that address.
– Voice alerts will always be issued at maximum volume, regardless of the volume settings.
– Voice alert can be enabled even when the voice assist function is disabled.
– The notification message language is determined by the voice assist settings.
– If the power is turned off manually, the Voice Alert setting will not be enabled.
Send the Alert to: Set the e-mail address to which detection information is sent when a voice alert is issued.
How do I configure Specific Date Operation Settings?
You can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the “specific date” and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date. The specific date operation is performed on the day configured regardless of the setting on Auto Power-Off transition time.
“Specific Date” tab: (A period of up to 7 days can be set)
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Date Setting | Configure the date on which you want to operate the machine with a specific pattern. Select a day between 1 and 31 in Every Month or from End of Every Month. |
| Applied Energy Saving Operation | Select an energy saving pattern you want to apply. Use the “Pattern” tab to specify the details. |
| Operation for Holiday | Configure how the machine operates if the preset specific date falls on a holiday. Use the “Holiday” tab to specify the day as the holiday. |
If a specific date that is initially specified coincides with one moved because it falls on a holiday, the former takes precedence. If specific dates of the same dates are configured, they are used in ascending order between 1 and 7 (specific date numbers).
“Pattern” tab: (Configure details of an energy saving pattern)
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Energy Save Operation | Select a specific date pattern you want to specify. |
| Change Pattern Name | Enter a pattern name when you want to change the name of a specific date pattern. |
| Pattern to Be Modeled | Select a source pattern when you create a pattern using a stored or preset pattern. |
| Add new schedule. | Add a schedule. |
“Holiday” tab: (Specify a holiday. The day specified will not be a specific date)
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Holiday List | When you tap this option, the dates and days of the week for the holidays you have set for two years. |
| Day of Week | Use this option to specify a holiday using a day of the week. |
| Set Period | Use this to specify a holiday using a date. “Final Registered Time” shows when the holiday that is stored with Set Period was stored. |
How is the Eco Recommendation Function Display used and what is Toner Save Mode?
Displaying Eco Recommendation Settings:
When the base screen of normal mode is displayed, eco recommendation settings appear. This function does not operate in easy mode.
To use the eco recommendation function display: “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Eco Recommendation Function Display].
The displayed functions are: 2-Sided Copy, N-Up, Image Orientation.
Toner Save Mode:
This mode is used to reduce toner consumption. Toner consumption can be set for each print job of “Copy”, “Printer”, and “Prints (Document Filing)”*. Toner consumption can be selected from three levels:
– Toner Save1 (Toner Consumption: Much)
– Toner Save2 (Toner Consumption: Middle)
– Toner Save3 (Toner Consumption: Little)
* On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required. Items may not be displayed depending on country and region.
How does the Motion Sensor work and how is it configured (MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070 only)?
This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode (Motion Sensor Mode Only). Three settings are available for the detection range (I / II / III). Detection range is approximately 1.5 m maximum at 60 degrees.
You can warn with a notification message when the motion sensor responds while the machine’s power is set to OFF in the power ON/OFF schedule settings. By setting an e-mail address for the alert destination, you can have detection information which informs the response of the motion sensor.
– The motion sensor detects the movement of sources of heat.
– The detection range may vary depending on the installation site and environment (ambient temperature, etc.).
The motion sensor may not operate correctly if:
– An object is in front of the motion sensor.
– There are scratches or dirt on the motion sensor cover.
– The motion sensor is directly exposed to sunlight or air flow.
– The motion sensor is damaged.
– There is a source of heat such as a heater nearby.
– An object is moving in the detection range.
Configuration:
– To enable the motion sensor: “Settings (administrator)” select [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Eco Setting] → [Sleep Mode Power Level].
– To issue a voice alert when the motion sensor detects movement: Select the [Send a Voice Alert when the motion sensor detects movement] checkbox in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Energy Save] → [Power ON/OFF Schedule Setting].
How do I log in using Authentication by User Number?
When starting the machine, the login screen appears.
1. Enter your user number (5 to 8 digits) using the numeric keys. Each entered digit will be displayed as “*”.
2. Tap the [OK] key.
If the entered user number is authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed.
When the user number is an 8-digit number, step 2 is not necessary. Login takes place automatically after the user number is entered.
If “A Warning when Login Fails” is enabled in system settings, the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect user number is entered three times in a row. Contact the machine administrator to check the user number assigned for you.
Settings related to page limits and display:
– To limit the number of pages that a user can use: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Pages Limit Group].
– To hide the number of pages that can be used after login: In “Settings (administrator)”, disable [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Display Usage Status after Login].
– To change the message display time: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Message Time Setting].
To log out: When you have finished using the machine and are ready to log out, tap [Logout].
How do I log in using Authentication by Login Name/Password?
This method enables users to log in using a login name and password received from the administrator of the machine or the administrator of the LDAP server. When starting the machine, the login screen appears.
1. Enter the login name:
– Entering using the soft keyboard: If user name registration has not been performed in setting mode, a user only using LDAP authentication should tap the [Login Name] text box and enter the login name using the soft keyboard.
– Selecting from a list: Tap the [Select from List] key and select a user name from the User List screen.
2. Enter the password:
– Enter the password from the soft keyboard. If you are logging in to an LDAP server, enter the password that is stored with your LDAP server login name. Each entered character will be displayed as “*”. After entering the password, tap the [OK] key.
– When authentication is by LDAP server and you have different passwords stored in “User List” and in the LDAP server, use the password stored in the LDAP server.
– For LDAP authentication, the [E-mail Address] key may appear, depending on the authentication method. Tap the [E-mail Address] text box and enter your e-mail address.
3. Tap the [OK] key.
If the entered login name and password are authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can copy or scan is displayed. When a limitation is set for the number of pages that a user can use, the use count for the user that has logged in is displayed.
If “A Warning when Login Fails” is enabled, the operation panel will be locked for five minutes if an incorrect login name or password is entered three times in a row. Contact the machine administrator.
Configuration Notes:
– To release the operation panel lock: In “Settings (Web version)”, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] to release the lock.
– To set [A Warning when Login Fails]: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [A Warning when Login Fails].
– To store a user name (and password): In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [User List]. Also register detailed information such as the login name, user number, and password.
– When registering the LDAP server, change the information for [Auth to] as required. If selecting from the User List screen, the LDAP server is already registered. If entering from the soft keyboard, tap [Auth to] and select the LDAP server.
To log out: When you have finished using the machine and are ready to log out, tap [Logout].
How are users managed in User Control (User List)?
User Control allows user management such as registering login users and specifying the user authentication method. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control].
User List: This is used to store, edit, and delete users when user authentication is enabled.
– [Add] key: Adds a new user. Up to 1000 groups can be registered.
– [Delete All Users] key: Deletes all registered users (excluding users stored as factory default). Only the administrator can use this. Cannot be used if login authentication with a Fixed User is set.
– [Delete All Auto-registered users] key: Deletes all auto-registered users.
– [Delete Your Information for External Connect] key: Delete the External Connect cache used by the selected user. [Store user authentication information for External Connect] must be enabled.
– [Delete All Information for External Connect] key: Only the administrator can perform this. Deletes all External Connect caches. [Store user authentication information for External Connect] must be enabled.
– User List display: Shows users stored as factory default and currently stored users. An asterisk [*] appears before auto-registered user names. Selecting a user name shows the user edit or delete screen.
Storing a user: When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Refer to “Settings” for User List items.
Editing and deleting a user: When you select a user from the list, the user edit/delete screen appears. A user can be deleted using the [Delete] key. Users stored as factory default cannot be deleted.
What are the factory default user settings?
The following users are stored in the machine at the factory:
– Administrator: The administrator account of the machine, stored as factory default.
– System Administrator: The account for system maintenance, stored as factory default. This account cannot execute jobs.
– User: This is used when network authentication is used and a login name that is not stored in the machine is entered directly. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.)
– Device Account: An account to which the colour prohibited authority is granted.
– Other User: This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information. (This cannot be selected from the login user screen.)
| Setting | Admin | System Administrator | Users | Device Account | Other User |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| User Name | Admin | System Administrator | Users | Device Account | Other User |
| Login Name | admin | sysadmin | users | device account | Other |
| PIN Code/Password | (See “Start Guide.”)*1 | sysadmin*1 | users*1 | device account*1 | – |
| My Folder | No | Main Folder | No | Main Folder | No |
| Authentication Server Settings | Login Locally | – | |||
| Pages Limit Group | Unlimited*1 | ||||
| Authority Group*2 | Admin | System Administrator Authority*1 | User*1 | User*1 | Guest*1 |
| Favourite Operation Group | Following the System Settings*1 | ||||
| Default Billing Code | Not Set*1 |
*1 Items that can be changed
*2 For detailed information, see “Authority Group”.
What settings can be configured when storing or editing a user in the User List?
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| User Name | Store a user name consisting of up to 255 characters. This user name is used as the key name in the authentication screen, the user name for document filing, and the sender name. |
| Apply User Name to Log-in Name.*1 | Select this to enter the entered user name in the login name. |
| Initial (Optional) | This determines where the user name will appear in the user list. Enter a maximum of 10 characters for the initials. |
| Index | Select a custom index to be stored. The custom index names are the same as those used in the address book. |
| User Number*2 | Enter a user number in 5 to 8 digits. |
| Login Name*1 | Enter the login name that is used when authentication by login name and password is enabled (up to 255 characters). (The login name must be unique.) |
| Password*1, 3 | Enter the password, consisting of 1 to 255 characters, that is used for user authentication by login name and password (the password is optional). After entering the password, enter once again in “Password (for confirmation)”. |
| E-mail Address | Enter the e-mail address that is used in the sender list and for LDAP authentication (up to 255 characters). |
| Home Directory Path | Enter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the home directory path. |
| Use Login Name for User Authentication | Set whether or not the login name for user authentication will be the same as the user name for home directory path authentication. |
| User Name (for Home Directory Path Auth) | Enter a maximum of 127 full-width/half-width characters for the user name for home directory path authentication. |
| Password (for Home Directory Path Auth) | Enter a maximum of 255 numeric digits for the password for home directory path authentication. |
| Authentication Settings*1 | Select either [Login Locally], [Network Authentication] (when LDAP is enabled) or [Active Directory] (when Active Directory is enabled) for authentication. |
| Authentication Server | When the [Network Authentication] is selected, select the server to be used for user authentication from the LDAP server list that is stored using Setting mode (Web version). |
| Organization/Group | Set a group to which the user belongs. Up to 8 groups can be assigned. |
| Pages Limit Group | Specify the page limit for the user by selecting one of the stored page limit groups. The factory default setting is [Unlimited]. |
| Authority Group | Specify the user authority by selecting one of the stored authority groups. The factory default setting is [User]. |
| Favourite Operation Group | The favourite operation group is displayed when the user logs in. The factory default setting is [Following the System Settings]. To change the settings, select [User Control] in Setting mode (Web version). |
| Default Billing Code | Set the Main Code and Sub Code when the user logs in. The factory default setting is [Not Set]. |
| My Folder*4 | Store a folder to be used for document filing as the dedicate user folder (or My Folder). A stored folder can be selected, or you can create and specify a new folder. |
*1 It is not displayed when “User Number” is selected for the authentication method.
*2 It is displayed when “User Number” is selected for the authentication method.
*3 Not required when network authentication is used, as the password stored in the LDAP server is used.
*4 On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
What are the settings under User Control – Default Settings?
User Authentication: This setting enables or disables user authentication and specifies the authentication method. When enabled, each user is registered, and separate authentication settings apply. Even if user information is not stored on the machine, you can directly enter user information stored in an LDAP server to log in. In this case, the “User” factory default authentication information applies.
Authentication Settings: Set the location where user authentication is to be enabled: Login Locally (by machine), LDAP (by LDAP server), Active Directory (by Active Directory).
Default Network Authentication Server Setting: Use this to set the default network authentication server when logging into Setting mode (Web version) or sending a print job with unregistered user information.
Perform network server access control: Register access control information (page count limits, authorities, favourite operations) on a network server. Add properties like ‘pagelimit’, ‘authority’, ‘favourite’, ‘myfolder’ to the directory information. These properties can be renamed in LDAP Settings.
Users auto-registered: When logging in by network authentication, user information is automatically registered. Stored info includes User Name (from auth server or first 16 chars of login name if not acquired), Initial (1), Index (User1), Card ID (-), PIN Code/Password (-), Auth Server Settings (-), Auth Server (Network Authentication), E-mail Address, My Folder, Pages Limit Group, Authority Group, Favourite Operation Group (these last 5 acquired from auth server if Access Control enabled).
Authentication Method Setting: Selects the authentication method (Login Name and Password; Login Name, Password and E-mail Address; User Number Only). The login screen varies. “User Number Only” cannot use network authentication.
Device Account Mode Setting: Register a specific user as an auto login user. Can allow temporary login by other users if [Allow Login by Different User] is selected.
Login User: Selects the auto login user when Device Account Mode is enabled.
Cache User Information: Set if automatically registered users are created. Externally authenticated Sharp OSA users can also be auto-registered.
Cache Period: Select cache period for user information. [Cache User Information] must be enabled.
Cache Password for Authentication: Set if password information is retained as cache when a user is cached.
Store user authentication information for External Connect: Set if authentication information for cloud connection is retained as cache.
Card Setting: For authentication using an IC card (HID or other).
– Use IC Card for Authentication
– Request Password at IC Card Authentication (for Active Directory)
– Automatic Logout with a Card
– Authentication Method Setting (for IC cards)
Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Jobs: Determines if a job completes, stops, or is cancelled/deleted if page limit is reached.
A Warning when Login Fails: If incorrect password attempts reach a specified number (three), the user account is locked for five minutes.
Disabling of Printing by Invalid User: Prohibits printing by users not stored in the machine (e.g., via printer driver or FTP).
Allow Remote Scanner Using Before Login.: Specifies if scanning can be performed by remote operation before login.
Automatically print stored jobs after login: Spooled print data automatically prints when the user who enabled retention logs in (Hard disk expansion kit required on some models).
Display Usage Status after Login: Specifies whether to display page counts of a user upon login.
Login Name Display: Selects if login name is shown or as asterisks. Includes ‘Display login name’ and ‘Display Login Name with Asterisk ***’.
Include Job Status in user authentication: Specifies whether to include job status in user authentication.
Automatic Logout Setting: Enables/disables automatic logout. Time until logout can be specified (up to 240s in 10s increments).
Case sensitivity of login name is enabled.: Sets if login names are case sensitive.
Apply login name to the user name of network folder: Applies login name to the user name of network folder.
Edit Help Display of Login Screen: Customizes help display on login screen.
User Information Print: Prints lists like User List, List of Number of Pages Used, etc.
Reset Counter After Sending E-mail Status: Resets counter after E-mail Status is sent (if E-mail Status is enabled).
Enable IPP Authentication Except for Printer Driver.: Enables IPP authentication for other than printer driver.
How do I manage Pages Limit Groups?
This is used to register page limit settings in advance for each group. The page limit for each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered.
– [Add] key: Use this to add a new group (up to 20 groups can be registered).
– List: Shows currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen.
Storing page limit groups: When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears.
Editing a page limit group: Selecting a group from the list displays the edit screen. To return a group to factory default, set “Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model” to “Unlimited” on the edit screen.
Settings for a Page Limit Group:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Group Name | Store a name of group (up to 32 characters). |
| Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model | Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied. |
| Function Names | The name of the functions that can be configured is displayed. Set a limit for each function. |
| Page Limit | When [Prohibited] is selected for a mode, input from the mode is prohibited. When [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, there is no limit to the number of pages that can be input/output in that mode. When [Limited] is selected, enter a page limit (1 to 99999999 pages). |
How is the Machine Page Limit Setting configured?
This sets the page limit for the machine.
Settings:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Function Names | The name of the functions that can be configured is displayed. Set a limit for each function. |
| Page Limit | When [Prohibited] is selected for a mode, input from the mode is prohibited. When [Unlimited] is selected for a mode, there is no limit to the number of pages that can be input/output in that mode. When [Limited] is selected, enter a page limit (1 to 99999999 pages). |
How do I manage Authority Groups?
This is used to store settings relevant to user authorities in advance for each group. The authority of each user is specified by selecting one of these registered groups when the user is registered.
– [Add] key: Use this to add a new group (up to 20 groups can be registered).
– List: Shows currently stored groups. Selecting a group name displays the edit screen.
Editing an authority group: Selecting a group from the list displays the edit screen. To return a group to factory default, select the group and choose an option like [Return to the Administrator Authority], etc., then tap [Execute].
Settings for an Authority Group (Item: Group Name): Store a name of group (up to 32 characters).
Settings for an Authority Group (Item: Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model): Select one of the previously stored groups as a template.
The factory default groups and their settings include permissions (Allowed/Prohibited/No Toner Save) for various functions under Copy, Printer, Image Send, Document Filing, Sharp OSA, Common Functions, and Machine Settings. For example:
Copy:
– Approval Setting: Admin (Allowed), System Administrator (Prohibited), User (Allowed), Guest (Allowed), Scanner Prohibited Authority (Allowed).
– Special Modes Usage: Admin (Allowed), System Administrator (Prohibited), User (Allowed), Guest (Prohibited), Scanner Prohibited Authority (Allowed).
Printer:
– Approval Setting: Admin (Allowed), System Administrator (Prohibited), User (Allowed), Guest (Allowed), Scanner Prohibited Authority (Allowed).
– FTP Pull Print: Admin (Allowed), System Administrator (Prohibited), User (Allowed), Guest (Prohibited), Scanner Prohibited Authority (Allowed).
(Many other detailed permissions exist across all categories and user types as shown in the tables on pages 1-58 to 1-61 of the PDF.)
*1 On MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required for some settings.
*2 For information on each setting, see the setting mode list.
How do I manage Favourite Operation Groups?
The preferred operation environment can be set for each group. For example, by registering language in a favourite operation group, it’s automatically selected when the user logs in. This setting can only be configured in Setting mode (Web version).
Adding/editing a group: Tap the [Add] key to display the registration screen. Tap a group name to display its registration screen for editing.
Settings for a Favourite Operation Group:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Group Name | Store a name of group (up to 32 characters). |
| Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model | Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied. |
| Copy | |
| Initial Status Settings | Select settings for Image Orientation, Paper Tray, Exposure Type, Copy Ratio, 2-Sided, Original Binding, Output Binding, Output, Offset, Output Tray, Separator Page, Staple Sort, Staple Position, Punch, and Fold. |
| Image Send | |
| Initial Status Settings | Select settings for Image Orientation, Exposure, Resolution, Colour Mode, File Format, and Original Image Type. Select settings for Specified Pages per File, and Fax Sender Name. |
| Document Filing* | |
| Image Orientation | Specify the image orientation. |
| Initial Status Settings | Select settings for Colour Mode, Exposure, Original Image Type, and Resolution. |
| Prints (Document Filing) | Set the default output tray for document filing print. |
| System Settings | |
| Enlarge Display Mode | Turn this option ON to display large characters on the Setting mode screen. |
| Original Size Detector Setting | Select whether Inch sizes or AB sizes are detected, or disable detection on the document glass. |
| Cancel Detection at Document Glass | Original size detection on the document glass can be disabled. When this is done, all originals placed on the document glass are treated as special size originals. |
| Language Setting | Select the display language. |
| Switch the Number of Sets to be Displayed for Job Status | Select whether to display the number of progress sets or remaining sets as the job status. |
| Key Operation Setting | Set the key input time and Auto Key Repeat setting. |
| Time for Accepting Key Entry of Long Touch | Select a time when a long key touch is detected. |
| Double Tap Interval Setting | Select an interval when a double tap is detected. |
| Keys Touch Sound | Set the sound made when keys are touched. |
| Keyboard Select | Set the language that appears on the keyboard. |
| MFP Display Pattern Setting | Select the colour pattern used in the touch panel. |
| Automatically print stored jobs after login* | When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine, the spooled print data is automatically printed out when the user who enabled retention logs in. |
| Favorite Key Setting | Select to use System Settings or use the registered Favourite key settings for performing Favourite Key Setting. |
| Home Screen Settings | Select to use System Settings or use the stored home screen settings for performing Home Screen Settings. |
| Preview Setting: Default List/Thumbnail Display | |
| Fax/I-Fax Reception Data | Select whether the default display format of the received fax/I-Fax list screen is list or thumbnails. |
| File Retrieve of Main Folder/Quick File Folder* | Select whether the default display format of the document filing main folder and temporary folder screens is list or thumbnails. |
| File Retrieve of Custom Folder* | Select whether the default display format of the document filing custom folder screen is list or thumbnails. |
| File Retrieve of Direct Print | Select whether the default state of the file list screen for direct print shows the folders as a list or as thumbnails. |
* On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
Returning a favourite operation group to “Unlimited”: To return a selected favourite operation group to the factory default state, select the checkbox to the left of “No.” and tap the [Return to the Defaults] key.
How do I use the Favorite Key List?
Assign shortcut keys to frequently used functions. They will be displayed in the base screen of each mode.
Settings:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Key Name | Enter a maximum of 20 characters for the favourite key name. (Up to 20 full-width characters can be entered, but only 10 will be shown on the key.) |
| Function Menu/Program/ Others | Select the function that you wish to assign to the favourite key. The functions that can be selected vary by mode. |
| No Display | Enable this setting to not show favourite keys. |
How do I configure Home Screen List settings?
Home screen settings must be previously stored. Select a home screen when registering Favourite Operation Group List.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Name | Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the home screen name. |
| Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model | Select one of the previously stored home screens as a template for the new home screen. When selected, the settings of this home screen are applied. |
| Change Home Screen Name | Enter a home screen name to change the existing name. |
| Template | Select a layout pattern of the registered key. |
| Key Layout of the Screen | The layout of the keys in the home screen is displayed. |
| Change Text Colour On Home Screen | Set the colour of the text in the scroll area, fixed area, and clock. |
| Home Button | Registers the function to use for the selected key number. |
| Fix Key | Registers the function to use for the selected key number. This button is displayed on all pages of the home screen. |
| Display Toner Quantity | Select this to display the toner level in the fixed area. |
How do I view and reset User Counts?
User Count displays the total number of pages printed by each user.
– [Select All] key: Selects all users.
– [Clear Checked] key: Clears all selections.
– [Show] key: Shows the counts of the selected user.
– [Clear Count] key: Use this to reset the counts of the selected user.
– User List: Shows stored users. Selecting a user name selects the user.
View User Count: When you select a user and tap the [Show] key, this user count is displayed.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Next | Displays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers). |
| Previous | Displays the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers). |
| Show Counts | Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function. |
| Page Limit | The page limit set for the user appears in parentheses below the count. |
If peripheral devices are not mounted, their count is not displayed.
Resetting user counts: Select a user in the setting screen and tap the [Clear Count] key. A count reset screen will appear.
When a single user is selected:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Next | Displays the next user (in the order of the registration numbers). |
| Previous | Displays the previous user (in the order of the registration numbers). |
| Show Counts | Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function. |
| Clear Count | Reset the count of the selected item to “0”. |
| Clear All Count | Clears all counts of the selected user to zero (0). |
When multiple users are selected:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Show Counts | Displays the counts and the number of pages remaining of the selected user for each function. |
| Clear Count | Reset the count of the selected item to “0”. |
| Clear All Count | Clears all counts of the selected user to zero (0). |
Save User Count: Clicking the [Save] button saves the user count information as a data file. To delete user count information in the machine, click the checkbox next to “Save and Delete the Data” and click [Save]. This setting can only be configured in Setting mode (Web version).
How do I configure Card Settings (Card Area Setting, Card Type / Card Reader Settings)?
Card Area Setting: The data check during card reading can be set.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Check System Code only in FeliCa User Area mode | Check the System Code only in FeliCa User Area mode. |
| Check Facility Code in HID mode | Checks the facility code of a HID card. |
| Facility Code | Enters the facility code of a HID card. When you tap the [Store] key, the facility code is stored. |
| Importing from the setup file | When you enter the configuration file name and tap the [Execute] key, the card area settings are read from the configuration file. If you tap the [Clear] key, all files that match the current search conditions are deleted. |
Card Type / Card Reader Settings: Use these settings for authentication and for use of a HID or other IC card.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Card Type / Card Reader | Enter the card type and card reader information. |
How does Active Directory Linking Function work and how is it configured?
You can join the Active Directory domain (AD domain) of the machine, and easily perform user management on the network. When you join an AD domain, you only need to be authenticated once for network devices.
Joining an AD domain: To have the machine join an AD domain, set the authentication destination to [Active Directory] in “Settings (administrator)” – [User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Authentication Server Settings]. When the authentication destination is set to Active Directory, the Kerberos setting cannot be used.
Registering the machine in an AD domain: When you join an AD domain, the machine is registered as a printer. Enter machine information in setting mode:
– Device name of the machine: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Name Setting] → [Device Name].
– Domain name of the machine: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Active Directory Settings] → [Domain Name].
– Machine user name and password: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Active Directory Settings] → [Device Registration Account].
– DNS domain name: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Services Settings] → [DNS] → [Domain Name].
User authentication in the AD domain:
1. Authentication by manual entry on the machine: Perform authentication using the touch panel. Configure: Disable “Settings (administrator)”→[User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Use IC Card for Authentication].
2. Login by IC card (Quick Mode): Use card ID for AD domain authentication. First time, enter password; subsequently, use IC card only. Configure: Enable “Settings (administrator)”→[User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Use IC Card for Authentication] AND Enable “Settings (administrator)”→[User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Cache Password for Authentication]. If password changes on AD server, it needs re-entry.
3. Login by IC card (security card): Use card ID. Always enter password. Configure: Enable “Settings (administrator)”→[User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Use IC Card for Authentication] AND Disable “Settings (administrator)”→[User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Cache Password for Authentication].
Functions that can be used by linking with Active Directory:
– User accessible network folders (Shared folder, Document filing)
– Home Directory (Scan to Home Directory, Print from Home Directory)
– E-Mail (Scan to E-Mail using user’s mail property)
Active Directory Settings (in System Settings → Network Settings → Active Directory Settings):
– Search Attribute: Set the lookup attribute. Default is cn.
– Linkage with User Control Function: Pages Limit Group (default: pagelimit), Authority Group (default: authority), Favourite Operation Group (default: favorite), My Folder (default: myfolder). (Hard disk expansion kit required on some models for My Folder).
– Device Registration Account: User Name (Enter user name), Password (Enter password).
What are Billing Codes and how are they used?
A billing code, added to a recorded job log when a printing or sending job is executed, is used for billing processing. Billing codes are classified into main code and sub code.
Types of billing codes:
| Type | Description |
|---|---|
| Main Code | Used to categorize results of executed print/send jobs for efficient management. E.g., assign code by customer. (Example: Issue of company A) |
| Sub Code | Available when main code alone is not sufficient. E.g., assign monthly cost information. (Example: Issue of February, 2018) |
| Default Code | Automatically assigned when main or sub code has not been specified. |
Enable use of billing code: Select “Settings (administrator)” → [User Control] → [Billing Code] → [Administration Settings], then set [Use Billing Code] to [Enable].
Collecting billing codes: In “Settings (Web version)”, select [System Settings] → [System Control] → [Job Log] → [Job Log Operation], and click [Save] to download job logs. Sum up data by classifying/arranging stored job logs.
How do I use and specify Billing Codes?
If billing code use is enabled, the billing code entry window appears at mode transition. Enter main or sub code.
– To enable use: “Settings (administrator)” → [User Control] → [Billing Code] → [Administration Settings], set [Use Billing Code] to [Enable].
– To retain specified billing code between modes: Set [Remember Billing Code Between Modes] check box in the same settings path.
Specifying a billing code again: Tap [Switch Billing Code.] on the action panel. When entry window appears, select new code.
Select a billing code from the list:
1. When billing code entry window is displayed, tap [Select from List] key of the main code.
2. Tap and select the main code from the list. (To search, tap search icon, enter code/name, tap [Search Start].)
3. Tap [OK].
4. Tap [Select from List] key of the sub code. The sub code list is displayed. Perform procedure in steps 2 and 3, then specify sub code.
5. Tap [OK].
– To cancel selection: Tap [Cancel and Return] on action panel.
– To check details: Tap [Display Details] on action panel.
– When not specifying a billing code: Tap [Bypass Billing Code] key.
– To select previously used billing code (at user auth): Tap [Use Previously-Used Billing Code] on action panel.
– To clear specified billing code: Tap [CA] key.
Directly entering a billing code:
1. When billing code entry window is displayed, tap box in [Main Code], then enter main code (up to 32 single-byte chars).
2. Tap box of [Sub Code], then enter sub code (up to 32 single-byte chars).
3. Tap [OK].
How do I register a new Billing Code?
A billing code can be registered from the billing code entry window or “Settings”.
– To register from Setting Mode: Select “Settings” → [User Control] → [Billing Code] → [Main Code List] or [Sub Code List].
A total of up to 2000 main and sub codes can be registered.
Shared range of billing code: Registered codes can be shared only in the specified group at user authentication. If shared range not specified, shared by all users. To register a user group: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Organization /Group List].
Steps to register from billing code entry window:
1. When billing code entry window is displayed, tap [Select from List] of the main code. (For new sub code, tap [Select from List] of sub code; subsequent steps are similar).
2. Tap [Add/Edit Billing Code] on the action panel.
3. Tap [Add New] on the action panel.
4. Tap the box of [Main Code], then type in the main code (up to 32 single-byte characters).
5. Tap the box of [Main Code Name], then type in the main code name (up to 32 double- or single-byte characters).
6. If necessary, select the share range of billing code: [Public to All] or [Specify target public address] (up to 8 groups). If user authentication not performed, mode is auto set to [Public to All].
7. If [Specify target public address] chosen, tap and select a group. Up to eight groups can be specified. Tap [OK]. To cancel setting, tap [Clear] on action panel.
8. To continuously register other billing codes, tap [Register Next Billing Code.]. Execute steps 4 to 7 to register the main code.
9. Tap [End Registration] on the action panel. This finalizes registration and returns to previous screen. Tap [OK] to finish registration procedure.
– To cancel registration: Tap [Cancel and Return] on action panel.
– To return to billing code entry window: Tap [CA] key.
How do I edit or delete a registered Billing Code?
Editing a billing code:
1. When billing code entry window is displayed, tap [Select from List] key of the main code.
2. Tap [Add/Edit Billing Code] on the action panel.
3. Tap and select the main code to be edited, then tap [Edit] on the action panel.
4. Edit the main code as required (refer to steps for registering a new billing code).
5. Tap [End Registration] on the action panel. Tap [OK] to finish.
Deleting a billing code:
1. When billing code entry window is displayed, tap [Select from List] key of the main code.
2. Tap [Add/Edit Billing Code] on the action panel.
3. Tap and select the main code to be deleted, then tap [Delete] on the action panel.
4. When the confirmation message appears, tap the [Delete] key.
To return to the billing code selection window from the list, tap [OK].
What are the Billing Code Settings in administrator mode?
In “Settings (administrator)” → [User Control] → [Billing Code]:
Administration Settings:
– Use Billing Code: Switch whether to enable or disable a billing code.
– Default Code Setting: A use code is automatically assigned when no billing code is entered. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte characters.
– Remember Billing Code Between Modes: If enabled, billing code entry window not displayed at mode transition.
– Disable Change of Billing Code: If enabled, you cannot register, edit, or delete a billing code, nor directly type one in the entry window.
– Apply Default Code when Billing Code not entered: If enabled, a use code is always set while logging in with device account.
– Disable Billing Code for Selected Applications: Billing code entry window displayed when external application set to enable is started. (Configure Application Name registered as Standard Application).
– Billing Code Display Name Setting: Change main/sub code name displayed in entry window or selection window.
Main Code List: Display list to search, register, correct, or delete a main code.
– [Search] key: Searches for a main code.
– [Add] key: Adds a new main code.
– List: Displays registered main codes. Selecting one displays correction window.
– [Delete] key: Set checkbox, tap [Delete] key to delete selected main code.
– Register a main code: Tap [Add]. Up to 2,000 main/sub codes. Tap [Submit and Register Next] to continue, [Submit] to end.
– Correct a main code: Select from list. After correcting, tap [Submit].
– Search for a main code: Enter code/name, tap [Search].
Settings for Main Code (Register/Correct/Search):
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Main Code | Enter main code (up to 32 single-byte characters). |
| Main Code Name | Enter main code name (up to 32 double- or single-byte characters). |
| Available to | The registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group. Select [All Users] or [Designate Public Address.] (specify group). |
To register a group for specifying a public destination: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Organization /Group List].
Sub Code List: Similar functions as Main Code List but for sub codes (Register, Correct, Delete, Search).
Settings for Sub Code (Register/Correct/Search):
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Sub Code | Enter sub code (up to 32 single-byte characters). |
| Sub Code Name | Enter sub code name (up to 32 double- or single-byte characters). |
| Available to | The registered billing codes can only be shared in the specified group. Select [All Users] or [Designate Public Address.] (specify group). |
How can I adjust the operation panel angle?
The angle of the entire operation panel can be adjusted to enable use even when seated.
How do the grip handles on paper trays work?
The grip-type handles allow easy use from above or below. By simply placing your hand on a handle and gently pulling forward, the lock releases. The trays can be manipulated in a natural manner.
How can I change the key response time?
The response time of the keys can be changed as needed. In “Settings” (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Key Operation Setting].
The following settings can be changed:
Time for Accepting Key Entry
This setting determines how long a key in the touch panel must be tapped until the key input is registered. The time can be set from 0 to 2 seconds in increments of 0.5 seconds. By lengthening the time setting, key input can be prevented when a key is tapped accidentally. Keep in mind, however, that when a longer setting is selected more care is required when tapping keys to ensure that key input is registered.
Disable Auto Key Repeat
This is used to disable key repeat. Key repeat causes a setting to change continuously not only each time the key is tapped but while a key is tapped.
Long-touch Detection Time
Select a time when a long key touch is detected.
Double Tap Speed Interval
Select an interval when a double tap is detected.
How can I confirm the placement of an original in the document feeder?
You can use the data notification indicator to check if an original has been correctly placed in the auto document feeder. Select “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Data Indicator Setting], then set to [Pattern 3].
How can I change the text size on the touch panel?
The size of the text on the touch panel can be changed. When the text on the touch panel is small and difficult to read, the text can be enlarged. In “Settings” (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Enlarge Display Mode].
Enlarge Display Mode
Displays large characters on the screen. An icon appears in the system area when Enlarge Display Mode is enabled.
How can I enable audible alert sounds when changing settings?
When moving through copy ratio or exposure settings, the user is alerted by an audible sound at the default setting (copy ratio 100%, exposure 3). In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Keys Touch Sound] and [Make Key Touch Sound at Default Setting].
Keys Touch Sound
Controls the key touch sound level, or turns the sound off. You can also have three peeps sound at initial values when setting the ratio in copy mode or when adjusting the exposure in any mode.
Make Key Touch Sound at Default Setting
When you specify the exposure in the exposure adjustment screen of each mode, a bleep sounds three times when the reference value is reached.
| Screen in which setting is effective | Initial value |
|---|---|
| Ratio setting screen in base screen of copy mode | Ratio 100% |
| Exposure setting screen in base screen of copy mode | Exposure level: 3 (medium) |
| Exposure adjustment screen in base screen of fax, Internet fax, and network scanner modes | |
| Exposure adjustment screen for Scan to HDD in document filing mode |
How can I customize the home screen and add icons?
You can add icons to the home screen. You can also change an icon image to a custom image.
Add an icon image in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] →[Home Screen Settings] →[Icon].
To add an icon to the home screen, add a key in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] →[Home Screen Settings] →[Condition Settings] →[Home Button]/[Fix Key].
How can I change the display order of items on the home screen?
You can change the order of the items in the home screen so that the items you use most frequently appear first. To change the order of the items in the home screen, change in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] →[Home Screen Settings] →[Condition Settings] →[Home Button].
How do I set the touch panel to a high-contrast display (UD pattern)?
The touch panel image can be set to high contrast. Select [Pattern 5] in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] →[Common Settings] →[Operation Settings] →[Condition Settings] →[MFP Display Pattern Setting].
How can I change the display language on the touch panel?
The language used in the touch panel can be changed to another language such as English or French. Select the desired language in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] →[Common Settings] →[Operation Settings] →[Condition Settings] → [Display Language Setting].
How can I access the quick-view operation guide?
Touch the [Operation Guide] key in the home screen on the touch panel to display the operation guide. The operation guide provides simple explanations of how to use the machine.
How can I operate the machine remotely?
You can display the machine’s touch panel on a computer on the same network to operate the machine from the computer. You can show how to use the machine on a computer, and people who have difficulty using the touch panel can operate the machine from a computer.
How do I configure voice assist settings?
Configure in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Voice Assist Settings].
The following can be configured:
Voice Assist Function
Configure these settings if you want to use voice assist.
Language Setting
Set the language used for voice assist.
Automatically switch the Voice Assist Language to the Display Setting Language when it is changed.
Enable this setting if you want the voice assist language to change when the language that appears on the touch panel is changed. When the language is changed to a language other than Japanese, voice assist will use American English.
Voice Assist Items
Set the items for which you want voice assist to provide assistance.
How do I adjust the volume of voice assist using the Volume Icon?
When [Voice Assist Function] is enabled and configured the [Home Screen Settings], [Volume] appears in the home screen. Use this to adjust the volume of voice assist. Tap the Volume icon on the home screen, then adjust the volume level using the slider or +/- buttons. You can also mute the sound or test playback.
How do I configure the Home Screen Settings for the Volume Icon?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Home Screen Settings].
What information is recorded in the job log?
The machine records performed jobs in the job log. The main information recorded includes:
| No. | Main items | Item name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Main Items | Job ID | The job ID is recorded. Job IDs appear in the log as consecutive numbers up to a maximum of 999999, after which the count resets to 1. |
| 2 | Account Job ID | The job ID used in the Sharp OSA is recorded. | |
| 3 | Job Mode | The job mode type, such as copy or print is recorded. | |
| 4 | Computer Name | The name of the computer that sent a print job is recorded.* | |
| 5 | User Name | The user name when the user authentication function is used is recorded. | |
| 6 | Login Name | The login name when the user authentication function is used is recorded. | |
| 7 | Card ID | The card ID when it is used for an authentication process is recorded. | |
| 8 | Number of Card Issuance | The number of times the card has been issued is written in an SSFC IC card is recorded. | |
| 9 | Main Code | Main Code is recorded. | |
| 10 | Sub Code | Sub Code is recorded. | |
| 11 | Starting Date & Time | The date and time the job was started are recorded. | |
| 12 | Completing Date & Time | The date and time the job was completed are recorded. | |
| 13 | Black & White Total Count | For a print job, the total count is recorded. For a send job, the number of transmitted black & white pages is recorded. When a broadcast transmission is summarized, the total number of pages is recorded. For a scan to HDD job, the number of stored black & white pages is recorded. | |
| 14 | Full Colour Total Count | The total number of pages in a send job that have been printed using a full colour is recorded. | |
| 15 | Count according to size | Counts by original/paper size in colour mode and black & white mode are recorded. | |
| 16 | Number of sheets according to size | The number of pages is logged by paper size. | |
| 17 | Invalid Paper Count | The invalid sheet count is recorded. | |
| 18 | Number of Reserved Sets | Number of specified sets or reserved destinations is recorded. | |
| 19 | Number of Completed Sets | Number of completed sets or number of destinations to which transmission was successfully completed is recorded. | |
| 20 | Main items | Number of Reserved Pages | Number of reserved original pages of a copy, print, scan job, or other job is recorded. |
| 21 | Number of Completed Pages | Number of completed pages of a set is recorded. | |
| 22 | Result | The result of a job is recorded. | |
| 23 | Error Cause | When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error is recorded. | |
| 24 | Print Job Related Item | Output | The output mode of a printed job is recorded. |
| 25 | Staple | The status of stapling is recorded. | |
| 26 | Staple Count | The staple count is recorded. | |
| 27 | Punch | The status of punching is recorded. | |
| 28 | Punch Count | The punch count is recorded. | |
| 29 | Fold | A job that uses the fold function is recorded. | |
| 30 | Fold Count | Number of folded pages is recorded. | |
| 31 | Saddle Fold | A job that uses the saddle fold function is recorded. | |
| 32 | Saddle Fold Count | Number of saddle folded pages is recorded. | |
| 33 | Printer Tone | The tone used for a print job is recorded. | |
| 34 | Image Send Related Item | Address | Address of an image send job is recorded. |
| 35 | Sender Name | Sender name of an image send job is recorded. | |
| 36 | Sender Address | Sender address of an image send job is recorded. | |
| 37 | Transmission Type | Transmission type of an image send job is recorded. | |
| 38 | Administrative Serial Number | Administrative serial number of an image send job is recorded. | |
| 39 | Broadcast number | Broadcast number of an image send job is recorded. | |
| 40 | Entry order | Reservation Order for broadcast transmission of an image send job is recorded. This is used to link communication and printing when recording multi polling jobs. | |
| 41 | File Format | File format of an image send job or scan to HDD job is recorded. | |
| 42 | Sign | Records whether or not an electronic signature is used in e-mail transmission. | |
| 43 | Encry. | Records whether or not encryption is used for e-mail transmission. | |
| 44 | Compression Mode/Compression Ratio | Compression mode and compression ratio of the file of an image send job or scan to HDD job is recorded. | |
| 45 | Communication Time | The communication time of image send jobs is recorded. | |
| 46 | Document Filing Related Item | Fax No. | The stored sender’s number is recorded. |
| 47 | Document Filing | Status of document filing is recorded. | |
| 48 | Storing Mode | Document filing storing mode is recorded. | |
| 49 | Common Functionality | Colour Setting | Colour mode selected by user is recorded. |
| 50 | Special Modes | Special modes selected when the job was executed is recorded. | |
| 51 | Detailed Items | File Name | The stored file name is recorded.* |
| 52 | Data Size [KB] | The size of a file is recorded. | |
| 53 | Original Size | Size of scanned original is recorded. For a document filing print job, the paper size of the file is recorded. | |
| 54 | Original Type | Original type (text, printed photo, etc.) set in the exposure settings screen is recorded. | |
| 55 | Original Count | Number of scanned original sheets is recorded. | |
| 56 | Paper Size | For a print job, the paper size is recorded. For a send job, the transmitted paper size is recorded. For a Scan to HDD job, the paper size of the stored file is recorded. | |
| 57 | Paper Type | The paper type used for printing is recorded. | |
| 58 | Paper Property | The paper property specified in “Paper Type” is recorded. | |
| 59 | Machine Item | Duplex Setup | The duplex setting is recorded. |
| 60 | Resolution | The scanning resolution is recorded. | |
| 61 | Model Name | The model name of the machine is recorded. | |
| 62 | Unit Serial Number | The serial number of the machine is recorded. | |
| 63 | Name | The name of the machine that is set in the Web pages is recorded. | |
| 64 | Machine Location | The installation location of the machine that is set in the Web pages is recorded. | |
| 65 | Machine ID | Record the Machine ID entered by the service technician. |
* In some environments this is not recorded.
Note: To make it easy to total the usage counts of differently configured machines, the items recorded in the job log are fixed, regardless of what peripheral devices are installed or the objective of the recording. In some cases, job information may not be correctly recorded, such as when a power failure occurs during a job.
How can I print a manual from the operation panel?
The manuals can be printed from the Operation Guide embedded in the machine. To print a manual, refer to the Quick Start Guide.
How can I prohibit printing of manuals from the operation panel?
In “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] →[Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Disable Printing of Operation Manual from the Operation Panel].
What is the definition of “R” in paper size?
To indicate the landscape setting, “R” is added to the end of the name of a paper size enabled for both landscape and portrait settings.
| Paper that can be set either in the portrait or landscape orientation | Paper that can only be set in the landscape orientation | |
|---|---|---|
| A4, B5, 8-1/2″ x 11″ | A3W, A3, B4, 12″ x 18″, 11″ x 17″, 8-1/2″ x 14″, 8-1/2″ x 13″ | |
| Paper set in the landscape orientation | Paper set in the portrait orientation | Can be placed only in the landscape orientation |
| A4R (8-1/2″ x 11″R) | A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″) | A3 (11″ x 17″) |
How do I set the weight of plain paper?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Plain Paper Compatibility Settings]. Set the weight of the plain paper that is regularly used. Select from Plain Paper 1 or Plain Paper 2.
The weight of Plain Paper 1 is 60 to 89 g/m² (16 to 24 lbs bond). The weight of Plain Paper 2 is 90 to 105 g/m² (24 to 28 lbs bond). Check the weight of the plain paper that you regularly use, and set accordingly.
How should I set the orientation of the print side for letterhead or pre-printed paper?
The setting orientation varies for the print side of paper, depending on the tray used. For “Letter Head” and “Pre-Printed”, set the paper in the reverse orientation. Place with the print side facing the direction indicated below:
| Tray | In normal status | With letter head or pre-printed paper set |
|---|---|---|
| Trays 1 – 4 | Facing up | Facing down |
| Bypass, Tray 5 | Facing down | Facing up |
When [Disabling of Duplex] is set for “Letter Head” or “Pre-Printed”, set the print side in the same orientation as for the ordinary operation.
How do I set [Disabling of Duplex]?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Duplex].
What types of paper cannot be used in the machine?
The following paper types cannot be used:
• Embossed paper
• Special media for an ink jet printer (fine paper, glossy paper, glossy film, etc.)
• Carbon paper or thermal paper
• Pasted paper
• Paper with clips
• Paper with fold marks
• Torn paper
• Oil-feed transparency film
• Thin paper less than 55 g/m² (15 lbs)
• Heavy paper as thick as 300 g/m² (110 lbs. cover) over
• Irregularly shaped paper
• Stapled paper
• Damp paper
• Curled paper
• Paper whose print side or reverse side has been already printed on by another printer or multifunction device.
• Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture absorption
• Paper with creases
• Paper with dust
What types of paper are non-recommended?
The following paper types are non-recommended:
• Iron-on transfer paper
• Perforated paper
How do I load paper into Tray 1 – 4 (when a low stand/550 sheet paper drawer or stand/550/2×550/3×550/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed)?
A maximum of 550 sheets of paper from size A5R to A3W (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″R to 12″ x 18″) can be loaded into trays 1 to 4.
1. Pull out the paper tray. Gently pull the tray out until it stops. To load paper, go to step 3. To load a different size of paper, go to the next step.
2. Adjust guide plates A and B to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded. The guide plates A and B are slidable. Squeeze the separator plate lever and slide to the desired paper size. Adjust to the non-standard paper size so that the paper will not be too loose or too tight.
3. Fan the paper. Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
4. Insert the paper into the tray. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 550 sheets).
5. Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly. Forcefully inserting the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds.
To check the type and size of paper:
[Tray Settings] in the home screen or in “Settings”, select [Status] → [Machine Identification] → [Paper Input Tray Status] → [Paper Tray Settings].
To set the type and size of paper:
Set this in [Tray Settings] in the home screen or in “Settings” – [System Settings]→[Common Settings]→[Paper Settings]→[Paper Tray Settings].
Note: If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in “Settings (administrator)”. Incorrect setting affects automatic paper selection action. It may cause print failure, printing on paper of a wrong size or type or paper misfeeds. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray. Pull the handle until the lock is released when opening the tray.
How do I load paper into Tray 3 – 4 (when a stand/550&2100 sheet paper drawer is installed)?
A maximum of 1200 sheets of A4 (8-1/2″ × 11″) paper can be loaded into tray 3 (left). A maximum of 900 sheets of A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″) and B5 paper can be loaded into tray 4 (right).
1. Pull out the paper tray. Gently pull the tray out until it stops.
2. Fan the paper. Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
3. Place paper into the tray. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1200 sheets for tray 3, or maximum of 900 sheets for tray 4).
4. Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine slowly.
To check the type and size of paper:
In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings].
Note: If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in “Settings”. An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or type or paper misfeeds. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray. Pull the handle until the lock is released when opening the tray.
How do I load paper in the large-capacity tray (when installed)?
The large capacity tray is used for very large print jobs. Up to 3000 sheets of A4 or B5 paper (80g/m²) can be loaded.
1. Open the top cover.
2. Fan the paper. Fan the paper well before loading it. If the paper is not fanned, multiple sheets may feed at once and cause a misfeed.
3. Place the paper in the paper feed table. Insert the paper into the tray until it stops. Place the paper print side down. The stack should not exceed the indicator line (maximum 3000 sheets).
4. Gently close the cover.
To check the paper type loaded in the tray:
Check in “Settings” – [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings].
Note: If you loaded paper of a different type from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in “Settings”. If you find it necessary to change the paper size, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative. When the tray is open, do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray. When adding paper, take care that previously loaded paper does not shift out of place. This may cause misfeeds and folding back of the front edge of the loaded paper.
How do I load paper into the bypass tray?
Use the bypass tray for printing on plain paper, envelopes, label sheets, tab paper, and other special media. Up to 100 sheets of paper can be loaded (Heavy paper weighing between 106 g/m² and 256 g/m² (28 lbs. bond and 140 lbs. index): 40 sheets, heavy paper weighing between 257 g/m² and 300 g/m² (140 lbs. index and 110 lbs. cover) and envelope: 20 sheets).
1. Open the bypass tray. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2″ x 11″R or A4R, pull out the extension guide all the way out.
2. Load the paper with the print side facing down. Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until it stops slowly. The paper must not exceed the maximum number of sheets and must not be higher than the indicator line.
3. Set the bypass tray guides correctly to the width of the paper. Adjust the bypass tray guides so that they slightly contact the loaded paper.
How to place the original for bypass tray:
Load paper up to A5 (7-1/4″ x 10-1/2″) size in landscape orientation.
Loading tab paper:
To print on tab paper, load tab paper into the bypass tray with the print side facing down. Use only tab paper that is made of paper. Tab paper made of a material other than paper (film, etc.) cannot be used. To print on the tabs of tab paper: In copy mode, use [Tab Copy] in “Others”. In print mode, use the tab print function.
Notes:
• When using plain paper other than Sharp standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended transparency film, glossy paper, or when printing on the reverse side of paper that has been printed on one side, load paper one sheet at a time. Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause misfeeds.
• Before loading paper, straighten any curling in the paper.
• When adding paper, remove any paper remaining in the bypass tray, combine it with the paper to be added, and reload as a single stack. If paper is added without removing the remaining paper, a misfeed may result. Loading more sheets than the specified number of sheets or the limit may cause paper misfeeds.
• Do not place heavy objects on the bypass tray or press down on the tray.
• For “Letter Head” and “Pre-Printed”, set the paper with the print side up. However, when [Disabling of Duplex] is enabled, set the print side in the same orientation as in the regular mode (facing down).
• Do not forcefully push in paper that you are loading. This may cause misfeeds.
• If the bypass tray guides are set wider than the paper, move the bypass tray guides in until they correctly fit the width of the paper. If the bypass guides are set too wide, the paper may skew or be creased.
How do I insert transparency film into the bypass tray?
• Use SHARP-recommended transparency film.
• When loading multiple sheets of transparency film into the bypass tray, fan the sheets several times before loading.
• When printing on transparency film, remove each sheet as it is printed and output from the machine. Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may result in curling.
Load with the print side facing down. Orient horizontally or vertically as needed.
How do I load envelopes into the bypass tray?
When inserting envelopes in the bypass tray, place them aligned to the left side in the orientation shown in the PDF. Only the front side of envelopes can be printed or copied on. Place the front side facing down. Fold the flap and make a sharp crease at the fold.
What are the important points when using envelopes?
• Do not print on both sides of an envelope. This may result in misfeeds or poor print quality.
• Restrictions apply to some types of envelopes. For more information, consult a qualified service technician.
• Some operating environments may cause creasing, smudging, misfeeds, poor toner fusing, or machine failure.
• Fold the flap of the envelope and make a sharp crease at the fold. A misfeed may occur if the flap is up.
• Do not use the following envelopes:
• Those with a metal piece, a plastic hook or a ribbon hook
• Those with a string for closing
• Those with a window
• Those with a lining
• Those with an uneven surface, finished with titling or emboss
• Duplex envelopes or those with adhesive or other synthetic material for sealing
• Hand-made envelopes
• Those containing air inside
• Those damaged with a crease, fold mark or tear
• Envelopes with the corner gluing position on the back not aligned with the corner edge should not be used as it may cause creasing.
• Print quality is not guaranteed in the area 10 mm (13/32″) around the edges of the envelope.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on parts of envelopes where there is a large step-like change of thickness, such as on four-layer parts or parts less than three layers.
• Print quality is not guaranteed on envelopes having peel off flaps for sealing the envelopes.
What are the important points when using label sheets?
• For more information, consult the dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
• Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation. Follow such instructions. If a form is already printed on the labels, and the print images and the preprinted form do not line up, adjust the application or printer driver settings to rotate the print images.
• Do not use the following types of label sheets:
• Label sheets without an adhesive copy or label copy
• Label sheets with adhesive exposed
• Label sheets with a specified feeding direction that is not supported by the machine
• A label sheet that has already been fed or has some labels removed
• Label sheets consisting of multiple sheets
• Label sheets that do not support laser printing
• Label sheets that cannot withstand heat
• Label sheets that have perforations in the backing paper
• Label sheets with slits in the backing paper
• Non-standard label sheets
• Label sheets with adhesive that has deteriorated due to prolonged storage or otherwise
• Label sheets with cutouts that expose the backing paper
• Curled or otherwise deformed label sheets
• Torn or creased label sheets
How do I display the paper tray settings when paper is detected in the bypass tray?
In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings] → [Paper Tray Settings] → [Display Paper Tray Settings when bypass tray detects paper.].
How do I attach the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray?
The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below:
1. Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray.
2. Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray.
3. Attach the long paper feeding tray onto the extension guide of the bypass tray.
4. Replace the extension guide of the bypass tray.
How do I configure paper settings in the system settings?
You can configure detailed settings such as the size and type of paper in a tray. In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Paper Settings].
Paper Tray Settings
These settings specify the paper type, paper size, and functions allowed for each paper tray. When [Paper Tray Settings] is selected, a list appears showing the trays and the current settings.
Auto Switching of Tray
When a tray runs out of paper during printing, this determines whether or not another tray with the same size and type of paper is automatically selected and printing continues.
Display Paper Tray Settings when bypass tray detects paper.
You can have the paper tray settings appear automatically when paper is detected in the bypass tray.
Settings of each tray
When the [Change] key is tapped, the corresponding setting screen appears. The following settings can be configured:
| List name | Description |
|---|---|
| Type | Select a type of paper to be loaded into the tray. The paper types that can be selected vary by paper tray. For user type setup, see “Paper Type Registration”. |
| Size | Select the paper size from the list. The paper sizes that can be selected vary by tray. The sizes that can be selected may also be restricted by the paper type selected above. If the desired size does not appear in the list, select [Custom Size] and directly enter the size (only for the bypass tray). |
| Sending Address List | Select the modes that can be used. If there is a function that you do not wish to be used with the selected tray, disable the function. When the “Type” is other than plain paper, recycled paper, coloured paper, or a user type, [Fax] and [Internet Fax] cannot be selected. |
Notes:
• If the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded into a tray, a problem or misfeed may occur when printing.
• Paper properties such as “Fixed Paper Side” are automatically set when the paper type is selected. The paper tray properties cannot be changed in this screen.
• If [System Settings] in “Settings” → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Tray Settings] is selected, the tray settings (except for the bypass tray) cannot be configured.
• Tray settings can only be changed in setting mode of the machine.
How do I register custom paper sizes for the bypass tray?
If you frequently use a non-standard size paper in the bypass tray, register that paper size in advance. Up to Seven paper sizes can be registered. Tap the key ([Custom 1] to [Custom 7]) in which you wish to register or change a paper size, and the registration screen appears. Select whether you wish to enter the inches (“Size Input-Inch”) or size in mm (“Size Input-AB”), and then set the X and Y dimensions of the paper.
“Size Input-AB”
The X direction can be set between 140mm and 457mm. The factory default setting is 420mm.
The Y direction can be set between 90mm and 320mm. The factory default setting is 297mm.
“Size Input-Inch”
The X direction can be set between 5-1/2″ and 18″. The factory default setting is 17″.
The Y direction can be set between 3-5/8″ and 12-1/2″. The factory default setting is 11″.
How do I register a new paper type or create a new set of paper properties?
Store a paper type when the desired paper type does not appear as a selection or when you wish to create a new set of paper properties. Up to 7 paper types can be registered.
| List name | Description |
|---|---|
| Type Name | Register any name. The factory default names are “User Type 1” to “User Type 7”. |
| Fixed Paper Side | Use this setting when paper with a front and reverse side is used. |
| Disable Duplex | Use this setting when paper loaded cannot be used for 2-sided printing. |
| Disable Reverse | Use this setting when using paper that cannot be reversed. |
| Disable Staple | Use this setting when paper used cannot be stapled. |
| Disable Punch | Use this setting when paper used cannot be punched. |
| Disable Fold | Use this setting when paper used cannot be folded. |
Note: The settings that can be selected vary depending on the peripheral devices installed.
How do I set detectable original sizes?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting]. One of the 8 groups of standard original sizes shown in the PDF can be selected for detection by the original size detection function.
How can I cancel original size detection at the document glass?
Original size detection on the document glass can be disabled. When this is done, all originals placed on the document glass are treated as special size originals. This setting is found within the [Original Size Detector Setting] menu mentioned previously.
How do I set the default Original Feeding Mode?
The following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, and scan to HDD (Hard disk expansion kit may be required on some models). When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode each time you need to use it.
• Mixed Size Doc. Different Width
• Slow Scan Mode
• Blank Page Skip (Excluding fax mode and Internet fax mode)
This setting is typically found within “Settings (administrator)” under options related to copy, image send or scan settings.
How do I set the Plain Paper Compatibility Settings?
Set the weight of the plain paper that is regularly used. Select from Plain Paper 1 or Plain Paper 2. The weight of Plain Paper 1 is 60 to 89 g/m² (16 to 24 lbs bond). The weight of Plain Paper 2 is 90 to 105 g/m² (24 to 28 lbs bond). Check the weight of the plain paper that you regularly use, and set accordingly. This setting is likely within “Settings (administrator)” under device or paper settings.
How do I configure the Initial Original Count Setting?
This specifies whether or not “Original Count” in Others is enabled for each function. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Initial Original Count Setting].
The following settings can be configured:
Copy
• Copy
Image Send
• Scan to
• Internet Fax
• Fax
• Data Entry
Document Filing
• Scan to HDD
How do I place originals in the automatic document feeder (ADF)?
1. Make sure that there is no original on the document glass.
2. Place the original. Align the edges evenly and face them up. Insert to the end, below the indicator line. Fit to the Original Size. After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder, remove originals from the original exit tray.
Important notes for using the ADF:
• Place originals of different sizes together, if needed. In that case, use the “Others” function in each mode to set [Mixed Size Original]. An original cannot be detected if all pages are of the same size but some of them are set in a different orientation.
• Before inserting originals, remove any staples or paper clips.
• If originals have damp spots (correction fluid, ink, glue), wait until dry before copying.
• Do not use transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon.
• Originals should not be damaged, crumpled, folded, loosely pasted, or have cut-out holes. Originals with multiple punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.
• When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the punched edge is at a position away from the feed slot. Specify the orientation using [Original].
• For a thin original (35 g/m² – 49 g/m²), use [Slow Scan Mode] in “Others”. For this type, 2-sided scanning is disabled.
• To scan originals from 35 to 49 g/m² (9 to 13 lbs Bond), use “Slow Scan Mode” in the “Others” function. Scanning without using “Slow Scan Mode” may result in original misfeeds. When “Slow Scan Mode” is selected, automatic 2-sided scanning is not possible.
How do I place originals on the document glass?
1. Open the automatic document feeder.
2. Load the paper with the print side facing down. Place the original face down and align the top left corner of the original with back left (at the tip of the mark on the document glass).
3. Close the automatic document feeder. After placing the original, close the automatic document feeder. If the unit is left open, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner.
Important notes for using the document glass:
• Close the automatic document feeder slowly. Abruptly closing it may cause damage.
• Take care that your fingers are not pinched when closing the automatic document feeder.
• Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector or disable correct detection of the original size.
• When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, the size can be detected easily if a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″), B5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″), or other standard size paper is placed on top of the original.
• If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or paste up glue, wait until the originals are dry before making copies. Otherwise the interior of the machine or the document glass may be soiled.
How do I stop or delete a job in progress or a reserved job?
1. Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job that you wish to stop or delete.
2. Tap the [Job Queue] key. (When you wish to stop a print job being sent from the computer, tap the [Spool] key.)
3. Tap the job that you wish to stop or delete, and then tap [Stop/Delete] on the action panel. When a screen appears that allows you to confirm that you do want to stop the job, tap the [Cancel] key.
Notes:
• If the machine runs out of paper during a copy or print job, you can cancel the job from the job status screen.
• To delete more than one job, operate the check box for [Enter Plural Selection Mode] on the action panel so that it looks like a check mark.
• Printing of a received fax or Internet fax cannot be stopped.
• A job set for transfer in “FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS)” cannot be cancelled.
How do I give priority processing to a reserved job?
This function gives priority to processing of copied, faxed or image send jobs arising later to jobs already in a queue for printing or sending.
1. Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job for priority processing.
2. Tap the [Job Queue] key.
3. Tap the job for priority processing and then tap [Change Job Priority] on the action panel.
Priority processing operation varies, as follows, depending on the job type:
• Job on the print tab: The job currently in progress is suspended to let the priority job make interruption.
• Job on the scanner/fax/Internet fax tab: The priority job is moved directly under the job currently in progress.
How do I change the job order in the queue?
If there is a job in progress, an interrupt job can be performed, or a job can be moved down in the queue to change the job order. Tap the key of the job you want to move, and tap the “Priority Change” key. The following keys allow you to change the order:
• Top arrow key: Moves the selected job to the top of the queue. The current job will be interrupted and the selected job starts.
• Up arrow key: Moves the selected job up one position. When the second job from the top is selected, tapping this key interrupts the current job and starts the selected job.
• Down arrow key: Moves the selected job down one position.
• Bottom arrow key: Moves the selected job to the bottom of the queue.
Scanner job with a timer setting:
When a scanner job with a timer setting is selected, tapping the order change keys moves the job as follows:
• Up arrow key: The timer setting is cancelled and the job moves to the position after the job in progress (second from top).
• Bottom arrow key: The timer setting is cancelled and the job moves to the lowest position in the queue (if there are 3 jobs, the 4th position).
• Top arrow and Down arrow keys cannot be used for scanner jobs with a timer setting.
Note: The jobs below cannot be moved: Job currently in progress, interrupt copy jobs, list print jobs, and jobs when Passing Prohibited is set in the system settings.
How do I prohibit Job Priority Operation?
Use this setting to prohibit Job Priority Operation and hide the [Priority Change] key in the Job Status screen. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Disabling of Job Priority Operation].
How do I disable Bypass Printing?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Disabling of Bypass Printing]. This setting is used to disable bypass printing (printing other jobs ahead of a job that has been stopped because the paper required for the job is not available in any of the trays). This does not include cases where the paper ran out during the job.
How can I switch the display in the “Job Queue” screen between the number of printed copies and remaining copies for print jobs?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Switch the Number of Sets to be Displayed for Job Status].
How do I check a reserved job or a job in progress?
1. Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check.
2. Tap the [Job Queue] key.
3. Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel.
Note: Different job contents appear in different modes. For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in “Status”, refer to the “READING THE JOB LIST” section of the PDF.
How do I check completed jobs?
1. Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check.
2. Tap the [Complete] key.
3. Tap the job whose contents you wish to check and then tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel. Jobs you can check are displayed as keys so that you can tap them.
Note: Different job contents appear in different modes. For information on the icons displayed on the job keys or the messages displayed in “Status”, refer to the “READING THE JOB LIST” section of the PDF.
How do I prohibit the display and changing of job information of other users when user authentication is enabled?
Select “Settings (administrator)” → [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Include Job Status in user authentication] → [Disable display/change of other users’ information in the job status] check box to enable this.
How does Job Spool Queuing work?
When this function is enabled, received print jobs are displayed in the spool queue of the job status screen. The jobs are moved to the job queue after they have been analyzed by the machine. Multiple jobs that have not yet been analyzed appear in the spool queue. To enable this, in “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Job Spool Queuing].
What do the icons in the job list indicate?
The icons indicate the job type:
| Icon with “RGB CMYK” | Print job (RGB/CMYK) |
| Icon of a document | Copy job |
| Icon of an envelope | Scan to E-mail job |
| Icon of a globe with an arrow | Scan to FTP job |
| Icon of a folder with an arrow | Scan to Network Folder job |
| Icon of a desktop monitor | Scan to Desktop job |
| Icon of a telephone receiver (outgoing) | Fax transmission job |
| Icon of a telephone receiver (incoming) | Fax reception job |
| Icon of a telephone connected to a PC | PC-Fax transmission job |
| Icon of a globe with “@” symbol (outgoing) | Internet fax transmission job (Including Direct SMTP) |
| Icon of a PC with a globe | PC-I-Fax transmission job |
| Icon of a document with an arrow to HDD | Scan to HDD file print job |
| Icon of a globe with “@” symbol (incoming) | Internet fax reception job (Including Direct SMTP) |
| Icon of multiple people | Broadcast job* Inbound routing job |
| Icon of two documents | Tandem copy/print job |
| Icon of a document with “OSA” | OSA Scan Job |
* This appears in a multi-mode broadcast job.
What do the messages displayed in “Status” mean for a job in progress?
| Display | Status |
|---|---|
| “Printing” | Print job in progress |
| “Copying” | Copy job in progress |
| “Connecting” | Connecting |
| “Sending” | Sending |
| “Receiving” | Receiving |
| “Processing” | Processing |
| “Tel” | Speaking with the other party using an extension telephone |
| “Stopped” | The job has been stopped. |
| “Toner Empty” | Toner Empty |
| “Paper Empty” | Paper Empty |
| “Paper Jam” | Paper jam |
| “Waiting” | Waiting |
| “Warming up” | Warming up |
| “Limit” | Having reached the account limit |
| “Report Wait” | Transmission confirmation reception timeout |
| “Error” | An error occurred while the job was being executed. |
What do the messages displayed in “Status” mean for a reserved job?
| Display | Status |
|---|---|
| “Waiting” | The job is waiting to be executed. |
| “Retry Mode” | The job is being retried due to a communication error or other problem. |
| “Report Wait” | Waiting for confirmation of Internet fax transmission |
| A day and time is displayed | Timer transmission job (the specified time is displayed) |
What do the messages displayed in “Status” mean for a completed job?
| Display | Status |
|---|---|
| “OK” | Normal termination |
| “Send OK” | Transmission was completed. |
| “NG Ck Line” | Fax line cable is not connected |
| “In Memory” | Reception completed but the fax has not been printed. |
| “Received” | The received data (each page) has not been printed or forwarded. (The received data has not been deleted.) |
| Printed received fax data. | |
| The fax has been received. | |
| “Forward OK” | The received data (each file) was stored. |
| The received data/received data (each file) has been forwarded. | |
| “FAST” | FAST transmission completed. |
| “Stopped” | The job was stopped. |
| “Delete” | Deleted received data in the image check screen. |
| “Number of successful transmission destinations/Total destinations OK” | Completion of a broadcast transmission, serial polling, or inbound routing operation. If transmission to 3 destinations was successful out of a total of 5, “003/005 OK” will appear. |
| “No Response” | An error occurred because there was no response from the destination. |
| “Busy” | An error occurred because the other party was busy. |
| “Received” (for E-mail) | E-mail other than Internet fax received |
| “Rejected” | A fax was sent from a party that has been blocked by the anti junk fax function. |
| “NGxxxxxx” | Transmission/reception was not successful because a communication error occurred (a 6-digit error code appears in xxxxxx.) |
| “Error” | An error occurred while the job was being executed. |
| “displayed”* | Displayed at the receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set |
| “dispatched”* | Forwarded elsewhere before being displayed at the receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set |
| “processed”* | Processed without being displayed at receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set |
| “deleted”* | Message deleted at receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set |
| “denied”* | Receiving machine refused to notify sending machine of message processing content when delivery confirmation is set |
| “failed”* | An abnormal condition occurred when delivery confirmation is set |
* If the receiving machine is a SHARP machine, the receiving machine will return “dispatched” if the fax was received normally, or “processed” if reception failed. When delivery confirmation is set for Internet Fax, the disposition field value indicated on the delivery confirmation return e-mail appears.
How do I use the Address Book screen?
To display the address book, tap the [Address Book] key on the base screen in image send mode such as fax, e-mail, or Internet fax. You can also display it by tapping the [Address Book] icon in the home screen. “Contacts” and “Group” registered are enabled for alphabetical search and selected condition-based advanced search.
Notes:
• When the [Address Book] key is tapped on the e-mail base screen, groups and contacts having e-mail addresses are displayed.
• If user authentication is enabled, registered contacts can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access.
• You can tap the [Find My Address] key while logging in and select your e-mail address from the user list. This is convenient when you want to send an e-mail to yourself.
How do I disable or prohibit address book registration?
Prohibiting registration from the machine:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Registration] → [Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel].
Prohibiting registration from the web page:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Registration] → [Disable Registering Destination on Web Page].
How do I disable switching of the display order in the address book?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disable Switching of Display Order]. This disables changing the order of display (search number order, ascending, descending). Once set, the display sequence is not changed. The display order will remain fixed at the order that is in effect when this setting is enabled.
How do I set the initial screen type for the address book?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Category Displayed as Default]. Select a category to be displayed with the default.
• None
• Frequent Use
• Categories 1 to 32
How do I make the address book show all addresses regardless of the current mode?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Display all address type regardless of the mode being displayed currently.]. This displays all destinations regardless of the displayed mode when this setting is enabled.
How do I enlarge the address book list display?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Enlarge Address Book]. An enlarged address book list appears.
How do I select “Contacts” or “Group” in the address book?
Tap a “Contacts” or “Group” button/tab, and the tapped “Contacts” or “Group” is selected. After selection, tap OK. The one-touch keys for “Contacts” or “Group” (Frequent Use) will be displayed accordingly. You can also use the [Category] key or [Narrow Down] key to filter.
How do I narrow down address book entries by frequent use?
Tap the [Frequent Use] key in the address book screen. Addresses registered as “Frequent Use” addresses are shown.
How do I narrow down address book entries by category?
Tap the [Category] key in the address book screen to select a category from the screen that appears. The “Contacts” and “Group” in the selected category appear on a list. The narrowed-down condition is displayed under the [Category] key.
How do I narrow down address book entries by job type?
Tap the [Narrow Down] key in the address book screen to select a job type (e.g., Fax, E-mail) on the screen that appears. To narrow by “Group”, tap the [Group] key first. The “Contacts” and “Group” for the selected job appear on a list. The narrowed-down condition is displayed under the [Narrow Down] key.
How do I narrow down address book entries by index (alphabetically)?
Search by alphabet to narrow down addresses. For example, tap “A” on the index bar to display “Contacts” stored with search text starting with “A”.
How do I narrow down address book entries by keyword?
Tap the search icon (magnifying glass) to display a search screen. Select a target for search (e.g., Name, Item), enter a keyword and then tap the [Search Start] key. The search results are listed. For example, if [Item] is [Name], search with a keyword “SH” lists contacts and groups starting with “SH”.
How do I change the sort order of address book entries?
Tapping the [Sort] key displays a list in ascending order, descending order, or in the order of search numbers. The display is switched in the order of [Sort] (▲) (Up) → [Sort] (▼) (Down) → Search Number Order.
How do I store addresses in the address book through direct entry?
1. In the address book screen, tap [Add New] on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon in the home screen.
2. Enter basic information. Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. To register for frequent use, select the [Also Register for Frequent Use] checkbox.
3. Tap [Fax Number], [E-mail Address], [Internet Fax Address], or [Direct SMTP Address] to enter the address, and tap OK.
4. Tap the [Register] key. The first address of each address type is set as the default address. If no address has the checkbox next to it selected, a confirmation screen will appear asking you if you want to select a default address.
Notes:
• To register a category name: In “Settings (Web version)”, select [Address Book] → [Category Setting].
• If user authentication is enabled, the tab for address publication setting appears. Setting address publication enables stored “Contacts” and “Group” to be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access.
• Select the checkbox to set that address as the preferred over the others if two or more addresses are stored for “Contacts”.
• FTP, Desktop, and Network Folder addresses can be registered from [Address Book] in “Settings (Web version)”.
How do I store addresses through Global Address Search (LDAP)?
Store the results of searching the global address book as new addresses in the address book. Global address search requires an LDAP server.
1. In the address book screen, tap [Add New] on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon in the home screen.
2. Enter basic information. Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. To register for frequent use, select the [Also Register for Frequent Use] checkbox.
3. Tap the [Global Search] key.
4. Select the server from the list of servers. If an authentication screen appears, enter your user name and password, and tap the [OK] key. After selecting a server, tap OK.
5. Tap the entry field to enter the search condition and then tap the [Search Start] key. To change the search target, tap the dropdown for [Item]. You can select [Name] or [Address].
6. Select one address from the search result list, and tap the OK key. To check address information, select the address and tap the [Confirm Registered Information] key.
7. Tap the [Register] key. The first address of each address type is set as the default address. If no address has the checkbox next to it selected, a confirmation screen will appear asking you if you want to select a default address.
To disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Registration] → [Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search]. This disables address control from the global address search for E-mail, Internet Fax, Fax.
To register a category name:
In “Settings (Web version)”, select [Address Book] → [Category Setting].
How do I store addresses from fax or image send logs?
As a new registration, add an address you have entered via fax or image send operations to the address book. FTP and desktop addresses cannot be stored in the address book from transmission logs.
1. In fax or image send mode, tap [Sending History] on the action panel.
2. Select one address you want to register in the address book from the send logs, and then tap [New Registration with Address Book] on the action panel. (When you tap [Additional Registration with Address Book] on the action panel, you can add the address to a contact stored in the address book.)
3. Enter basic information. Be sure to enter [Name] and [Initial]. To specify a category, select one from a category list that appears when the entry box is tapped. To register for frequent use, select the [Also Register for Frequent Use] checkbox.
4. Tap the [Register] key. The address is registered in the address book and the transmission log screen is restored. The first address of each address type is set as the default address. If no address has the checkbox next to it selected, a confirmation screen will appear asking you if you want to select a default address.
To register a category name:
In “Settings (Web version)”, select [Address Book] → [Category Setting].
Note: If user authentication is enabled, the tab for address publication setting appears.
How do I store groups in the address book?
Register “Group” by selecting addresses from those already stored as “Contacts”. You can also directly enter a new address for a “Group”.
1. In the address book screen, tap [Add New] on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon in the home screen.
2. Enter the basic information for the group (Name, Initial, Category, Frequent Use), and tap [Switch to Group Registration] on the action panel.
3. Tap the [Address Book] key. (To directly enter a new address for a “Group”, tap [Fax Number], [E-mail Address], [Internet Fax Address], or [Direct SMTP Address].)
4. In the contact list, tap the “Contacts” that includes the address you want to add to the “Group”, and tap [Display Registered Information] on the action panel.
5. Tap the address to be registered in the “Group”, and then tap the OK key. You can select more than one address.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to register addresses. After address registration is completed, tap OK key.
7. Tap the [Register] key.
How do I edit or delete contacts and groups in the address book?
1. In the address book screen, select a contact or group you wish to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. To delete a “Contacts” or “Group”, tap [Delete] on the action panel.
2. Editing a “Contacts” or “Group”:
• You can change basic information such as names and categories and also you can add addresses (Direct Entry, Global Address Search, From Fax/Image Send Logs, Storing Groups).
• You can change the publicity scope.
Notes:
• For editing, you can only select one “Contacts” or “Group” at a time.
• For deleting, you can select more than one “Contacts” or “Group” at a time.
• If you have logged in as the administrator, you can delete all addresses stored in the address book by using the [Delete All] that appears on the action panel.
How do I edit or delete specific addresses within a contact or group?
1. Select a contact or group you wish to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. In the address book screen, select the contact or group that has the address you want to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. Only one contact or group can be selected. If more than one is selected, the [Edit] key does not appear.
2. Tap the address display in the list of addresses. To delete an address, tap the delete (trash can) key next to it.
3. Edit an address. After editing, tap the [Register] key.
Notes:
• To edit or delete, you can only select one address at a time.
• To check address information, tap the [Detail] key.
• You cannot edit or delete an address for a job in a job queue.
• You can only edit addresses in the network folder on the edit screen. (The Add New screen cannot be displayed.)
How do I set the scope for publicizing contacts and groups in the address book?
“Contacts” and “Group” stored in the address book can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access. If no publicity scope is specified, stored “Contacts” and “Group” are publicized to all users. User authentication is required to set the scope.
| Scope for publicizing addresses | Description |
|---|---|
| Publicized to all | “Contacts” and “Group” are published to all users of the machine. |
| User | “Contacts” and “Group” are published only to the user. Registered addresses are preferentially displayed as “Personal Contacts” in the user’s address book. |
| User Group | Publication of “Contacts” and “Group” is limited to the specified group. Up to eight groups per “Contacts” or “Group” can be set as the publicity scope. |
1. In the address registration screen (when adding or editing a contact/group), tap [Restrict Public Address of The Contacts] on the action panel.
2. Tap the [Designate Public Address] key.
3. Tap [User] or [Group] and specify who the address is made public to. After the settings are completed, tap OK.
Note: If you have logged in as the administrator, select any user name desired from the user list.
How do I register a user for user authentication?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [User Control] → [User List] → [User Registration].
How do I delete a selected transmission history?
The transmission history is deleted in normal mode.
1. Tap the history you want to delete.
2. In the transmission log screen, tap [Delete the Selected History] on the action panel.
3. The message “Delete the selected history?” will appear, tap the [Delete] key. The selected transmission log is deleted.
How do I delete all transmission histories?
The transmission history is deleted in normal mode.
1. In the transmission log screen, tap [Delete All Histories] on the action panel.
2. The message “Delete all histories?” will appear, tap the [Delete All] key. All transmission logs are to be deleted.
How do I replace the staple cartridge in the Inner Finisher?
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
1. Open the finisher front cover.
2. Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case. Pull the staple case out to the right.
3. Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case.
4. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
5. Push the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
6. Close the finisher front cover.
Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
How do I replace the staple cartridge in the Finisher?
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the staple unit.
3. Remove the staple case.
4. Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case.
5. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
6. Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
7. Replace the staple unit.
8. Close the front cover.
Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
How do I replace the staple cartridge in the Finisher (Large Stacker)?
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the staple case.
3. Remove the empty staple cartridge.
4. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
5. Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
6. Close the front cover.
Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
How do I replace the staple cartridge in the Saddle Stitch Finisher?
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull the lever and withdraw the staple unit. Pull it slowly out until it stops.
3. Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case.
4. Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case.
5. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. After inserting the staple cartridge, pull the seal that holds the staples straight out. Do not remove the seal from the cartridge before inserting the cartridge into the case.
6. Attach the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
7. Push the staple unit back in.
8. Close the front cover.
Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
How do I replace the staple cartridge (finisher unit) in the Saddle Stitch Finisher (Large Stacker)?
When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel.
1. Open the front upper cover.
2. Remove the staple case.
3. Remove the empty staple cartridge.
4. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place.
5. Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
6. Close the front upper cover.
Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
How do I replace the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) in the Saddle Stitch Finisher (Large Stacker)?
Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle finisher (large stacker). Do not replace removed output back in the output tray.
1. Open the front upper cover.
2. Slowly pull out the front lower cover until it stops.
3. Remove the staple case.
4. Remove the empty staple cartridge. (There are two staple cartridges, replace both).
5. Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Replace both staple cartridges.
6. Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place.
7. Push the front lower cover back in.
8. Close the front upper cover.
Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly.
How do I discard punch waste when an Inner Finisher is installed?
Punch waste from punched holes is collected in the punch waste box.
1. Open the finisher front cover.
2. While pressing the lever over to the left, slide the finisher to the left until it stops.
3. Grasp the punch waste box handle, gently pull out the box, and discard the punch waste.
4. Replace the punch waste box. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
5. Slide the finisher to the right until it stops.
6. Close the finisher front cover.
How do I discard punch waste when a Finisher is installed?
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.
3. Replace the punch waste box. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
4. Close the front cover.
How do I discard punch waste when a Finisher (Large Stacker) is installed?
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.
3. Replace the punch waste box. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
4. Close the front cover.
How do I discard punch waste when a Saddle Stitch Finisher is installed?
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.
3. Replace the punch waste box. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
4. Close the front cover.
How do I discard punch waste when a Saddle Stitch Finisher (Large Stacker) is installed?
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull out the punch waste box and discard the punch waste.
3. Replace the punch waste box. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function.
4. Close the front cover.
How do I use Application Communication with Sharp OSA?
This module enables you to link the machine with a scanner application and other standard applications. Set a standard application in “Settings (administrator)” and “Sharp OSA”.
1. Tap the [Sharp OSA] key in the Home screen. If no standard applications have been stored, the key cannot be tapped.
2. Select a standard application. If two or more standard applications have been stored, the screen for selecting a standard application will appear. Tap the standard application that you wish to use. If only one standard application has been stored, connection to the standard application will begin.
3. Connect the machine to the standard application. The message “Connecting to the external application.” appears while the machine communicates with the standard application.
To set a standard application in “Settings (administrator)”:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] → [Standard Application Settings].
Note: The Application communication module (MX-AMX2) is required to use these functions on some models.
How do I set up the External Account Application?
After setting an external application in “Settings (administrator)”, restart the machine to enable the setting. To restart the machine, see “TURNING ON THE POWER”.
To set up the external account application:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] → [External Accounting Application Settings].
Note: The External account module (MX-AMX3) is required to use these functions on some models.
How does External Authentication Mode work for the External Account Application?
When the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [Call] key is tapped to run a job in the job status complete screen. (The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by the normal method.) Tap the job status display while the login screen is displayed, and the Job Status screen appears. To return to the previous screen, tap a mode select key.
To enable the external authentication mode:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] → [External Accounting Application Settings] and enable the [External Account Control] setting.
Notes:
• The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode. However, “User Registration”, “User Count Display”, “User Count Reset”, “User Information Print”, and “The Number of User Name Displayed Setting” can be used.
• The mode select key cannot be used while the login screen appears.
If login fails:
If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating correctly. In that case, terminate external account mode forcibly.
To forcibly terminate the external account mode:
In “Settings (Web version)”, select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] → [External Accounting Application Settings]. If termination in Setting mode (Web version) fails, terminate it forcibly on the operation panel of the machine. In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] and change the setting for [External Accounting Application Settings] and then restart the machine.
How does External Count Mode work for the External Account Application?
Unlike in external authentication mode, when the machine is started in “external count mode”, the login screen of the external account application is not displayed after the machine has started up. Only the job result is sent to the external account application. External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode can also be used when the user control function is disabled.)
To enable the external count mode:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] → [External Accounting Application Settings] and enable the [External Account Control] setting alone.
How do I configure Sharp OSA Settings?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings].
Condition Settings
• Cookie Setting: Specify how application cookies are handled. “Hold Cookie” holds cookies used in an application. “Not hold Cookie” does not hold cookies.
• Delete Cookie: Delete cookies held by the machine.
Standard Application Settings
The standard application settings can be added and controlled.
• [Add] key: Adds a new standard application.
• List: Lists the currently stored standard applications.
Store Standard Application: When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 16 items can be stored.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Application Name | Enter an application name. |
| Address for Application UI | Set an IP address of the application or a network name to control the UI of the machine. |
| Timeout | Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. |
| Browser | Select the Web browser type. |
| Extended Platform | Set this option to use the expansion platform. |
| Data Size | Set the screen size of application. |
| Use Custom Icon* | Select whether or not custom icon is used. |
| File Name* | Reports file name. |
| Select File* | Please enter File Name. |
* These functions can be set only in the Web page.
Edit or Delete Standard Application: When you tap an application name on the list, the edit screen appears for that standard application. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the standard application.
How do I configure Receiving Application Settings for Sharp OSA?
The Fax or I-Fax Receive functions can be set in the Sharp OSA applications.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Forward to Application | The Fax or I-Fax message reception can be controlled by Sharp OSA applications. |
| Application Name | Enter the application name to receive. |
| Address for Web Service | Enter the Web service address. |
| Timeout | Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. |
| E-mail Address | Enter the address to which a notification e-mail is sent when an application connection error occurs. |
| Body Text | Enter the body message that appears in the notification e-mail for connection errors. |
| Connection Test | To test the connection to the application, click the [Execute] button. |
How do I configure External Accounting Application Settings for Sharp OSA?
An external account application can be added and controlled. Set the server name where you have installed the external accounting application.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| External Account Control | Enable the totalling function by the external accounting application. If enabled, always enter the application name or Web service address. |
| Set Authentication Server (Server 1) | If the server is set, the external authentication mode is selected. Any access to the MFP is controlled by the application that you set on this page. If set, always enter the application name, application UI address, or Web service address of server 1. If not set, the external totalling mode is selected. |
| Server 1-4 | Set to enable each of the servers. |
| Application Name | Enter an application name. |
| Address for Application UI* | Enter the URL of the login screen to be accessed first when the machine is turned on. |
| Address for Web Service | Enter the URL of the server or computer which sends commands and events by XML/SOAP protocol. |
| Timeout | Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. |
| Browser* | Select the Web browser type. |
| Extended Platform | Set this option to use the expansion platform. |
| Data Size* | Set the screen size of application. |
| Find My Address* | This item is only displayed and cannot be set. |
| Target* | This setting determines whether the machine’s user list or the LDAP server is searched when you perform a “My Address” search with Sharp OSA external authentication in use. |
| Communication Error Notification | |
| E-mail Address | Enter the address to which a notification e-mail is sent when an application connection error occurs. |
| Body Text | Enter the body message that appears in the notification e-mail for connection errors. |
* This setting can be set in Server 1.
How do I manage Embedded Application Settings?
Store and manage “embedded applications” that are installed in the machine.
• [Add] key: Adds a new embedded application.
• List: Lists the currently installed embedded applications.
Install Embedded Application: When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 16 items can be installed.
Notes for installation:
• When installing from the operation panel of the machine, the files in the USB memory connected to the machine are installed. When installing from the Web page, the files in the computer are installed.
• The maximum area of the hard disk that applications can use is 2 GB. If previously installed applications are already using 2 GB of area, a new application cannot be installed.
Store Embedded Application: By storing an already installed embedded application in “standard application”, the application can be used. Select the application name checkbox and tap the [Add Standard Applications] key.
Delete Embedded Application: Tap an application name in the list to display the information of that standard application. After checking the information, delete the standard application with the [Delete] key.
How do I configure Polling Settings for external applications?
When linked to an external application, you can store and manage addresses in order to use a service that uses a polling function.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Server 1 – Server 2 | Set to enable each of the servers. |
| Polling Address | Enter the URL of the server or computer that the machine will poll. |
| Check Interval | Enter the check interval for the server. The default is 1 minute. |
| Timeout | Set the timeout time. The default setting is 20 seconds. |
How do I remove paper misfeeds?
If a paper misfeed occurs, the “Paper Jam” message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove misfeeds] key in the touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message will automatically disappear.
Caution:
• The fusing unit and paper output area are hot.
• When removing a misfeed, do not touch the fusing unit. You may burn yourself.
How do I clean the document glass and automatic document feeder?
If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear as dirty spots, coloured lines, or white lines in the scanned image. Keep these parts clean at all times. Wipe the parts with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent. After that, wipe with a clean dry cloth.
Caution:
• Do not use a flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.
• Do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents to clean the machine. These may degrade or discolour the housing.
• Use a soft cloth to gently wipe off dirt from the area on the operation panel with a mirror-like finish. If you use a stiff cloth or rub hard, the surface may be damaged.
How do I clean the scanning area of the automatic document feeder?
If black lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area (the thin long glass next to the document glass). To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document feeder. After using the glass cleaner, be sure to return it to its storage position.
When using the MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070:
1. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner.
2. Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner. One scanning area is on the document glass and the other is inside the automatic document feeder.
3. Open the scanning area cover on the automatic document feeder. Push in the release switch to release the cover.
4. Clean the scanning area in the automatic document feeder.
5. Close the cover.
6. Replace the glass cleaner.
When using the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050:
1. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the glass cleaner.
2. Clean the document scanning area on the document glass with the glass cleaner.
3. Replace the glass cleaner.
How do I clean the main charger of the photoconductive drum?
If black lines appear even after you have cleaned the document glass and automatic document feeder, use the charger cleaner to clean the main charger that charges the photoconductive drum.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Remove the waste toner box. Press the release buttons on the sides of the waste toner box inward and pull out slowly.
3. Clean the main charger. Gently pull the charger cleaner all the way out, and gently push it in.
4. Push the waste toner box into the machine. Press both sides of the waste toner box with your hands until the left and right locks fully engage.
5. Close the front cover.
Additional Notes:
• If the problem persists after you perform these steps, repeat the cleaning procedure going back and forth about 3 times.
• When pulling and pushing the knob to clean the charger, pull and push the knob slowly from one end to the other.
How do I clean the bypass feed roller?
If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
How do I clean the paper feed roller for MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050 models?
If lines or other dirt appear on the scanned original when the automatic document feeder is used, wipe the surface of the roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent.
What do the different toner cartridge messages mean and when should I replace the toner cartridge?
Always replace the toner cartridge after the “Change the toner cartridge.” message appears. You should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out.
Toner Low (Do not replace cartridge until requested)
When this message appears, prepare a toner cartridge for replacement.
Change the toner cartridge. (Ready to scan for copy)
If you continue printing after the “Toner Low” message, the “Change the toner cartridge.” message (often accompanied by “Ready to scan for copy”) will appear. When this message appears, prepare a toner cartridge for replacement and replace it. In this state, printing is possible. However, this message does not appear during printing.
Change the toner cartridge. (Printing not possible)
If you continue to use the machine after the previous “Change the toner cartridge.” message, a final “Change the toner cartridge.” message will appear when the toner runs out. Once the machine enters this state, printing cannot be carried out until the toner cartridge is replaced.
How do I replace the toner cartridge?
1. Open the front cover.
2. Pull the toner cartridge toward you. Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out. Hold the toner cartridge with both hands as shown and slowly pull it out of the machine.
3. Take out a new toner cartridge from its package and shake it five or six times.
4. Slowly insert the new toner cartridge on the level.
5. Press in firmly until you hear a “click” sound.
6. Close the front cover. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the machine automatically enters image adjustment mode. Do not open the front cover while this is occurring.
What precautions should I take when handling toner cartridges and what are other important notes?
• Do not throw a toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store toner cartridges out of reach of small children.
• If a toner cartridge is stored upright, the toner may harden and become unusable. Always store toner cartridges on their side.
• If a toner cartridge other than a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge is used, the machine may not attain full quality and performance and there is a risk of damage to the machine. Be sure to use a SHARP-recommended toner cartridge.
• Depending on your conditions of use, the colour may become light or the image blurred.
• Your service technician will collect used toner cartridges.
• To view the approximate amount of toner remaining (indicated in %), hold down the [Home Screen] key during printing or in standby mode. When the percentage falls to “25-0%”, keep a toner cartridge for replacement purposes before toner runs out.
• When toner runs out while the home screen is displayed, the “Toner Empty” message appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
How do I replace the waste toner box?
The waste toner box collects excess toner that is produced during printing. When the waste toner box becomes full, the message “Replace waste toner box.” will appear.
When this message appears, tap the guidance key that appears on the touch panel to view the procedure for replacing the waste toner box.
When the key is tapped, instructions for replacing the waste toner box will appear. Follow the instructions. When the waste toner box is replaced, the message will automatically disappear.
Precautions:
• Do not throw the waste toner box into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.
• Store the waste toner box out of the reach of small children.
How do I replace the stamp cartridge on MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070 models?
If a stamp unit (AR-SU1) is installed on the automatic document feeder and the stamp has become light, replace the stamp cartridge (AR-SV1). The stamp cartridge comes as a 2-in package AR-SV1.
This procedure applies when using the MX-M3070/MX-M3570/MX-M4070/MX-M5070/MX-M6070.
1. Open the automatic document feeder.
2. Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder. Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass.
3. Grasp the tab on the stamp unit and pull the unit out.
4. Remove the stamp cartridge (A).
5. Install a new stamp cartridge.
6. Push the stamp unit back in. Push the stamp unit in until it clicks into place.
7. Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet. When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder.
8. Make sure that the document backplate sheet is firmly attached to the automatic document feeder and then close the automatic document feeder. If the document backplate sheet is not firmly attached, remove the sheet and then close the automatic document feeder again to firmly attach the sheet.
How do I replace the stamp cartridge on MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050 models?
This procedure applies when using the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050.
1. Open the document feeder tray.
2. Remove the stamp cartridge while pushing it downwards.
3. Install a new stamp cartridge.
4. Close the document feeder tray.
What are the functions of the soft keyboard keys?
The soft keyboard is used to register the name of a file, program, folder, or user.
• Text Display Area: Displays the entered text.
• Cancel Key: Exits the soft keyboard without saving changes.
• OK Key: Finalizes the entered characters and exits the soft keyboard.
• Backspace Key (@ symbol in diagram): Deletes one character to the left.
• Enter/Line Break Key (Arrow symbol in diagram): Temporarily fixes the converted characters or inserts a line break.
• Cursor/Conversion Range Keys (Left/Right arrows in diagram): Used to move the cursor or to change the range of the specified conversion target.
• Space Key: Converts the entered characters. The [Space] key inserts a space between words if there are no characters specified to be converted.
• Pre-Set Select Key: Use this to retrieve a previously stored subject for e-mail or pre-set text.
• Layout Switch Keys (Characters, Symbols, Keyboard Select, etc.): Switches the key layout.
• Tap a key to enter text: The key types vary depending on the selected entry mode.
• Subject / .com etc. keys: Retrieves stored words. Use “Settings” to store words. Some keys like .com, .net are for quick entry.
Notes:
• The soft keyboard shown in the PDF is an image for reference. Different keys may be enabled depending on the actual situation and condition under which you enter characters.
• If “External Keyboard” is selected in “Settings” → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Keyboard Settings] → [Default Keyboard Setting] → [Set Keyboard Priority], the soft keyboard will not appear.
• To register words: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Keyboard Settings] → [Soft Keyboard Template Setting].
How do I set the keyboard settings?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Keyboard Settings].
Keyboard Settings include:
• Default Keyboard Setting: Configure settings for the keyboard used for entry on the text.
• Keyboard Select: Change the key layout and display according to the set language.
• Set Keyboard Priority: When an external keyboard is connected, set whether the external keyboard or the keyboard shown on the touch panel (soft keyboard) is given priority.
• Soft Keyboard Template Setting: Register a text that you frequently use when entering an address or domain name in advance. Enter a maximum of 16 characters.
What do the icons in the copier section of the manual mean?
The icons indicate the following:
• Checkmark Icon: Functions you can use in Easy Copy mode.
• Eco Icon (Leaf): Eco-friendly functions.
• Paper Stack Icon: Functions for copying on special media.
How do I use the Easy Mode for copying?
Easy mode makes it easy to select basic settings for copying. It has two main screens:
1st screen:
• Shows the size of the placed original.
• Allows selection of: Paper Select, 2-Sided Copy, Copy Ratio, Staple / Punch.
• [Detail] key: Changes to normal mode.
• Function keys: Select function to be set up.
• Right arrow key (Q symbol in diagram): Changes the function display (to 2nd screen).
• [CA] key: Reset all settings.
• [Preview] key: Scans the original and shows a preview image.
• [Copies] field: Enter the number of copies.
• [Start] key: Starts copying.
2nd screen:
• Allows selection of: Original, Exposure, N-Up.
• Other keys function similarly to the 1st screen.
Functions selectable in Easy Mode:
• Paper Select
• 2-Sided Copy
• Copy Ratio
• Staple / Punch
• Original
• Exposure
• N-Up
• Card Shot
To select which functions appear in Easy Mode: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Easy Mode Settings] → [Easy Copy].
How do I use the Normal Mode for copying?
Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for copying.
Screen elements:
• Number of copies display/keypad: Enter the number of copies.
• Setting keys: Used for copying (e.g., Original, Paper Select, 2-Sided Copy, Copy Ratio, Exposure, Sort/Group, Output Tray).
• Action Panel (Right side): Displays functions that can be utilized in copy mode (e.g., Send as well as print, Quick File, Store Data in Folder, Call Eco Program).
• [Preview] key: Scans the original and shows a preview image.
• [CA] key: Reset all settings.
• [Start] key: Starts copying.
• [Others] key: Display keys other than the main function keys indicated.
• Tray status indicators: Indicates the presence or absence of an original and the size of paper loaded in each tray. Tap to open the paper select screen.
The displayed contents of the screen will vary depending on the devices installed.
How do I switch between Easy Mode and Normal Mode for copying?
To change the copy mode to simple (Easy) mode or normal mode, use the mode selection options on the machine’s control panel. For example, in Easy Mode, tapping the [Detail] key typically switches to Normal Mode. The specific steps for changing modes are usually detailed in a section titled “CHANGING MODES” in the machine’s documentation, which is not fully provided in this excerpt.
What is the basic sequence for making a copy?
1. Switch to copy mode.
2. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
3. Select functions. Specify the original scan size, exposure, resolution, etc. Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. If necessary, select other settings like Paper Select, 2-Sided Copy, Copy Ratio, Staple/Punch, Exposure, N-Up, Card Shot, Sort/Group, or Others.
4. Scan the original. Tap the [Preview] key to scan the original if you want to check it first. To make 2-sided copies, configure the 2-sided copy settings before scanning. If not checking the preview image, you can tap the [Start] key directly to start copying after selecting functions.
5. Check the preview image (if [Preview] was tapped). Display the preview image of the scanned original. In the preview screen, you can check the settings.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. If making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets, tap the copies display key to specify the number.
Note on restoring default settings: You can restore default copy settings before copying by enabling “Auto Clear Before Copy Execution Also” in Settings (administrator) → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings].
Cancelling:
• To cancel all settings, tap the [CA] key.
• To cancel copying, tap the [Cancel Copy] key.
How do I set a maximum number of copies?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings]→ [Setting a Maximum Number of Copies].
This is used to set the maximum number that can be entered for the number of copies (number of continuous copies). Any number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.
What are the default settings for copying and what do they configure?
Default settings for copying are set in “Default Settings” of “Copy Settings” in the System Settings. You can set a default value for each copy setting. These settings apply when the [Power] button is turned on, the [CA] key is tapped, or when the auto clear interval has elapsed.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Image Orientation | Specify the original orientation. |
| Paper Tray | Specify the paper tray that is selected by default. |
| Exposure Type | Configure default exposure mode settings. |
| Copy Ratio | Specify the copy ratio that is selected by default. |
| 2-Sided Copy | Configure the 2-sided mode settings that are selected by default. If this setting is used to change the default setting for the duplex function to any setting other than “1-Side to 1-Side” and the duplex function or automatic document feeder fails or is disabled, the setting will revert to “1-Side to 1-Side”. |
| Original Binding | Set the original binding in 2-Sided copy. |
| Output Binding | Set the output binding in 2-Sided copy. |
| Output | Set the print output method and output tray that are selected by default. |
| Output Tray | Specify the output tray. |
| Staple | Configure staple settings |
| Offset | Set whether or not offset is performed in the default settings. |
| Separator Page | Separator pages can be inserted before or after jobs. Set the paper tray used for the separator pages. |
| Punch | Configure punch settings |
| Factory defaults | This returns all items to the factory default settings. |
How does the Copy Preview function work?
You can tap the [Preview] key before scanning the original to check a preview of the scanned image.
In normal mode:
Preview lets you check the image while adjusting settings, so you can see what the result will be. You can drag a preview image to change pages, and rotate or delete the image. Refer to “MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE” for details on adjusting settings while previewing.
The preview screen shows the scanned image and allows for further actions before starting the copy job.
How do I check the original size when copying?
Easy mode:
The size of the placed original is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen. When you place the original in the automatic document feeder, the original icon appears next to the original size.
Normal mode:
Check the size of the placed original on the display of the [Original] key. If the original size is set to [Auto], the automatically detected size (standard size) is displayed. If the original size is specified manually, the specified original size is displayed. When you place the original in the automatic document feeder, the original icon appears above the automatic document feeder.
Standard sizes:
Standard sizes are sizes that the machine can automatically detect. To specify the standard size, select [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)”→ [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting]. For detectable standard sizes, refer to “Original Size Detector Setting”.
Notes:
• Even when [Original] is set to [Auto], some original sizes may be detected as other one that is near the standard size. In this case, manually set the original size by “SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL”.
• When placing a non-standard size original on the document glass, you can make it easier for the size to be detected by placing a blank sheet of A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″), B5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″), or other standard size of paper on top of the original.
How should I orient the original when placing it for copying, and what is Automatic Copy Image Rotation?
Orientation of placed original:
Place the original as shown in the diagrams in the PDF. If you place the original in an incorrect orientation, it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling. On the “Preview Screen”, view the image orientation or preview image. Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized. For information on setting the orientation, see “Specifying the orientation of the original”.
Automatic copy image rotation (Rotation Copy):
If the orientation is different between the original and paper, the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to match the paper.
To set Rotation Copy: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Rotation Copy Setting].
• When [Rotation Copy] is selected, Rotation Copy operates when Auto Paper Select or Auto Ratio Select is in effect, or when the original and paper are the same size but the orientation is different.
• When [Rotation Copy is done only at Auto Paper Select or Auto Ration Select] is selected, Rotation Copy only operates when Auto Paper Select or Auto Ratio Select is in effect.
How do I select the paper tray for copying?
The machine is set to automatically select a tray that has the same size of paper as the size of the placed original (Auto Paper Select). If the original size cannot be detected correctly or you want to change the paper size, select the paper tray manually.
1. Tap the [Paper Select] key (as part of the COPYING SEQUENCE).
2. Tap the required tray key. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
Notes:
• If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper, that tray will be automatically selected and the copy job will continue.
• If a suitable size of copy paper is not loaded, copying may stop.
• To change the initially selected tray: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Paper Tray].
• Stop auto paper selection: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Disabling of Auto Paper Selection]. The same size of paper will not be automatically selected when an original is placed on the document glass or the document tray of the Single Pass Feeder.
• Automatically select the tray used for paper feeding: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Supplied the Paper]. When this setting is enabled and paper is loaded into a tray while the machine is on standby in copy mode, that tray is automatically selected.
• When the bypass tray is selected, specify the paper type and size based on the paper loaded in the bypass tray. Refer to “SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY”.
• In normal mode, you can also open the [Paper Select] screen by tapping the machine image on the base screen.
• To automatically select the tray, tap the [CA] key. When the [CA] key is tapped, all settings selected to that point are cleared and you will return to the base screen.
What is the basic procedure for making copies using the automatic document feeder in Easy Mode?
This section explains how to select settings from the base screen of easy mode.
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
2. Check the paper (tray) you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select (e.g., Paper Select, 2-Sided Copy, Copy Ratio, Staple/Punch, Original, Exposure, N-Up, Card Shot). Depending on the size of the placed original, there may be cases where the same size of paper as the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually.
3. Tap the [Preview] key (optional, to see a preview of the scanned image).
4. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. If making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies, tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies.
What is the basic procedure for making copies using the document glass in Easy Mode?
1. Place the original on the document glass.
2. Check the paper (tray) you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select (e.g., Paper Select, 2-Sided Copy, Copy Ratio, Staple/Punch, Original, Exposure, N-Up, Card Shot).
3. Tap the [Preview] key (optional, to see a preview of the scanned image).
4. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. If making only one set of copies, you do not need to specify the number of copies. To make two or more sets of copies, tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies. If scanning multiple pages from the document glass, after the first page is scanned, place the next original and tap [Start] again. Repeat until all originals are scanned, then tap [Read-End].
How do I perform automatic 2-sided copying using the automatic document feeder?
This allows automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals, 2-sided originals, or 1-sided copying of 2-sided originals.
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Configure 2-sided copy settings before scanning.
2. Tap the [2-Sided Copy] key.
3. Select the 2-sided copy mode:
(1) Select the 2-sided copy type (e.g., 1 -> 2 Sided, 2 -> 2 Sided, 2 -> 1 Sided).
(2) When the original is set to “2-Sided”, select “Tablet” or “Book” in “Original Binding”.
(3) When the output is set to “2-Sided”, select “Tablet” or “Book” in “Output Binding”.
(4) After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
4. Check the paper (tray) you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select. Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original.
5. Tap the [Preview] key (optional).
6. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
Note: Dual-side copy helps to save paper.
How do I perform automatic 2-sided copying using the document glass?
This typically involves copying 1-sided originals to make 2-sided copies.
1. Place the original on the document glass.
2. Tap the [2-Sided Copy] key.
3. Select the 2-sided copy mode:
(1) Tap the [1 → 2] key (for 1-sided original to 2-sided copy).
(2) When the output is set to “2-Sided”, select “Tablet” or “Book” in “Output Binding”.
(3) After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
Note: The [2 → 2] key and [2 → 1] key cannot be used when copying from the document glass for this function as described.
4. Check the paper (tray) you want to use for copying, and tap the keys for any other settings you want to select. Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation.
5. Tap the [Start] key. The machine will scan the first page.
6. Place the next original (e.g., the reverse side or the next page) on the document glass. Tap the [Start] key to scan the original. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
7. Tap the [Read-End] key to start copying.
Note: Dual-side copy helps to save paper. To change the default 2-sided copy mode, go to “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [2-Sided Copy].
How do I adjust the exposure and original image type for copies?
Automatic Adjustment:
Automatic exposure adjustment operates by default ([Auto] is displayed) to automatically adjust the exposure level and original type as appropriate for the original being copied.
• To change the default exposure: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Exposure Type].
• To adjust the exposure level when [Auto] is used: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Quality Adjustment] → [Copy Image Quality] → [Density Adjustment when [Auto] is selected for Exposure].
Manual Adjustment:
1. Tap the [Exposure] key (in Easy Mode) or ensure you are in Normal Mode for more detailed settings. If in Easy Mode and more detail is needed, tap the [Detail] key to switch to Normal Mode, then tap the [Exposure] key.
2. In Easy Mode, tap [-] or [+] or slide the slider to adjust copy exposure. Tap [OK].
3. In Normal Mode (after tapping [Exposure] key):
a. Tap the required original image type key to specify the original type:
• Text: Use this mode for regular text documents.
• Text/Printed Photo: Best balance for copying an original with both text and printed photographs (e.g., magazine).
• Text/Photo: Best balance for copying an original with both text and pasted-on photographs.
• Printed Photo: Best for copying printed photographs (e.g., photos in a magazine).
• Photo: Use this mode to copy photos.
• Map: Best for copying light color shading and fine text on maps.
• Light Original: Use for originals with light pencil writing.
b. Adjust the exposure level using the slider or [-]/[+] keys.
c. Tap [OK].
Additional Manual Adjustment Notes:
• Copy of Copy: When using a copy or printed page from the machine as an original, tap the [Copy of Copy] checkbox. Available when [Auto], [Text], [Printed Photo], or [Text/Printed Photo] is selected.
• Copy Original with Highlighted Lines: To make fluorescent marker parts more visible, tap this checkbox.
• If you adjust exposure with original type as [Auto] in Normal Mode, it automatically selects [Text/Printed Photo].
• Guidelines for exposure level when [Text] is selected: 1 to 2 for dark originals (newspaper), 3 for normal density, 4 to 5 for pencil/light colored text.
How do I use Auto Ratio Select to enlarge or reduce copies?
This function automatically selects the appropriate ratio to meet the paper size when manually changing the paper tray for a different sized paper than the original.
1. Manually select the paper tray with the desired output paper size, and place the original.
2. Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.
3. Tap the [Auto Image] key. The reduction or enlargement ratio is automatically selected based on the original size and the selected paper size. The ratio will appear in the display. Tap [OK].
Notes:
• For a non-standard size original, the size must be entered to use Auto Image.
• To change the default ratio: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Copy Ratio].
• To cancel Auto Ratio Selection: Tap [Auto Image] to deselect it.
• To return the ratio to 100%: Tap the [100%] key.
What methods can be used for manual ratio selection to enlarge or reduce copies?
There are three methods for manual ratio selection:
1. Using the preset ratio key: Specify any ratio by combining preset ratio keys (for frequently used standard sizes) with the zoom key (+/-), which adjusts the ratio in 1% units. Up to two ratio values can be added as preset keys for enlargement and reduction respectively.
2. Specifying the paper size: Specify the paper sizes of the original and output, and the machine automatically obtains the appropriate ratio.
3. Specifying the image dimensions: Specify the image sizes of the original and output, and the machine automatically obtains the appropriate ratio. For a copy with the same ratio between vertical and horizontal sizes, enter either one.
Notes:
• When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200% (this note might be specific to “Specifying image dimensions” but is listed generally here in the PDF).
• To return the ratio to 100%: Tap the [100%] key.
• To add any ratio as a preset ratio: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios]. You can set two additional preset ratios for enlargement (101% to 400%) and reduction (25% to 99%). Tap the [Other Ratio] key to select an added preset ratio.
How do I use the preset ratio key for manual enlargement or reduction?
1. Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.
2. Tap preset ratio keys (e.g., A3→A4, A4→A3) or use the [-] / [+] keys to set the desired ratio. The selected ratio is displayed. After settings are completed, tap [OK]. Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.
Notes:
• If you tap the [Slightly Reduce (3% Reduction)] key, the ratio will be set 3% lower than specified.
• In normal mode: There are two setting screens; use the [Other Ratio] key to switch. To quickly set the ratio, first specify a value close to the desired value using numeric keys, then adjust with [-]/[+].
• To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I specify the paper size for manual enlargement or reduction?
1. Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.
2. In the “By Paper Size” section, select the Original paper size and the (output) Paper size. The machine will calculate and display the ratio. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
• To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I specify the image dimensions for manual enlargement or reduction?
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode if not already in it.
2. Tap the [Copy Ratio] key.
3. Tap the [by Size] key on the [Zoom] tab.
4. Specify the image size (dimensions of the image to be enlarged or reduced) and the output size (dimensions of the enlarged and reduced images). Tap the area of image size and output size, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. The copy ratio will be calculated. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
Notes:
• If you have entered an incorrect size: Tap the [C] key, and then enter the correct size.
• To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How can I enlarge or reduce the length and width of a copy separately (XY Zoom)?
This function allows you to individually specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) copy ratios.
Two methods can be used:
1. Using the preset ratio key: Specify any ratio by combination of preset ratio keys with the zoom key (+/-).
2. Specifying the image dimensions: Specify the image sizes (X and Y) of the original and output.
Notes:
• When the automatic document feeder is used, the vertical and horizontal ratio selection ranges are both between 25% to 200%.
• To cancel the XY zoom setting: Tap the [Zoom] tab or the [CA] key.
How do I use the preset ratio key for XY zoom (separate length and width adjustment)?
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] tab.
3. Tap the [X] key, and set the X (horizontal) ratio using the preset keys or +/- keys.
4. Tap the [Y] key, and set the Y (vertical) ratio in the same way as the [X] key. After the settings are completed, tap [OK]. Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected.
Notes:
• To quickly set the ratio, first specify a value close to the desired one with numeric keys, then adjust with +/-.
• Tap each area of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
How do I specify the image dimensions for XY zoom (separate length and width adjustment)?
1. Perform steps 1 to 2 in “How do I use the preset ratio key for XY zoom (separate length and width adjustment)?” (Tap [Detail] key for normal mode, tap [Copy Ratio] key, then [XY Zoom] tab).
2. Tap the [by Size] key.
3. Specify the X and Y dimensions of the image size (original) and those of the output size. Tap the image size and output size areas, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. Check that a paper size suitable for the ratio is selected. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
Notes:
• If you have entered an incorrect size: Tap the [C] key on the numeric keys that appears when you tap the entry area, and set to the correct size.
• To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I select the orientation and size of the original for copying?
When the original size is non-standard or not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. Set the orientation to ensure it’s correctly recognized. This should be done before scanning.
Specifying the orientation of the original:
1. In Easy mode, tap the Original image orientation icon (A / sideways A). Select the correct orientation. Tap [OK].
2. In Normal mode, tap the [Original] key. Tap the “Image Orientation” icon (A / sideways A) and select the orientation. Then proceed to select size.
Specifying the size of the original (typically in Normal Mode):
1. Tap the [Original] key to set the orientation (if not already done via Easy Mode’s [Original] button which also handles orientation).
2. If you want to specify the size, ensure you are in Normal Mode (tap [Detail] key from Easy Mode if necessary).
3. Tap the [Original] key on the Normal Mode screen.
4. Tap the [AB] tab (for metric sizes like A4, B5) or the [Inch] tab (for sizes like 8-1/2″x11″).
5. Tap the appropriate original size key. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
How do I specify the orientation and size of a non-standard original?
1. Tap the [Original] key to set the orientation of the original.
2. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode if not already in it.
3. Tap the [Original] key on the Normal Mode screen.
4. Tap the [Direct Entry] tab.
5. Specify the original size. Tap the areas displaying width (X) and height (Y) sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. It is convenient to use [-]/[+] to finely adjust the entered size. Tap [OK] for the dimensions, then [OK] for the original settings.
On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key.
How can I store, retrieve, amend, or delete frequently used non-standard original sizes?
You can store frequently used non-standard original sizes. A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered. Stored sizes are retained even if main power is turned off and will appear in other modes.
Storing or Amending Original Sizes:
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Original] key.
3. Tap the [Custom Size] tab.
4. Tap [Store/Delete Original Size] on the action panel.
5. Tap a key that does not show a size (for storing a new one) or tap an existing custom size key (for amending). If amending, a confirmation appears; tap [Amend] to proceed to size entry, or [Delete] to delete.
6. Specify the original size. Tap the areas displaying width (X) and height (Y) and enter the sizes using numeric keys. Use [-]/[+] for fine adjustment. Tap [OK] after entering dimensions.
7. Tap the [OK] key for the Custom Size screen. Check that the key of the size stored/amended on the original screen is added/updated properly. After checking, tap [OK] for the main original settings screen.
Retrieving a Stored Original Size:
1. Perform steps 1 to 3 above (go to Normal Mode, tap [Original], tap [Custom Size] tab).
2. Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve.
3. Tap the [OK] key. On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key.
Deleting a Stored Original Size:
1. Follow steps 1-4 for Storing/Amending.
2. Tap the custom size key you want to delete. A confirmation appears.
3. Tap the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared from the key and tap [OK].
To cancel an operation: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I make copies using the bypass tray?
The bypass tray allows copies on transparency film, envelopes, tab paper, and other special media, in addition to plain paper.
Notes:
• For detailed information on paper that can be loaded, refer to “APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES”. For precautions on loading, refer to “LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY”.
• To prohibit feeding from the bypass tray during duplex copy: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy]. This is recommended if special media unsuitable for duplexing is often used in the bypass tray.
Steps:
1. Load paper into the bypass tray.
2. Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key. Each tray key displays the size and type of loaded paper.
3. To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode (if not already in it).
4. Tap the [Paper Select] key (if needed, e.g. if not already on paper select screen).
5. Tap the [Type and Size] key (associated with the bypass tray display) and select the size and type of the paper. Refer to “SPECIFYING A TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER LOADED ON BYPASS TRAY”.
6. Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass.
7. Select any other desired copy settings and tap [Start].
How do I specify the type and size of paper loaded on the bypass tray?
1. Tap the [Paper Select] key, and tap the bypass tray key.
2. Tap the [Type and Size] key (this key appears next to or on the bypass tray representation on screen), and tap the key that meets the type of the loaded paper.
3. Tap the [Size] tab, and tap the key that meets the size of the loaded paper:
• [Auto-AB] key: Automatically detects appropriate AB paper size (e.g., A4, B5).
• [Auto-Inch] key: Automatically detects appropriate inch paper size (e.g., 8-1/2″x11″).
• [Size Set] key: Manually specify a paper size not automatically detected.
• [Direct Entry] key: Enter a numeric value for the size. To directly enter a paper size, tap the [inch] key to set size in inches, or tap the [AB] key for millimeters. After entering the size using numeric keys and the [-]/[+] key, tap [OK].
After all settings are completed, tap [OK].
How do I set the Sort or Group output settings for copies?
This explains how to select the sorting method when outputting the scanned original.
| Setting | Description |
|---|---|
| Auto | Enables the sort mode when the original is placed in the automatic document feeder, and enables the group mode when the original is placed on the document glass. |
| Sort | Sorts the scanned original on a set basis, and outputs them (e.g., page 1,2,3 then page 1,2,3). |
| Group | Groups the scanned original on a page basis, and outputs them (e.g., page 1,1,1 then page 2,2,2). |
Steps:
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode (if not already in it).
2. Tap the [Sort/Group] key. (If a finisher or saddle stitch finisher is installed, this key might be under [Others]. Also, tap the [Original] key and specify its orientation for correct sorting/grouping.)
3. Select the sorting method (Auto, Sort, or Group). After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
Notes:
• You can select the offset output checkbox (if available) to have each set of output be offset from the previous set for easy removal.
• To change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key, and select the output destination.
How do I start copying?
Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
How do I use the mixed size original function for originals of mixed width if the printed image is skewed on MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050 models?
If the printed image is skewed when using the mixed size original function for originals of mixed width, follow these steps:
1. Open the document feeder cover.
2. Change the switch position. Switch position A is used for normal scanning, and switch position B is used for mixed size original scanning.
3. Scan the originals.
4. When you have finished using the mixed size original function, be sure to return the switch to position A.
The image shows a switch with positions A and B located inside the document feeder.
How do I scan thin originals using Slow Scan Mode?
Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding.
Note: The “2-Sided→2-Sided” and “2-Sided→1-Sided” modes of automatic 2-sided copying cannot be used with Slow Scan Mode.
To scan thin originals:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
2. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Refer to AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-127). If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
3. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
How do I cancel Slow Scan Mode?
Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to clear the checkmark.
How do I set the machine to always scan originals in Slow Scan Mode?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Feeding Mode].
How do I adjust the resolution when scanning?
This function adjusts the resolution when scanning the original, enabling high-quality output or speed-priority output. Resolution must be specified before scanning the original. The resolution setting is applied when making a full-size copy.
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Scan Resolution] key.
2. Select the resolution. The screen shows options for Document Feeder and Glass, with resolutions like 600x300dpi, 600x400dpi, and 600x600dpi. The resolution can be set for both the document feeder and document glass. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
3. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
4. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
How do I configure High Quality Scan from Document Feeder?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [High Quality Scan from Document Feeder]. The resolution for copying using the automatic document feeder can be changed from 600 x 400 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high quality mode). When high quality mode is used, fine print and thin lines are reproduced with greater clarity; however, the scanning speed is slower. When high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 400 dpi and attain the fastest speed:
• The copy ratio must be set to 100%.
• Do not select a special mode that will change the ratio.
• [Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.
How do I configure Quick Scan from Document Glass?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Quick Scan from Document Glass]. The resolution for copying using the document glass can be changed from 600 x 600 dpi to 600 x 400 dpi (high speed mode). When high speed mode is selected, the first copy time is quicker; however, the copy image is not as clear. When high quality mode is not selected, the following conditions must be satisfied in order to scan at 600 x 400 dpi and attain the fastest speed:
• The copy ratio must be set to 100%.
• Do not select a special mode that will change the ratio.
• [Copy of Copy] must not be enabled.
How do I print dates, page numbers, and watermarks (Stamp function)?
This function prints information such as the “Date” or “Stamp”, which is not shown on the original, on copies. You can print the following six types of information: Date, Page No., Stamp, Copies, Text, Watermark. For the stamp or watermark, you can print text such as “CONFIDENTIAL” or “PRIORITY”. You can print pre-set text or any characters as the text. Each item can be printed on the header or footer of each sheet.
Important notes:
• If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given in the following order: watermark, right side, left side, centre. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.
• Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting.
• Text will be printed at the preset exposure regardless of the exposure setting.
• Depending on the size of the paper, some printed content may be cut off or shifted out of position.
To use the Stamp function:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
2. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] key.
3. Tap a tab to be printed (e.g., Date, Page No., Stamp, Text, Watermark), and tap the format. The format of the [Text] tab can be entered using pre-set text or soft keyboard (see “Setting using the [Text] tab”). When you tap the tab, the display tab is switched.
4. Tap a key of the desired print position (any of [1] to [6] keys shown on screen). Tapping the [Detail] key allows you to configure settings for each position. Tapping the [Layout] key allows you to check the printing position or detailed settings.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the text settings: Tap the [Cancel All] key.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I register preset text for the Stamp function?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Text/Image Printing] → [Text Settings (Stamp)] to register preset text to be used in [Stamp].
How does the Stamp function behave when combined with other functions?
| Combined function name | Print operation |
|---|---|
| Margin Shift | Together with the image, the stamp content is shifted the amount of the margin width. |
| Tab Copy, Centring | Unlike a copy image that moves, the image will be printed in the position set in the stamp. |
| Dual Page Copy, Book Divide, Card Shot | Stamp items are printed for each copy sheet. |
| N-Up | Stamp items are printed for each original page. |
| Booklet, Book Copy | Stamp items are printed for each page when compiling. |
| Covers/Inserts | Use the stamp settings to select whether or not the item is printed on inserted covers and inserts. |
How do I use the [Text] tab for the Stamp function?
To enter custom text for the stamp:
1. In the Stamp settings screen, tap the [Text] tab.
2. Tap the [Direct Entry] key to display the soft keyboard.
3. Use the soft keyboard to enter any characters.
To select a format from pre-set text:
1. In the Stamp settings screen, tap the [Text] tab.
2. Tapping the [Pre-Set Text] key allows you to select the required one of the registered formats for printing.
3. Tapping the [Store/Delete] key allows you to edit, delete, or store pre-set text.
How do I add a registered image to an original (Custom Image)?
This function adds an image registered in the machine to an original to make a copy. There are two types: Custom stamp (Stamp image) and Custom watermark (Stamp image with grey-scale watermark).
Important notes:
• On MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, this only appears when the Hard disk expansion kit is installed.
• An image must be registered in advance from the printer driver to the machine. Refer to REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE (page 3-48).
• A custom stamp image is copied by sheet, not by original. If N-Up is enabled, user stamps are copied for each set of pages.
• A custom stamp image is copied with the registered size. The size remains unchanged even when the copy ratio is enlarged or reduced.
• A different custom image cannot be specified for each page.
• If an image runs off of the specified paper depending on the registered size or position, the excess will not be copied.
• Custom Image can be combined with Tandem Copy. Stamp copy is performed when a custom image with the same file name is registered in both the master and client machines. If it is not registered, a copy will be made without a custom image.
To add a custom image:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
2. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Custom Image] key.
3. Tap the [Custom Stamp] or [Custom Watermark] key.
4. Tap the [Image] key to select an image. Select the required thumbnail image(s) from the available selection.
5. Set [Print Page] (First Page or All Pages) or [Print Position] (X, Y coordinates, Print Angle: 0, -90, 90, or 180 degrees). For custom watermark, also set [Print Pattern] (Transparent or Overlap) and [Exposure] (nine levels). After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the custom image setting: Tap the [Off] key.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I register a Custom Image?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Text /Image Printing] → [Custom Stamp] or [Custom Watermark].
How do I disable registration of Custom Image?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling Registration of Custom Image] and configure the setting.
How does the Custom Image function behave when combined with other functions?
| Combined function | Custom image operations |
|---|---|
| Margin Shift | Shifts in the same way as for an original image. |
| Erase | Makes a stamp copy as normal. |
| Dual Page Copy | Makes a stamp copy by sheet. |
| Booklet | Makes a stamp copy as normal. |
| Job Build | Makes a stamp copy as normal. |
| Tandem Copy | Based on the tandem copy. |
| Covers/Inserts | Based on the custom image setting. |
| Separator Page | Printing does not take place on separator pages. |
| Transparency Inserts | Makes a stamp copy as normal. |
| N-Up | Makes a stamp copy by sheet. |
| Book Copy | Makes a stamp copy as normal. |
| Tab Copy | Makes a stamp copy as normal regardless of image shift setting. |
| Card Shot | Makes a stamp copy by sheet. |
| Mirror Image | Makes a stamp copy as normal without mirror image reverse. |
| B/W Reverse | Prints an image as normal without B/W reverse. However, the following condition is set when printed on a dark background. Custom stamp: Printed in white. Custom watermark: Printed without being whitened. |
| Full Bleed Copy | Makes a stamp copy as normal. |
| Centring | Makes a stamp copy as normal without centring. |
| Stamp | Makes a stamp copy on the Stamp menu. |
| Multi-Page Enlargement | Cannot be combined. |
| Hidden Pattern Print | Makes a stamp copy under a pattern print. |
| Tracking Information Print | Makes a stamp copy under a tracking information print. |
| Repeat Layout | Cannot be combined. |
| Position Image | Prints an image at the original position regardless of the Position Image setting. |
| Book Divide | Makes a stamp copy by sheet. |
How do I insert covers in copies (Covers/Inserts)?
This function inserts a different type of paper for front and back covers. For N-Up, the layout is based on the first page and excludes covers.
Prerequisites:
• Before using the covers/inserts function, load insertion sheets in the tray.
• When selecting the covers/inserts function, place the originals in the document feeder tray, select 1-sided or 2-sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. After these settings, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts.
• One sheet can be inserted for each of front and back covers.
Limitations:
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original.
• This function cannot be used with the saddle stitch function.
• This setting is not available if “Covers/Inserts” is disabled in “Settings”.
To insert covers:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray (page 1-127).
2. Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.
3. Tap the [Front Cover] key, and then tap the [On] key. (When inserting a back cover, tap the [Back Cover] tab, and then tap the [On] key.)
4. Tap the [Change] key to select the paper tray for the cover (e.g., Bypass, Plain 1).
5. Configure copy setting of a front cover sheet. When only inserting a cover, tap the [Make No Copy] key. If you selected the [2-Sided Copy] key, tap the [Book] or [Tablet] key for the front cover binding. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To change the cover input tray: Tap the [Paper Tray Settings] key. On the input tray setting screen, tap the [Paper Tray] key of [Front Cover] or [Back Cover]. Refer to “SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 2-11)”.
Notes on cover material: If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted.
To cancel cover sheet insertion: Tap the [Off] key.
To cancel front cover, back cover, and insertion sheet settings at the same time: Tap the [Cancel All] key.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
Cover inserting examples for various original and copy mode combinations are detailed in the PDF from page 2-98 to 2-103.
How do I disable the Covers/Inserts Mode?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode].
How do I insert insertion sheets in copies (Covers/Inserts)?
This function inserts a sheet of paper into a specific page as an insertion sheet. Two types of insertion sheets and their positions can be specified. When inserting covers, see “INSERTING COVERS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 2-98)”.
Prerequisites:
• Before using the covers/inserts function, load insertion sheets in the tray.
• The insertion sheet size must be the same as the copy size.
• Up to 100 insertion sheets can be inserted.
Limitations:
• The document glass is not available for this function.
• Two insertion sheets cannot be inserted into the same page.
• When performing 2-sided copying of 2-sided originals, an insertion sheet cannot be inserted between the front and reverse sides of an original.
• This function cannot be used with the saddle stitch function.
• This setting is not available if the covers/inserts function is disabled in “Settings (administrator)”.
To insert insertion sheets:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray (page 1-127).
2. Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.
3. Tap the [Insertion Sheet] tab.
4. Tap the [Insertion Type A] key (or B to H), and tap the insert page display key. The Insertion Type B to Type H settings are the same as Type A.
5. Enter the number of the page you want to insert a sheet into using numeric keys, and then tap the [Enter] key. Repeat for all insertion sheets. After settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
6. Tap the [Change] key to select the paper tray for the insertion sheet (e.g., Bypass, Plain 1).
7. When only inserting insertion sheet A, tap the [Make No Copy] key. When making a copy on insertion sheet A, tap the [Simplex] or [2-Sided Copy] key. If [2-Sided Copy] is selected, tap [Book] or [Tablet] for binding. After settings are completed, tap [OK].
8. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To correct an incorrect insert page number: Tap the [Page Layout] key and change the page. See “CHECKING, EDITING, AND DELETING THE PAGE LAYOUT OF COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT) (page 2-110)”.
To cancel insertion sheets: Tap the [Cancel All] key.
To change an insertion sheet: Tap the [Paper Tray] key, and select the tray with insertion sheets loaded.
To copy on tab paper: Tap the [Tab Copy] key. See “COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) (page 2-113)”.
Note on material: When copying on both sides of an insertion sheet, you cannot use label sheets, transparency films, or tab paper for insertion. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
Sheet inserting examples for various original and copy modes are detailed in the PDF on pages 2-106 and 2-107.
How do I check, edit, and delete the page layout of covers and insertion sheets (Page Layout)?
The editing contents differ for registered covers and insertion sheets:
• For “Cover Sheet”, you can change settings like paper type, copy/do not copy, 1-Sided, and 2-Sided.
• For “Insert Sheet”, you can change only the page number for insertion.
To manage page layout:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key.
2. Tap the [Page Layout] key. (This key is disabled if covers or insertion sheets are not configured.)
3. Check the page layout. To exit, tap the [OK] key. To edit or delete, tap the required key. When deleting, tap [Delete]. When editing, tap [Amend]. For consecutive insertion of different types of inserts at the same page, tap [Replace Order of Inserts] to change the order.
4. Change cover or insertion sheet settings. For covers, change copy mode. For insert sheets, change page number. After settings are completed, tap the [OK] key multiple times to return to the [Others] screen. Then, tap the [Back] key.
How do I insert sheets between transparency films (Transparency Inserts)?
This function automatically inserts a sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film to prevent sticking due to static electricity. It’s also possible to copy on insertion sheets.
Limitations:
• When performing 2-sided copying, only “2-Sided→1-Sided” mode can be used.
• The number of copies cannot be selected in this mode.
• Transparency film must be loaded in the bypass tray.
To use Transparency Inserts:
1. Place the transparency film face down in the bypass tray, and load transparency film sheets. Configure bypass tray settings as per “MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY (page 2-33)”. Note orientation (horizontally/vertically).
2. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
3. Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Transparency Inserts] key.
4. Tap the [On] key. When making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to ✓. After settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the transparency inserts setting: Tap the [Off] key.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I copy captions onto tab paper (Tab Copy)?
Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray and make a copy on a tab. Prepare appropriate originals for tab captions. The image is shifted by the width of the tab.
Placement for Left Binding:
• Originals: Insert in document feeder so that the side with no tab text enters first. If using document glass, place so that the side with the tab text is on the left.
• Loading tab paper: Load so that the tab on the first sheet is toward you (Side 2 facing up, tabs on the right entering machine last).
Placement for Right Binding:
• Originals: Insert in document feeder so that the side with no tab text enters first. If using document glass, place so that the side with the tab text is on the left.
• Loading tab paper: Load so that the tab on the first sheet is away from you (Side 2 facing up, tabs on the left entering machine last).
Tab Copy must be specified before scanning the original. The width of the tab paper can be as wide as A4 width (210 mm) plus 20 mm (or 8-1/2″ x 11″ paper (8-1/2″) plus 5/8″).
To perform Tab Copy:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Tab Copy] key.
2. Tap the [On] key.
3. Set an image shift width (tab width). Tap the numeric value display and enter a shift width (0-20 mm) using numeric keys. After settings, tap [OK] and [Back].
4. Load the tab paper in the bypass tray with the print side down. Place paper so tabs enter the machine last. Configure bypass tray settings as in “MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY (page 2-33)”.
5. Place the original and tap the [Preview] key. Place original in document feeder (page 1-127) or on document glass (page 1-129).
6. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the tab copy setting: Tap the [Off] key.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I change the default image shift width for tab copying?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Initial Tab Copy Setting]. Specify a value from 0 mm (0″) to 20 mm (1″) in increments of 1 mm (1/8″).
How do I make a poster-sized copy (Multi-Page Enlargement)?
This function separately copies an enlarged original image on multiple sheets.
Important notes:
• You must select Multi-Page Enlargement before scanning the original.
• Place an original on the document glass.
• When Multi-Page Enlargement is selected, the image orientation is changed to vertical.
• There will be a margin around the edges of each copy. Areas for overlapping the copies will be created at the leading and trailing edges of each copy.
• The paper size, number of sheets, and ratio are automatically selected based on the selected original size and enlargement size (cannot be selected manually).
To make a poster-sized copy:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi-Page Enlargement] key.
2. Select the [AB] or [Inch] tab to meet the original size, and tap the key that meets the original size. This displays keys for available enlargement size, copy paper size, and number of sheets.
3. Tap the key of the size you want to enlarge the original to. The image orientation appears. After settings, tap [OK] and [Back]. If printing the copy image and margin border, set the [Print Paste Position Mark] checkbox to ✓.
4. Place the original on the document glass based on the orientation displayed on the screen.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel Multi-Page Enlargement setting: Tap the [Clear] key. The automatically selected ratio is retained.
To return the ratio to 100%: Tap the [Copy Ratio] key on the base screen, then tap the [100%] key.
How do I copy with a mirror image?
This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image. Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original.
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After settings, tap the [Back] key.
2. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
3. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the mirror image setting: Tap the [Mirror Image] key to uncheck it.
How do I reverse white and black in a copy (B/W Reverse)?
This function reverses black and white in a copy to create a negative image. It can only be used for black and white copying and can reduce toner consumption for originals with large black areas.
Important notes:
• B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original.
• When selected, “Exposure/Original Type” automatically changes to “Text”.
• This function is not available in some countries and regions.
To use B/W Reverse:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [B/W Reverse] key. A checkmark appears. After settings, tap [Back].
2. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
3. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the B/W reverse setting: Tap the [B/W Reverse] key to uncheck it.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I use Quick Image Quality Adjustment?
This function easily adjusts the density and outlines of images and text. You must select Quick Image Quality Adjustment before scanning the original.
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Quick Image Quality Adjustment] key.
2. Tap [-], [+], or slide the slider to adjust the image quality (Smooth to Sharp). After settings, tap [OK] and [Back].
3. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
4. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the quick image quality adjustment setting: Tap the [Off] key.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I adjust the sharpness of an image?
This function adjusts sharpness to make an image sharper or softer. Sharpness must be specified before scanning.
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key.
2. Tap [-], [+], or slide the slider to adjust sharpness (Less Sharp to More Sharp). Select [More Sharp] for sharper outlines, or [Less Sharp] for softer outlines. After settings, tap [OK] and [Back].
3. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
4. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To cancel the sharpness setting: Tap the [Off] key.
To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I adjust the density area for copy (Grey Balance)?
This function adjusts the tone and density of copies. Density is divided into three ranges (L, M, H), and you can adjust each or all three at once. Grey balance must be specified before scanning.
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Grey Balance] key.
2. Tap the [-] [+] key or slide the slider to adjust the grey balance. To adjust each range, set the [Set in a Batch] checkbox to ☐. To adjust a slider individually with [-] [+] keys, tap the slider and then tap the keys.
3. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
4. Tap the [Start] key to start copying.
To return the grey balance to the default: Tap the [Reset] key. Default settings are from “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Image Quality Adjustment] → [Copy Image Quality] → [Grey Balance].
How do I change the default grey balance setting?
Change the setting in “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Image Quality Adjustment] → [Copy Image Quality] → [Grey Balance].
How do I perform an Interrupt Copy?
This function suspends a job in progress and preferentially prints the original specified with interrupt copy.
Important notes:
• The [Interrupt] key does not appear while an original is being scanned.
• Depending on the settings of the job in progress, the [Interrupt] key may not appear.
• Interrupt copy cannot be used with: Job Build, Tandem Copy, Book Copy, Card Shot, Multi-Page Enlargement, Original Count, Proof Copy, Preview Setting, and Book Divide.
• If using document glass for interrupt copy, you cannot select booklet, covers/inserts, or N-Up. Use automatic document feeder if these are necessary.
To perform an Interrupt Copy:
1. Tap the [Interrupt] key on the Copy screen. The interrupt mode screen appears. If user authentication is specified, tap [Interrupt] to display the user authentication screen, then enter login name and password.
2. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
3. Configure copy settings.
4. Tap the [Start] key to start interrupt copying. When completed, the interrupted job will resume. The interrupt copy function does not display a preview of the scanned original.
To cancel interrupt copy: Tap the [Cancel] key.
How do I send data (fax, e-mail, network folder) while copying?
This function allows sending a fax, e-mail with image attached, or saving data to a network folder while making a copy. Destination must be stored in the address book in advance (ADDRESS BOOK page 1-141). Transmission starts after the copy, using the same settings as the copy (some functions may not provide same results).
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode if needed (CHANGING MODES page 1-19).
2. Tap [Send as well as print] on the action panel.
3. Select a recipient from the address book (ADDRESS BOOK SCREEN page 1-142). After selection, tap [Enter Address] key. You cannot use soft keyboard; enter in address book if not found. An Internet Fax address cannot be selected.
4. Place the original in the document feeder (page 1-127) or on the document glass (page 1-129).
5. Set each copy item as required. These settings are used for fax transmission (some may be unavailable). You can preview by tapping [Preview].
6. Tap the [Start] key to start copying. After the copy, transmission starts. After the copy, you cannot preview settings before transmission.
How do I disable sending data while copying?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling sending while copying].
How do I manage Copy Jobs?
When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a copy job, tap the [Print] tab. To stop, delete, perform priority processing, or check jobs, refer to:
• STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED (page 1-133)
• PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB (page 1-134)
• CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS (page 1-136)
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 1-137)
How do I store copy settings as a Program?
This function collectively stores copy settings as one program for easy retrieval. Programs are set from the base screen of normal mode (SELECTING COPY MODE page 2-4). Programs cannot be stored in easy mode. Up to 48 programs can be stored. Settings remain registered even when main power is off. Programs can be stored in home screen or favourite as a shortcut.
1. Specify the copy function to be stored. In the base screen, display [Program Registration] on the action panel.
2. Tap [Program Registration] on the action panel.
3. Tap an unused key. A key with a program stored is displayed in colour. If no name is set, a serial number is assigned.
4. Set a name for the program (using soft keyboard) and tap the [OK] key. A registration completion message appears.
5. Select whether or not the program will be added to the home screen or favourites ([Cancel Registration], [Register for Home], [Register for Favorite]). For print settings, select from pre-set text or use soft keyboard. You can also print serial number and account job ID. After settings, tap [OK] and [Back].
If user authentication is enabled, the shortcut is registered in user’s home screen/favourite. If disabled, administrator password entry appears; after entry, registration is completed. The number of copies cannot be stored in a program.
How do I disable registration/deletion of Programs?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program].
How do I retrieve a stored Program?
1. Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.
2. Tap the key of the program you want to retrieve.
You can select a program key and tap [Register in Favorite] or [Register for Home] on the action panel to register a shortcut key for the selected program.
How do I delete a stored Program?
A program that is already stored cannot be deleted if [Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program] is selected in administrator settings.
1. Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.
2. Tap [Delete] on the action panel.
3. Tap the key of the program you want to delete, and tap [Delete].
How do I rename a stored Program?
A program cannot be renamed if [Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program] is selected in administrator settings.
1. Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.
2. Tap [Change Name] on the action panel.
3. Tap the key of the required program, enter the new name using the soft keyboard, and rename the program. Then tap the [OK] key. After settings are completed, tap [OK].
How do I perform basic printing in a Windows environment?
The following example uses “WordPad”. The menu/button names may vary by application.
1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of WordPad.
2. In the Print dialog, select the printer driver for the machine (e.g., SHARP MX-xxxx) and click the [Preferences] (or [Property]) button.
3. In the Printing Preferences window:
a. Click the [Main] tab.
b. Select the original size (e.g., A4). You can register up to seven user-defined sizes. To store a custom size, select [Custom Paper] or [User1] to [User7], and click [OK].
c. Select other settings on other tabs as needed (refer to PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP page 3-6).
d. Click the [OK] button.
4. Click the [Print] button in the application’s Print dialog. Printing begins.
How do I print on envelopes in a Windows environment?
The bypass tray can be used for envelope printing. Refer to “APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-108)” for usable types and “LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-117)” for loading. Test print before using an envelope. For specific orientation, rotate image 180 degrees (“ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) (page 3-34)”).
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Paper Source] tab.
2. Select the envelope size from the “Output Size” menu (e.g., DL). When [Output Size] is set to envelope, [Paper Type] is automatically set to [Envelope]. If “Original Size” on the [Main] tab is set to envelope and “Output Size” is [Same as Original Size], “Paper Type” is automatically set to [Envelope].
3. Select [Bypass Tray] in “Paper Tray”. If [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] is enabled in administrator settings, set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope].
How do I print when user authentication is enabled in a Windows environment?
User information (login name, password) varies by authentication method; check with administrator. If “Printing Policy” on [Configuration] tab requires authentication for each job, a dialog box appears each time.
1. In the printer driver properties window of the application, select the printer driver and click [Preferences].
2. Click the [Job Handling] tab.
3. Enter your user information under “Authentication”:
• Login name: select [Login Name], enter login name.
• Login name/password: click [Login Name/Password], enter login name and password (1-32 characters).
• Active Directory: [Single Sign-on] can be selected (see “AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON (page 3-92)”). Authentication by Single Sign-on requires Active Directory authentication on machine and computer (Windows only).
• User number: select [User Number], enter 5-8 digit user number.
4. Enter User Name and Job Name as necessary:
• User Name: Click checkbox, enter user name (up to 32 characters). Appears on touch panel. If not entered, PC login name appears.
• Job Name: Click checkbox, enter job name (up to 30 characters). Appears as file name on touch panel. If not entered, application’s file name appears.
• To have a confirmation window before printing, select [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox.
5. Click the [OK] button to execute printing.
How do I prohibit printing by users whose user information is not stored in the machine (Windows)?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Disable Printing by Invalid User].
How do I save print settings as a Favorite in a Windows environment?
Settings configured on each tab can be saved as Favorite for easy selection.
1. Select the machine’s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click [Preferences].
2. Register Print Settings:
a. Configure the print settings on each tab.
b. Click the [Save] button (often near the “Favorites” dropdown).
3. Check and save the settings:
a. Check the displayed settings in the “Save Favorite” dialog.
b. Enter a name for the settings (up to 20 characters).
c. Click the [OK] button.
How do I delete saved Favorite settings in a Windows environment?
In step 2 of “USING SAVED SETTINGS (page 3-12)”, select the user settings that you want to delete from the Favorites dropdown and click the [Delete] button that appears next to it.
How do I use saved Favorite settings in a Windows environment?
1. Select the machine’s printer driver from the print window of the application, and click [Preferences].
2. Select favorite settings:
a. From the “Favorites” dropdown menu (e.g., labeled “User 1”), select the favorite settings you want to use.
b. Click the [OK] button.
3. Start printing from the application.
How do I change the printer driver default settings in Windows?
Changes made in application’s printer properties revert to these defaults upon exiting the application.
1. Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers]. (For Windows 8.1/Server 2012, right-click [Start], select [Control Panel] → [View devices and printers]. For Windows 7/Server 2008, click [Start], select [Devices and Printers].)
2. Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine (e.g., SHARP MX-xxxx) and select [Printing preferences].
3. Configure the settings and click the [OK] button. For explanations, see printer driver Help.
How do I perform basic printing in a Mac OS environment?
The following example uses “TextEdit”. On MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the PS3 expansion kit is required.
1. Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and select the printer (e.g., SHARP MX-XXXX). If drivers appear as a list, select the one to be used.
2. In Page Attributes:
a. Make sure the correct printer is selected for “Format For”.
b. Select paper settings (Paper Size, Orientation, Scale).
c. Click the [OK] button.
3. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.
4. In the Print dialog:
a. Make sure the correct printer is selected.
b. Select an item from the menu (e.g., TextEdit, Layout, Paper Feed) and configure settings as needed.
c. Click the [Print] button.
How do I print on envelopes in a Mac OS environment?
Use the bypass tray. Refer to “APPLICABLE PAPER TYPES (page 1-108)” and “LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-117)”. Test print first. For specific orientation, rotate image 180 degrees (“ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) (page 3-34)”).
Select envelope size in application’s “Page Setup”, then:
1. In the Print dialog, select the envelope size from the “Paper Size” menu (e.g., Envelope DL).
2. Select [Paper Feed] from the dropdown menu.
3. Select [Bypass Tray (Envelope)] from the “All Pages From” menu.
If [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] is enabled in administrator settings, set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Envelope].
How do I print when user authentication is enabled in a Mac OS environment?
User information varies; check with administrator.
1. In the application, select [Print] from the [File] menu.
2. Enter your user information in the Print dialog:
a. Make sure the machine’s printer is selected.
b. Select [Job Handling] from the dropdown menu.
c. Click the [Authentication] tab.
d. Check “User Authentication”. Enter Login Name and Password, or User Number as required by the authentication method.
e. Enter User Name (up to 32 characters, appears on touch panel; PC login name if blank) and Job Name (up to 32 characters, appears as file name; application’s file name if blank) as necessary under “Job ID”.
f. Click the [Print] button.
How do I prohibit printing by users whose user information is not stored in the machine (Mac OS)?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Disable Printing by Invalid User].
How do I select the print resolution?
Available “Print Mode” (resolution) options:
• 600 dpi: Suitable for regular text or tables.
• 600 dpi (High Quality): High print quality for photos and text.
• 1200 dpi*: Print photos with higher definition and fine lines clearly. (*Not available on MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050).
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Image Quality] tab.
2. Select “Print Mode” from the dropdown (e.g., 600 dpi (High Quality)).
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Printer Features] and then select [Advanced2] from “Feature Sets”.
2. Select “Print Mode” from the dropdown.
How do I perform 2-sided printing?
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Main] tab.
2. Select the paper orientation (Portrait/Landscape).
3. Select [Long Edge] or [Short Edge] from “2-Sided Printing”. (If necessary, click [Other Settings] on [Detailed Settings] tab, and select mode from “Duplex Style”.)
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Layout] from the dropdown menu.
2. Select [Long-Edge binding] or [Short-Edge binding] from the “Two-Sided” dropdown.
How do I fit the print image to the paper size?
This automatically enlarges/reduces the print image to match the loaded paper size. If A0, A1, or A2 is selected in “Original Size”, A4 (or Letter) is automatically selected in “Output Size”.
In Windows (e.g., printing A4 document on A3 paper):
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Main] tab.
2. Select the original size from [Original Size] (e.g., A4).
3. Select the actual paper size to be used for printing from [Output Size] (e.g., A3). If output size is larger, image is automatically enlarged.
In Mac OS (e.g., printing A4 image on A3 paper):
1. In the Print dialog, check the paper size for the print image (e.g., A4 under “Paper Size”).
2. Select [Paper Handling] from the dropdown menu.
3. Select [Scale to fit paper size] checkbox.
4. Select the actual paper size to be used for printing from “Destination Paper Size” (e.g., A3).
How do I print multiple pages on one page (N-Up)?
This reduces the print image and prints multiple pages on a single sheet. Page order depends on selection.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Layout] tab.
2. Select the number of pages per sheet from “N-Up” (e.g., 4-Up).
3. Select the order of the pages (e.g., Right, and Down).
4. To print borderlines, click the [Border] checkbox (✓ appears). To print first page normally (as cover), select [N-Up with cover] (PCL6 only). If [100% N-Up] is selected for jobs like N-Up of two A4 pages onto A3, pages print at full original size; if [Border] is selected, only border prints.
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Layout] from the dropdown menu.
2. Select the number of pages per sheet (e.g., 4).
3. Select the order of the pages from “Layout Direction”.
4. If you wish to print borderlines, select the desired type from “Border” (e.g., Single Thin Line).
Note: [N-Up] on [Layout] tab can also be set on [Main] tab (Windows). “Order” is only on [Layout] tab. Page orders for 6/8/9/16-Up are same as 4-Up. In Windows, page order is viewable in print image. In Mac OS, page orders are selections; 2/4/6/9/16 pages supported (not 8). Printing only first page normally is PCL6 only (Windows).
How do I print while skipping blank pages (Windows only)?
This function is available in a Windows environment. The machine detects and skips blank pages. Depending on original, some non-blank pages may be detected as blank, or some blank pages may not be detected. In N-Up Print, blank pages are not excluded.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
2. Select [On] in [Disable Blank Page Print].
How do I staple or punch output?
Staple function staples output. Punch function punches holes. Inner finisher/finisher (large stacker)/saddle stitch finisher needed for staple. Inner finisher/finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher for stapleless staple. Punch module in finisher for punch function.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Finishing] tab.
2. Select the staple function or the punch function. For staple, select number of staples in “Staple” menu and position in “Position” menu. For punch, select type of punch in “Punch” menu and position in “Position” menu. ([Staple] can also be set on [Main] tab).
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Printer Features] and then select [Output] from “Feature Sets”.
2. Select “Binding Edge”.
3. Select the staple function or the punch function. For staple, select number of staples in “Staple” menu. For punch, select type of punch in “Punch” menu.
How do I create a pamphlet (Booklet/Saddle Stitch)?
Prints on front/back of sheets for folding and binding. If saddle finisher installed and “Booklet” + “Staple” selected, automatically folds and outputs.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Layout] tab.
2. Select [Standard] or [Full Image] in “Booklet”. [Standard]: image fits paper in “Output Size”. [Full Image]: image fits size in “Fit To Paper Size”; select larger paper for no-margin booklet. If page count exceeds stapling capacity, select [Split] checkbox (✓) to divide into sub-booklets.
3. Select the specified output size and the binding edge. For [Standard], select output paper size. For [Full Image], select size for image in [Fit To Paper Size] and printing paper size in “Output Size”.
If a saddle stitch finisher is installed (Windows):
4. Click the [Finishing] tab.
5. Select [Saddle Stitch] from “Staple”. (If job not output correctly with [Saddle Stitch] (large capacity finisher), select [Saddle Stitch (Reverse)]).
In Mac OS (if saddle stitch finisher is installed):
1. In the Print dialog, select [Printer Features] and then select [Output] from “Feature Sets”.
2. Select “Binding Edge”.
3. Select [Saddle Stitch] from “Staple”.
4. Select [Off] or [2-Up] from “Booklet”.
How do I print with margin shift setting?
Shifts print image to increase margin (left, right, top). Can be used with staple/punch.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Layout] tab.
2. Click the [Print Position] button.
3. Select [Margin Shift] (e.g., A Margin Shift).
4. Select the shift width from “Margin Shift” menu or enter numeric value (0-30mm). Select Unit and Position (Left/Right/Top). Click OK.
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Printer Features] and then select [Output] from “Feature Sets”.
2. Select “Binding Edge”.
3. Select “Margin Shift” value (e.g., 10 mm).
How do I create a large poster (Poster Printing) (Windows only)?
One page enlarged and printed on multiple sheets (4, 9, or 16). Sheets attached for poster. Borderlines or overlap for alignment.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Layout] tab.
2. Select the number of sheets (e.g., 2×2) in “Poster Printing”. To print borderlines ([Dash Border]) and/or use overlap ([Overlap]), click corresponding checkboxes (✓ appears).
How do I adjust print position on odd and even pages separately (Windows only)?
Sets different print margins for odd and even pages.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Layout] tab.
2. Click the [Print Position] button.
3. Select [Custom] (e.g., A Custom).
4. Set the amount of shifting (X, Y coordinates, -30 to 30 mm) for odd-numbered pages and even-numbered pages. Select Unit.
5. Click the [OK] button.
How do I rotate the print image 180 degrees?
Rotates image 180 degrees for paper loaded in one orientation (e.g., envelopes, punch paper).
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Main] tab.
2. Select [Portrait (Rotated)] or [Landscape (Rotated)] in “Orientation”.
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Layout] from the dropdown menu.
2. Select the [Reverse page orientation] checkbox (✓ appears).
How do I enlarge or reduce the print image (Zoom/Scale)?
Enlarges/reduces image to selected percentage. (PS driver on Windows allows separate width/length percentages; PS3 kit needed for some models).
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Main] tab.
2. Click the [Zoom] checkbox (✓ appears), and click the [Settings] button.
3. Enter the percentage (25-400). Use +/- buttons or direct entry. Select Reference Point (Upper Left/Center).
4. Click the [OK] button.
In Mac OS:
1. Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu.
2. Enter the ratio (%) in “Scale”.
3. Click the [OK] button.
How do I adjust the line thickness (Width) for CAD data (Windows PCL6 only)?
Increases thickness of entire line if print lines unclear. For lines of varying widths, can print all at minimum width. Not for raster graphics.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Image Quality] tab.
2. Click the [Line Width] button.
3. Set the line thickness (0-?) and click [OK]. Units (“Fixed Width” or “Ratio”) from “Unit” menu. To print all at minimum width, click [Minimum Line Width] checkbox.
How do I thicken fine lines in Excel or adjust thickness of text/lines (Windows PCL6 only)?
For fine Excel border lines not printing correctly, or general text/line thickness adjustment.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
2. Click the [Other Settings] button.
3. Specify the settings:
• To thicken fine Excel lines: Select the [Thicken Fine Lines] checkbox.
• To adjust general text/line thickness or edges:
– Text/Line control: Off, Text, Graphics, Text+Graphics, Text+Graphics+Photo (thicker/thinner).
– Text/Line Knockout control: Off, Text, Text+Graphics (knockout text/lines thicker).
– Image Enhancement: Off, Text, Text+Graphics, Text+knockout text, Text+Graphics+knockout text, Text+Graphics+knockout (edges smoother/sharper).
How do I print a mirror-image (Mirror-image reverse/visual effects)?
Reverses image. For woodblock print designs, etc. (Windows PS driver only; PS3 kit needed for some models).
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
2. Select [Horizontal] (reverse horizontally) or [Vertical] (reverse vertically) from “Mirror Image”.
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Layout] from the dropdown menu.
2. Select the [Flip horizontally] checkbox (✓).
How do I adjust the brightness and contrast of the image (Windows only)?
Adjusts brightness/contrast in print settings for photos/images.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Image Quality] tab.
2. Click the [Image Adjustment] button.
3. To adjust objects (text, graphics, photos) individually, select the [Adjust at each object] checkbox (✓) and select the object (e.g., ABC Text).
4. Drag the slide bar for Brightness/Contrast or click < > buttons to adjust.
How do I print faint text and lines in black (Text to Black/Vector to Black) (Windows only)?
When printing color image in grayscale, faint color text/lines print in black. Raster data not adjusted.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Image Quality] tab.
2. Select the [Text To Black] checkbox and/or the [Vector To Black] checkbox (✓ appears). [Text To Black]: all non-white text prints black. [Vector To Black]: all non-white vector graphics print black.
How do I select image settings to match the image type?
Preset settings for various uses.
• Graphics mode: Raster or Vector.
• Bitmap compression: Data compression ratio (higher ratio = lower quality).
• Screening: Modify image for specific preferences.
• Sharpness: Sharper/softer image.
• Smoothing: Resolution enhancement (RETs) for smoother outlines.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Image Quality] tab.
2. Specify the settings (e.g., Graphics Mode: Vector; Screening: Default; Sharpness: None).
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Printer Features].
2. Click the [Advanced2] tab.
3. Specify the settings (e.g., Print Mode, Sharpness, Screening, Toner Save, Boldness Adjustment).
How do I add a watermark to printed pages?
Adds faint shadow-like text as watermark. Size/angle adjustable. Select from list or enter new text.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Stamp] tab.
2. Select [Watermark] from “Stamp” and click the [Settings] button.
3. In Watermark dialog, select watermark to use from list, or enter text in text box and click [Add]. Configure Printing Pattern, Position (X, Y, Center), On First Page Only, Size, Angle. Click [OK].
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Watermarks] from the dropdown menu.
2. Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure settings. Select text, adjust Size/Angle by dragging slide bar, select Outline Text, On First Page Only, Transparent Text %.
How do I print an image over the print data (Image Stamp) (Windows only)?
Prints bitmap/JPEG from PC over print data. Size/position/angle adjustable. (Hard disk kit required for some models if image already stored).
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Stamp] tab.
2. Select [Image Stamp] from “Stamp” and click the [Settings] button.
3. In Image Stamp dialog, select image stamp to use from list. If not stored, click [Image File], select file, click [Add]. Configure Position, On First Page Only, Size, Angle. Click [OK].
How do I register a custom image from the printer driver (Windows PCL6 only)?
(Hard disk kit required for some models). To prohibit registration, see administrator settings.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
2. Click the [Custom Image Registration] button.
3. Select registration type ([Custom stamp] for non-transparent, [Custom watermark] for transparent) and name of custom image. If storing multiple pages, only first page stored.
How do I overlay a fixed form on the print data (Overlays) (Windows only)?
Overlays data on a prepared fixed form. Create rulings/frame in different app, register as overlay file.
Creating an overlay file:
1. Open driver properties window from application used for creating overlay data.
2. Click the [Stamp] tab.
3. Click the [Settings] button under “Overlays”.
4. In Overlays dialog, click [New] button, specify name and folder for overlay file. File created when settings completed and printing started. Confirmation message appears; file not created until [Yes] clicked. Clicking [Open] registers existing file.
Printing with an overlay file:
1. Open driver properties window from application used for printing with overlay.
2. Click the [Stamp] tab.
3. Select an overlay file from “Overlays” dropdown. Previously created/stored file can be selected.
How do I add the number of copies to the print data (Copies Stamp) (Windows only)?
Adds number of copies to header/footer. Set copies number and print position.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Stamp] tab.
2. Click the [Copies Stamp] button.
3. In Copies Stamp dialog, select settings: Format (123 Number of Sets), Position (Upper Right etc.), Number of Sets (Automatic/value), Total Sets (Automatic/value), On First Page Only, On Covers/Inserts. Click [OK].
How do I print specific pages on different paper?
Front/back covers and specified pages print on paper different from other pages. Insert colored/heavy paper or different type. Paper can be inserted as blank sheets.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Inserts] tab.
2. Select [Covers/Inserts] from [Inserts Option], and click the [Settings] button.
3. Select paper insertion settings: Paper Selection (Paper Tray, Paper Type), Insert Position (Cover Page, Other Page – enter numbers/ranges), Printing Method (1-Sided, 2-Sided, Make No Copy). Click [Add]; settings appear in “Information”. When finished, click [Save] in “Favorites” to save. If [Bypass Tray] selected, select “Paper Type” and load that paper.
In Mac OS (for front cover and last page on thick paper):
1. In the Print dialog, select [Printer Features].
2. Select [Covers] from “Feature Sets”.
3. Select cover insertion settings: Cover Page (1-Sided etc.), Paper Tray (Auto Select etc.), Paper Type (Auto Select etc.), Last Page (Off/1-Sided etc.) and its Paper Tray/Type.
How do I add inserts when printing on transparency film?
Inserts paper between transparency sheets to prevent sticking. Can print same content on insert.
In Windows:
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Inserts] tab.
2. Select [Transparency Inserts] from [Inserts Option] and click the [Settings] button.
3. Select transparency insert settings. Check [Printed] checkbox if same content as transparency is to be printed on insert. Select Paper Selection (Paper Tray, Paper Type). Ensure transparencies in proper tray. Click OK.
In Mac OS:
1. In the Print dialog, select [Printer Features].
2. Select [Transparency Inserts] in “Feature Sets”.
3. Select transparency insert settings. From “Transparency Inserts” dropdown, choose On (Unprinted) or On (Printed). If On (Printed), select Paper Tray and Paper Type for inserts. Ensure transparencies in proper tray (set bypass tray to [Transparency]).
Always set paper type of bypass tray to [Transparency] and load transparency film there.
How do I insert separator pages between jobs or copies (Windows only)?
Insert separator pages between jobs or specified number of copies.
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click the [Separator Page] button.
3. Change settings: Paper Selection (Paper Tray, Paper Type), Insert Position (Between Jobs, Per Copies – specify number). Example: printing 10 copies, “Per Copies” set to “5”, separator added after 5th and 10th copy. Click Add, OK. When bypass tray selected, select “Paper Type”.
How do I print a carbon copy (Windows only)?
Prints additional copy on same size paper from different tray (e.g., plain paper in tray 1, colored in tray 2 for slip-like result).
1. In Printing Preferences, click the [Inserts] tab.
2. Select [Carbon Copy] from “Inserts Option” and click the [Settings] button.
3. Select tray for first copy (“Top Copy”: Paper Tray, Paper Type) and tray for carbon copy (“Carbon Copy”: Paper Tray, Paper Type). Click Add, OK. When bypass tray selected, select “Paper Type”.
How do I print text on tabs of tab paper using Tab Shift?
To print text on tabs of tab paper using Tab Shift:
1. Create the text to be printed on tab paper in an application.
2. Set the text shifting distance in [Print Position] on the [Layout] tab of the printer driver property window.
The text will be printed on the tabs.
Note:
– These functions are available in a Windows environment.
– Tab paper must be loaded into the bypass tray.
How do I print text on tabs of tab paper using Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only)?
To print text on tabs of tab paper using Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only):
1. Select [Tab Paper] in [Inserts Option] on the [Inserts] tab of the printer driver properties window.
2. Enter the text that you want to print on the tabs.
3. Specify the detailed settings such as the size of the tabs, the starting position, the distance between tabs, and the page numbers where tab sheets will be inserted.
Tab sheets are printed while they are inserted between the desired pages.
Note:
– These functions are available in a Windows environment.
– Tab paper must be loaded into the bypass tray.
How do I use the Tab Shift feature in Windows?
When you have finished preparing the data to be printed on tab papers in an application, take the following steps:
1. Click the [Layout] tab.
2. Click the [Print Position] button.
3. Select [Tab Shift].
4. Specify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the +/- button.
5. Click the [OK] button.
6. Select the paper source and type. Click the [Paper Source] tab, and select [Bypass Tray] in “Paper Tray” and [Tab Paper] in “Paper Type”.
Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Tab Paper] and load tab papers into the bypass tray.
How do I use Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only)?
Open the data into which you wish to insert tab paper, and then select the settings:
1. Click the [Inserts] tab.
2. Select [Tab Paper] from “Inserts Option”, and click the [Settings] button.
3. Select the tab position settings. For commercially available tab paper, use the existing settings such as [A4-5tab-D] in “Favorites”. For other types of tab paper, the position of the first tab, the distance between tabs, and the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the tab can be directly entered or changed using the +/- button. In addition, select the size of the tab paper from “Output Size”.
4. Select the page settings. Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. Also select the font and adjust the layout.
Notes:
– Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Tab Paper] and load tab papers into the bypass tray.
– The tab paper settings can be stored and a stored file can be opened from “Favorites”.
How does Two-Sided Printing with Specific Pages Printed on the Front Side (Chapter Inserts) work?
This function prints specific pages on the front side of the paper. When you specify a page (such as a chapter cover page) to be printed on the front side of the paper, it is printed on the front side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper. For example, if pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings, the back of these pages will be blank.
This function is available in a Windows environment and can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
To use this function in Windows:
1. Click the [Layout] tab.
2. Select the 2-Sided Printing.
3. Enter the page numbers of the initial pages of the chapters, separating the numbers with commas.
How do I use the Folding Printed Paper in Half (Fold) function?
This function folds printed paper in half when a saddle finisher is installed on the machine. You can choose whether the output is folded inward or outward.
This function cannot be used when [Common Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Duplex] is selected.
When printing data in a pamphlet layout, the “Booklet” function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet.
Windows:
1. Click the [Finishing] tab.
2. Select [Half Fold] in “Fold”, and click the [Settings] button.
3. Select the desired folding method.
Mac OS:
1. Select [Printer Features].
2. Select [Paper Folding Settings].
3. Select the desired folding method.
How do I insert preset data before or after each page (Page Interleave)?
This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing. You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is made up of text on the left-hand page and a memo space on the right-hand page.
This function is available in a Windows environment and can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
You have to create page data to be inserted in advance.
Windows:
1. Click the [Stamp] tab.
2. Click the [Settings] button.
3. Select [Page Interleave] from the “Printing Method”.
4. Set the overlay data to be inserted and set its insertion position.
How do I print the same image in a tile pattern (Repeat Print)?
This function prints the same image in a tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers.
This function is available in a Windows environment and can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
Windows:
1. Click the [Main] tab.
2. Select the repeat count in “N-Up”.
How do I use Printing Pattern Data (Hidden Pattern Print)?
This function prints pattern data such as “DO NOT COPY” behind the print data. If paper with pattern data is duplicated, the pattern data emerges in the background, which will help to prevent information from being leaked through unauthorized document copying.
This function is available in a Windows environment and can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
Windows:
1. Click the [Stamp] tab.
2. Click the [Hidden Pattern] button.
3. Configure the settings for hidden pattern printing and click the [OK] button.
The hidden pattern printing function cannot be used when “Print Mode” is set to [1200 dpi].
Notes:
– “Hidden Pattern” is a function provided for the purpose of deterring unauthorized printing. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage.
– Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] → [Contrast] if this is the case.
– The hidden pattern may not emerge on copies with certain types of devices or under certain setting conditions used to copy an output sheet with a pattern print.
How do I change the rendering method and print JPEG images (Use driver to render JPEGs)?
In some situations, a document containing a JPEG image may not be printed correctly. This can be solved by changing the way the JPEG image is rendered. When you print an original containing JPEG images, this function allows you to select whether the images are rendered in the printer driver or the machine.
This function is available in a Windows environment. When images are rendered in the printer driver, it may take time until the printing is completed.
Windows:
1. Click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
2. Click the [Other Settings] button.
3. Click the [Use driver to render JPEGs] checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
4. Click the [OK] button.
How do I maximize the print area on the paper (Print Area)?
By maximizing the print area, you can print on the full paper size.
This function is available in a Windows environment. Even when the print area is maximized, edges may be cut off.
Windows:
1. Click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
2. Click the [Other Settings] button.
3. Select [Maximum] from the “Printable Area”.
4. Click the [OK] button.
How do I use two machines to print a large print job (Tandem Print)?
To use this function, two machines that can perform tandem printing are required. Two machines connected to the same network are used to run a large print job in parallel. This function reduces the printing time when you handle a large number of prints. For example, you can print four sets of copies, with 2 sets of copies printed by each machine.
To use the tandem print function, the IP address of the client machine must be registered in the printer driver.
– In a Windows environment, this is accomplished automatically by clicking the [Auto Configuration] button on the [Configuration] tab of the printer driver.
– In Mac OS 10.6 to 10.8, this is accomplished automatically by clicking the [Update] button (or [Tandem Settings] button) on the “Tandem Print” screen. In Mac OS 10.9, enter the IP address of the client machine.
This function cannot be used in Mac OS X 10.10 or later.
Windows:
1. Click the [Detailed Settings] tab.
2. Select [On] in “Tandem Print”.
The tandem print function can be used only when the printer driver has been installed using “Custom Installation” with [LPR Direct Print (Specify Address/Auto Search)] selected and with the [Yes] checkbox selected for “Do you want to use Tandem Print function?”.
Mac OS:
1. Select [Tandem Print].
2. Click the [Tandem Print] checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
To use the tandem print function, you must select the protocol to be used as instructed in the message that appears when you add the printer driver in the “Printer Setup Utility”.
How do I save and use print files (Document Filing)?
This function stores a print job as a file on the machine’s hard drive, allowing the job to be printed from the touch panel when needed. The location for storing a file can be selected to prevent the file from being mixed together with files of other users.
– Hold Only: This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine’s hard drive without printing it.
– Hold After Print: This setting is used to hold a print job on the machine’s hard drive after it is printed.
– Sample Print: When a print job is sent to the machine, only the first set of copies is printed. After checking the contents of the first set of copies, you can print the remaining sets from the operation panel of the machine. This prevents the occurrence of excessive misprints.
Notes:
– On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
– When printing from a PC, you can set a password (5 to 8 digits) to maintain the confidentiality of information in a stored file. When a password is set, the password must be entered to print data.
– [Document Filing] that can be set on the [Job Handling] tab can also be set on the [Main] tab.
Windows:
1. Click the [Job Handling] tab.
2. Select the function from the “Document Filing”.
3. Select the folder for storing the file in “Stored to”. To enter a password (5 to 8 digit number), click the [PIN Code] checkbox so that the checkmark appears. To create a public PDF for PC browsing, select the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox.
Mac OS:
1. Select [Job Handling].
2. Select [Retention].
3. Select how to save the print data in “Document Filing”. After you have entered a password (a 5 to 8-digit number), click the lock button to lock the password. This allows you to readily set the same password the next time you use it.
4. Select the folder to store the file in “Stored To”. If you selected [Custom Folder], enter the name of the custom folder where you want to save the file.
Additional Notes:
– When [Quick File] is selected, “Document Filing” will be set to [Hold After Print].
– When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in “Document Filing” is cleared.
– If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be stored in the machine. Click the [Other Settings] button on the [Detailed Settings] tab and select the format from “Rip Style” (Windows) or select [Advanced1] in [Printer Features] and select the format from “Rip Style” (Mac OS).
– To store a file in a custom folder, you must first create the custom folder using [Document Operations] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Document Filing]. If you have set a password for the custom folder, enter the password (5 to 8 digit number) in “PIN Code” on the stored to screen (Windows) or on the folder selection screen (Mac OS).
– If you have configured to always use the force document filing function in “Printing Policy” on the [Configuration] tab, you cannot clear the [Document Filing] checkbox (Windows).
How do I automatically print all stored data?
When user authentication is enabled on the machine, all document filing (stored) print jobs of the user who logs in are automatically printed. After all jobs are printed, the stored jobs are deleted.
To use the Print All function, the following steps are necessary:
– In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [Default Settings] and enable [Automatically print stored jobs after login].
– When executing document filing print, in addition to the user authentication information, enter the user name stored in the machine in “User Name” of “Default Job ID” in the printer driver.
Files with a password and files that are protected by the document filing function of the machine will not be printed. Files in a folder (excluding My Folder) that has a password will also not be printed.
Steps:
1. Select [Job Handling]. At the time of document filing print, in addition to the user authentication information, enter the user name stored in the machine in “User Name” in the printer driver.
2. A confirmation prompt will appear. Tap the [OK] key. The print files stored in the quick file folder, main folder, and custom folder will be printed automatically and then deleted.
How do I print and send data simultaneously?
This function prints data created in an application from the machine and simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine. This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver.
Notes:
– Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine.
– You must complete the preparatory steps for using each sending function of the machine.
– This function is available in a Windows environment.
– This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used.
– You cannot print and send data simultaneously when [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling sending while printing] is selected.
Windows:
1. Click the [Job Handling] tab.
2. Click the [Print and Send] button.
3. Select the [Print and Send] checkbox so that a checkmark appears.
4. Click the [Get Address Book] button.
5. From the “Address Book” list, select the address to which you wish to send the data, and click the [Add] button to add the address to the “Destination” list.
– If you wish to send the data to all addresses, click the [Add All] button.
– To delete an address from the “Destination” list, select the address and click the [Delete] button. If you wish to delete all addresses, click the [Delete All] button.
– Up to 50 destinations can be specified.
– Data cannot be sent to an Internet Fax address.
6. Click the [OK] button. The printer driver settings are applied to sending settings.
What file types can be printed directly without the printer driver?
When you do not have the printer driver installed on your PC, or when the application used to open a file that you wish to print is not available, you can print directly to the machine without using the printer driver. The file types (and corresponding extensions) that can be printed directly are shown below:
| File Type | Extension |
|---|---|
| TIFF | tiff, tif |
| JPEG | jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif |
| PNG | png |
| PCL | pcl, prn, txt |
| PS*2 | ps, prn |
| PDF*2, Encrypt PDF*1, 2, Compact PDF*2, PDF/A*2, Compact PDF/A*2 | |
| DOCX, XLSX, PPTX*3 | docx, xlsx, pptx |
*1 On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, an encrypted PDF file can not be printed if the Hard disk expansion kit is not installed.
*2 On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the PS3 expansion kit is required.
*3 On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the Direct print expansion kit is required.
Some files may not print correctly even if shown in the above table.
How do I directly print a file on an FTP server?
When an FTP server is configured, you can directly select and print files on the FTP server from the touch panel of the machine. This function eliminates the need for downloading the files from the FTP server to your PC and sending print jobs from the PC to the machine.
To configure an FTP server: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Direct Print Settings (FTP)]. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 FTP servers can be configured.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
1. Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key. On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, tap the [Direct Print] key if the Hard disk expansion kit is not installed.
2. Tap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key on the action panel. On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, tap the [Select File from FTP to Print] key if the Hard disk expansion kit is not installed.
3. Tap the key of the FTP server that you wish to access. When a server is selected, entry of a user name and password may be necessary. Enter your user name and password, and tap the [Enter] key.
4. Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Change Setting to Print] key on the action panel.
– When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.
– The printer icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.
– The folder icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders on the FTP server. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.
– A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
– Tap the up arrow to move up one folder level.
– When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, the up arrow appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
– Tap the thumbnail icon to switch to thumbnails.
– Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.
5. Select the print conditions.
– If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints.
– If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 4, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
6. Tap the [Start] key. Printing begins after the selected file is downloaded.
How do I directly print a file in USB memory?
Files in a USB memory device connected to the machine are printed from the operation panel of the machine without using the printer driver. When the printer driver of the machine is not installed on your PC, you can copy a file into a commercially available USB memory device and connect the device to the machine to print the file directly.
– Use a FAT32 USB memory device with a capacity of no more than 32 GB.
– Printing from a USB memory device is not possible when [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print] is selected.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
1. Connect the USB memory device to the machine.
2. When the screen for selecting the action appears, tap [Print from external memory device (USB)]. If the screen does not appear, follow the steps below:
(1) Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key (or [Direct Print] key).
(2) Tap the [Select File from USB Memory to Print] key on the action panel.
3. Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Change Setting to Print] key on the action panel.
– When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap the [Print] key on the action panel.
– The printer icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.
– The folder icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the USB memory device. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.
– A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
– Tap the up arrow to move up one folder level.
– When you move down a folder level by tapping a folder key, the up arrow appears. Tap this key to return to the file or folder name selection screen.
– Tap the thumbnail icon to switch to thumbnails.
– Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.
4. Select the print conditions.
– If you have selected multiple files in step 3, you can select only the number of prints.
– If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 3, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
5. Tap the [Start] key. Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.
6. Remove the USB memory device from the machine.
To prohibit direct printing from a USB memory device, enable “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of USB Memory Direct Print].
How do I directly print a file in a network folder?
You can specify and print a file in a network folder from the touch panel of the machine. Even if the network folder is not registered, you can access the network folder by directly entering or referring to the path to the folder in the workgroup.
To register a network folder: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Direct Print Settings (Network Folder)]. (Administrator rights are required.) Up to 20 network folders can be registered.
To prohibit direct printing from a network folder, enable “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print].
Printing from a network folder is not possible when [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print] is selected.
When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing.
Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine’s settings:
1. Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key. On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, tap the [Direct Print] key if the Hard disk expansion kit is not installed.
2. Tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel. On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, tap the [Select File from Network Folder to Print] key if the Hard disk expansion kit is not installed.
3. Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder.] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access. If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.
– When you tap the [Direct Input of Folder Path] key, a screen appears to allow direct input of the network folder path.
– When you select the workgroup, server, and network folder in sequence, you can access the network folder.
4. Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Change Setting to Print] key on the action panel.
– When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files you wish to print, and tap [Print] on the action panel.
– The printer icon appears to the left of keys of files that can be printed.
– The folder icon is displayed to the left of keys of folders in the network folder. To display a folder or a file in a folder, tap this key.
– A total of 100 keys of files and folders can be displayed.
– Tap the up arrow to move up one folder level.
– To return to the network folder selection screen, tap the up arrow.
– Tap the thumbnail icon to switch to thumbnails.
– Tap the [File or Folder Name] key to change the order of the files and folders displayed on the screen. Each time the key is tapped, the order changes between ascending and descending.
5. Select the print conditions.
– If you have selected multiple files in step 4, you can select only the number of prints.
– If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions in step 4, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
6. Tap the [Start] key. Printing begins after the selected file is transferred.
Entering the network folder path directly:
1. Tap [Direct Input of Folder Path] in step 3 of “Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine’s settings”.
2. Enter the path to the folder, user name and password. Access the network folder. For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of “Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine’s settings”.
Referring to the network folder path:
1. Tap the key of the workgroup that you wish to access in step 3 of “Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine’s settings”.
2. Tap the key of the server or computer that you wish to access. If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and enter the appropriate user name and password.
3. Tap the key of the network folder that you wish to access. Access the network folder. For the procedure for printing, see steps 4 to 6 of “Printing a file in the network folder you have configured in the machine’s settings”.
– Tap the search icon and enter a keyword to search for a workgroup, server, or network folder.
– Up to 100 workgroups, 100 servers, and 100 network folders are displayed.
– Tap the up arrow to move up one folder level.
– To return to the workgroup selection screen, tap the up arrow.
How do I directly print from a computer (Submit Print Job)?
By selecting [Document Operations] → [Submit Print Job] from “Settings (Web version)” and specifying a file, you can directly print the file without using the printer driver. In addition to a file on your PC, this procedure can be used to print any file that can be accessed from your PC, such as a file on another PC connected to the same network. Files that can be printed are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, PCL, PS*1, XPS, DOCX*2, PPTX*2, and XLSX*2 files with extensions pdf, tif, tiff, jpeg, jpg, jpe, jfif, pcl, ps*1, xps, docx*2, pptx*2, and xlsx*2. Available only if the MFP supports PostScript. Enter the password for the encrypted PDF data on Spool Queue of the Job Status screen.
*1 On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the PS3 expansion kit is required.
*2 On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Direct print expansion kit is required.
– If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
– When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
Print Settings: Select print settings. Select the file you want to print in “Select File”, select settings, and then click [Print].
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Copies | Set the number of copies to be printed. |
| Paper Size | Set the print size. |
| Orientation | Select portrait or landscape for the print orientation. |
| 2-Sided Print | Select one-sided printing, two-sided printing (booklet), or two-sided printing (tablet). |
| Output | If printing by set, select the “Print per Unit” checkbox. |
| Staple | Select staple settings. |
| Separator Page | Select to insert separator pages. Specify whether separator pages are to be added in front of or behind each set. Select the paper tray with the paper you want to use from the paper trays. |
| Fit To Page | Print with the file expanded to the full paper size. |
| Print What | Select whether blank sheets are to be deleted or the entire book is to be printed when printing an Excel file. |
| Output Tray | Select the output tray for the print job. |
| Quick File* | Save the print data in the Quick File Folder of the machine. |
| Print Glossy | Select this checkbox if the print job will be printed on glossy paper. |
| Billing Code | Select the checkbox of the Billing Code to assign, and then enter the billing code. |
* On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
How do I use FTP Print?
You can print a file from your PC by simply dragging and dropping the file onto the FTP server of the machine.
To perform FTP print: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Print Setting from PC/Mobile Terminal], set [FTP Print] to [Enable], and then configure the port number. (Administrator rights are required.)
Performing FTP print:
Type “ftp://” and then the IP address of the machine in the address bar of your PC’s Web browser as shown below. Example: ftp://192.168.1.28
Drag and drop the file that you wish to print onto the “lp” folder that appears in your Web browser. Printing of the file automatically begins.
– If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
– When user authentication is enabled in the settings of the machine, the print function may be restricted. For more information, ask your administrator.
How do I use E-mail Print?
If you configure your e-mail account in the machine, the machine periodically checks your mail server and automatically prints received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver.
To perform e-mail print: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [E-mail Print Settings], and register your e-mail account. (Administrator rights are required.)
Performing e-mail print:
Using your PC’s e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in “Address” and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed. Control commands can be entered in the message of the e-mail to specify the number of copies and print format. Commands are entered in the format “command name = value” as shown in the example to the right: COPIES=2, DUPLEX=LEFT, ACCOUNTNUMBER=11111, PAPER=A4.
As an example, the control commands include the following:
| Function | Command name | Values |
|---|---|---|
| Copies | COPIES | 1 to 9999 |
| Staple*1 | STAPLEOPTION | NONE, ONE, TWO, SADDLE, STAPLELESS |
| Punch*2 | PUNCH | OFF, ON |
| Punch holes | PUNCH-NUMBER | TWO, THREE, FOUR, FOURWIDE |
| Collate | COLLATE | OFF, ON |
| 2-sided Print | DUPLEX | TOP, LEFT, RIGHT, OFF |
| Account Number*3 | ACCOUNTNUMBER | Number (5 to 8 digits) |
| File Format*4 | LANGUAGE | PCL, PCLXL, POSTSCRIPT, PDF, TIFF, JPG, DOCX, XLSX, PPTX, PNG |
| Paper | PAPER | Paper that can be used (A4, LETTER, or others) |
| Fold | V-FOLD | OFF, INSIDE, OUTSIDE |
| Document Filing*5 | FILE | OFF, ON |
| FOLDERNAME | Up to 28 characters | |
| Quick File*5 | QUICKFILE | OFF, ON |
| Output | OUTTRAY | CENTER, RIGHT, FINISHER, TOPTRAY |
| Fit Page | FITIMAGETOPAGE | OFF, ON |
| Print Glossy | MEDIATYPE | GLOSSY |
| Print Pages | PRINTPAGES | 1-2,5,9- |
*1 Enabled only when an inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed. “STAPLELESS” is only enabled when an inner finisher, finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) that allows stapling without staples is installed.
*2 Enabled only when a punch module is attached to the inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker).
*3 Can be omitted except when authentication is by user number.
*4 On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the Direct print expansion kit is required for DOCX, PPTX, and XLSX files. The PS3 expansion kit is required for POSTSCRIPT and PDF files.
*5 Only enabled when either “Document Filing” or “Quick File” is “ON”. When both are “ON”, this is disabled. On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
– The mail text must be in a text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect.
– If you enter “Config” in the mail text, a list of control commands is returned.
– If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will take place according to the settings configured in “Settings (administrator).” → [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Initial Status Settings]. If you selected a PS or PCL file that includes print conditions, the print conditions in the file will be given priority.
– Enter a file type only when you wish to specify the page-description language. Normally there is no need to enter a file type.
How do I check the print status?
When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a printer job, tap the [Print] tab. When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read the following items:
– STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED
– PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB
– CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS
– CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
How do I print an encrypted PDF file?
PDF encryption is used to protect a PDF file by requiring the entry of a password to print or edit the file. To directly print an encrypted PDF file on an FTP server or in a USB memory device, etc. connected to the machine, reset the password and begin printing.
– On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the PS3 expansion kit is required.
– On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, an encrypted PDF file can not be printed if the Hard disk expansion kit is not installed.
– To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your PC.
– Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for the encrypted PDF file.
– Encrypted PDF versions that can be directly printed are 1.6 (Adobe® Acrobat® 7.0) and earlier.
Steps:
1. Tap the Job status display and tap the [Print] tab.
2. Tap the [Spool] key. When the list contains an encrypted PDF file, a message is displayed to indicate that an encrypted PDF file exists.
3. Tap the print job key for the encrypted PDF file.
You cannot select multiple encrypted PDF files.
4. Tap the [Enter Password for Encrypt PDF.] key on the action panel.
5. Enter the password (32 characters or less) and tap the [Yes] key.
When both a master password and a user password (which is used to open the file) have been set, enter the master password.
How do I change to another paper size and print when paper runs out?
If printing stops because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine. If paper of the desired size is not immediately available, you can use paper that is set in a different tray.
If you changed to a different paper size, printing may not take place correctly; for example part of the text or image may run off the paper.
Steps:
1. Tap the job status display.
2. Tap the key of the job for which “Paper Empty” appeared.
3. Tap the [Reselect Paper] key on the action panel.
4. Tap the key for the tray containing the paper that you wish to use, and tap OK.
How do I specify a billing code using the printer driver in a Windows environment?
You can enter a billing code using the printer of the machine.
Enable billing code (Windows environment only):
1. Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers]. (In Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012, right-click the [Start] button, select [Control Panel] → [View devices and printers] (or [Devices and Printers]). In Windows 7/Windows Server 2008, click the [Start] button, select [Devices and Printers].)
2. Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine and select [Printer Properties].
3. Specify a billing code:
(1) Click the [Configuration] tab.
(2) Click the [Printing Policy] button.
(3) Set the [Billing Code] check box to a checkmark.
(4) Click the [OK] button.
When printing (Windows):
When printing starts, the billing code setting screen appears. Enter the main code and sub code, and click the [OK] button. To retain the specified billing code, set [Always Use This Billing Code] to a checkmark.
– You can click [Get Billing Code] to get the machine’s billing code list and select the billing code from the list.
– If [Use Billing Code] is set to “Disable” in “Settings (administrator)” – [Billing Code Setting] – [Administration Settings], the entered billing code is disabled and is not recorded in the job log.
– If you have started printing without specifying a billing code, a use code is recorded in the job log.
How do I specify a billing code using the printer driver in a Mac OS environment?
When printing (Mac OS):
1. Select [Billing Code].
2. Enter the main code and sub code.
How does Authentication by Single Sign-on work?
When the user authentication is used, you must enter your user name and password to print from a printer driver. The Single Sign-on function can be used when Active Directory authentication is used on both the machine and the computer. When you use this function and print from the printer driver, the print job is sent to the machine using the authentication information that you used to log in to the computer. This allows easy printing of jobs from the printer driver without the need to enter your user name or password each time you print when user authentication is enabled.
Authentication by Single Sign-on requires that Active Directory authentication be performed on the machine and your computer. This can only be used when your computer is running Windows.
Settings:
Active Directory must be enabled on the machine in advance. After enabling Active Directory, configure the settings below in the printer driver.
1. Click the [Start] button, select [Settings] → [Device] → [Devices and Printers]. (In Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012, right-click the [Start] button, select [Control Panel] → [View devices and printers] (or [Devices and Printers]). In Windows 7/Windows Server 2008, click the [Start] button, select [Devices and Printers].)
2. Right-click the machine’s printer driver icon and select [Printer Properties]. The printer properties appear.
3. Click the [Configuration] tab.
4. Set the [Single Sign-on] checkbox to a checkmark.
Authentication Option:
1. Click the [Job Handling] tab.
2. In [Authentication], select [Single Sign-on].
Notes:
– Single Sign-on authentication is also possible from the Job Handling dialog box and the User Authentication dialog box.
– When Single Sign-on is enabled, [Print and Send] cannot be used.
– If you logged in to the machine in advance before using Single Sign-on, you will have the permissions of the user account you used to log in.
– If you use Single Sign-on without logging in to the machine, the user permissions will be those of “User”. This may limit the functions that you can use.
– If Single Sign-on is used without logging in to the machine, the user name in the job log will be the name set by printer driver. If the user name is not set by printer driver, the user name in the job log will be the computer login name.
How do I use Printing by Google Cloud Print?
Google Cloud Print is a printing service that lets you print a file in a PC, mobile device, or other client via the Cloud server operated by Google LLC on a printer that is connected to Cloud server. Configure settings for connection of the machine to the Internet (proxy settings, etc.) as required for your network environment. The procedure for printing by Google Cloud Print is explained here. Before using this function, you must first create a Google account.
On the MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050, the PS3 expansion kit is required to use Google Cloud Print.
Settings on the machine:
Before using this function, configure the settings below in “Settings (administrator)”.
– If the machine’s user authentication function is enabled, turn off “Settings (administrator)” – [User Control] – [Default Settings] – [Disable Printing by Invalid User].
– If user authentication is enabled in the Sharp OSA application, allow printing by invalid users in the application.
– Configure the following settings in “Settings (administrator)”→[System Settings]→[Network Settings] so that they match the settings in Google Cloud Print:
– IP address, subnet mask, default gateway
– IP address of DNS server
– Proxy server settings
– Configure the machine settings in the Google Cloud Print settings.
Print settings:
You can print from an application that supports Google Cloud Print. Functions that can be enabled from the application are as follows:
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| 2-Sided Print | None, Book, Tablet |
| Orientation | Portrait, Landscape |
| Copies | 1-999 |
| Resolution | 600×600, 1200×1200*1 |
| Fit Page | On, Off |
| Page Select | – |
| Paper Size | A4, A3, A5, B4, B5, A3W, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Invoice, Executive, Foolscap, 8 1/2 x 13 2/5, 216 x 343, 8K, 16K |
| Paper Tray | Varies depending on the machine configuration |
| Output Tray | Centre Tray, Right Tray, Upper Tray, Middle Tray, Lower Tray |
| Print per Unit | On, Off |
| Staple*2 | On, Off |
*1 This item cannot be used in MX-M2630/M3050/M3550/M4050/M5050/M6050.
*2 Can be used when an inner finisher, finisher, or saddle stitch finisher is installed.
Important Notes:
– Google Cloud Print uses the XMPP (5222) port or HTTPS (443) port for communication. Check the settings for restriction of access from the Internet, the machine administrator password, and mDNS as needed.
– In some cases the print quality using Google Cloud Print may not be the same as the print quality using other print methods (printer driver, etc.). The content of some files may not print correctly or may not be printable.
– In some countries and regions, the machine may not be able to use some or all of the Google Cloud Print connection functions.
– In some network environments, the machine may not be able to use the Google Cloud Print connection functions, or printing may be slow or may stop before the job is completed.
– Sharp Corporation does not in any way guarantee the continuity or stability of Google Cloud Print connection functions. With the exception of instances provided for by law, Sharp Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages or loss due to the customer’s use of these functions.
How do I forward received faxes (Fax Data Forward)?
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine. Store a recipient by selecting [Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding (page 4-58)] in Setting mode.
When printing ends, the Data Notification indicator turns off.
This function is convenient in an office or work area that has two or more telephone lines and another fax machine is connected to a different line than the machine.
Important Notes:
• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.
• A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was cancelled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, that faxes received and stored in an F-code confidential memory box cannot be forwarded.
• If a PIN Code entry screen appears after tapping the [OK] key, “Hold Setting for Received Data Print” has been enabled. Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) (page 4-60)
Steps:
1. Make sure that the Data Notification indicator is blinking, and tap the [Settings] key in the home screen.
2. Tap the [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)] key.
3. Tap the [Execute] key in [Forward Received Data] to begin forwarding.
If a PIN Code entry screen appears, the “Hold Setting for Received Data Print” has been enabled. Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
How do I configure Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) settings?
To configure Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) settings, follow these steps:
Select [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)].
The following settings are available:
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Receive Settings | Set the fax reception method. Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then automatically begins fax reception.
• Auto Reception: When a call comes in, the machine rings and then automatically begins fax reception. • Manual Reception: Used when an existing extension telephone is connected to the machine. You can answer to a phone call first, and then receive a fax by manual operation. |
| Multiple Set Print | Specify whether or not two or more copies of received faxes will be printed. The number of copies can be set with the “Fax Output Settings”. |
| Staple | Specify whether or not stapling is performed. (Only when a finisher is installed) |
| Forward Received Data | When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another previously stored fax machine. |
Important Notes:
• If there is no forwarding data or if the destination is not registered, no data is forwarded.
• If “PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) (page 4-60)” is enabled, you are prompted to enter a password. Enter the correct password using numeric keys.
• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.
• A forwarded fax becomes a fax transmission job. If transmission does not take place because the transmission was cancelled or an error occurred, the fax will be held in memory until it can be printed.
• All faxes received are forwarded. Note that the received data stored in the F-code confidential memory box is not forwarded.
• For destination number registration, see “Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding (page 4-58)”.
How do I forward received data to preset destinations (Inbound Routing Settings)?
You can have received faxes automatically forwarded to a fax address, Internet fax address, e-mail address, file server address, desktop address, or network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed.
Configure all forwarding settings for received faxes in setting mode (Web version). For the procedure for accessing the setting mode (Web version), see Quick Start Guide.
The following explanation assumes that the setting mode (Web version) has been accessed with administrator rights.
Quick Set for Forwarding Tables:
In “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Administration Settings] → [Inbound Routing], tap [Enable]/[Disable] for each forwarding table that appears.
Important Notes:
• This function cannot be used for faxes received by confidential reception.
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. (“Receiving Date & Time Print” is disabled.)
• The received data is not forwarded to a hyperlink destination that is registered in the specified address.
• A direct SMTP address cannot be specified as a forwarding destination.
Prohibit Network Forwarding:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disabling of Forwarding via Network].
Steps:
1. In “Settings (Web version)”, click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Administration Settings].
2. In “Inbound Routing”, select [Enable] and click the [Submit] button.
3. Click [Sender Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] menu in the “Settings (Web version)”.
4. Enter the sender address or fax number in “Internet Fax Address” or “Fax Number” as appropriate, and click the [Add to List] button. The entered address will be added to the “Address to be Entered” list. Enter the address directly (maximum of 1500 characters) or select the address from a global address book by clicking the [Global Address Search] button. To store multiple sender addresses or fax numbers, repeat these steps.
• If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you store a forwarding table.
• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
• To delete an entered address, select the address in “Address to be Entered” and click the [Delete] button.
5. When you have finished adding addresses, click the [Submit] button.
6. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] in the “Settings (Web version)” menu and click the [Add] button.
7. Enter a “Table Name”.
8. Select the sender whose faxes will be forwarded.
• To forward all received data, select [Forward All Received Data].
• To forward only data received from specific senders, select [Forward received data from specified senders only.]. To forward all data except data from specific senders, select [Forward all received data except that from specified senders.]. Then, select the appropriate senders from the list and click the [Add] button.
When selecting senders from the “Sender Address Setting” list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key on your keyboard to select multiple senders.
9. Select the forwarding conditions.
• To always forward received data, select [Always Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward received data only on specified days.] and select the checkbox of the desired day of the week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding Time] checkbox and specify the time.
Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the [Forward Condition] tabs to access each setting.
10. Select the file format. The format can be set separately for each forwarding address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in the table).
• Images forwarded in TIFF format may not be displayed correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file format to PDF.
• If the Internet fax address is selected as a recipient, data is forwarded in TIFF regardless of the specified format.
• If a fax number is selected as a recipient, the file format is ignored.
11. Select the recipient from the address book. You can specify multiple registered addresses or telephone numbers from the address book of the machine. Up to 1,000 recipients can be registered for Recipients 1, 2, and 3 in total. When you select the recipients from the address book, up to 400 recipients can be registered for network folder, FTP/Desktop, Internet fax, and fax.
A direct SMTP address cannot be specified as a forwarding destination.
12. Enter a recipient directly and specify the recipient.
• Specify this information if necessary.
• Enter an e-mail address, an Internet fax address, a direct SMTP address, or a fax number directly and tap the [Add] key.
• When you specify an e-mail address or a fax number, you can use the global address search.
• When you specify a fax number, also specify the international correspondence mode.
• When enter the recipients directly, up to 100 recipients can be registered for e-mail address, network folder, FTP/Desktop, Internet fax, and fax.
13. Click [Submit].
14. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] in “Settings (Web version)”.
15. From the forwarding table, select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on Forward Condition].
16. From the forwarding table, select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.]. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 9. If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 9, set the forwarding permission settings.
• To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
• To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected (✓) and click [Delete].
17. Click [Submit].
User Permissions:
Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen, and from specifying which table is used. To do so, set the checkboxes for the following items to ✓:
• Disable Registration of Forward Table
• Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table
• Disabling of Forward Condition Change
Specify in [Print Style Setting] whether or not to have the machine to print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled. After the settings are completed, be sure to click the [Submit] button.
• [Always Print]: Always prints received data before forwarding the data.
• [Print at Error]: Prints received data only when an error prevents forwarding.
• [Save Only at Error]: Saves received data only when an error prevents forwarding. For the saved data, the error address can be confirmed and the data can be resent. From the [Scan] or [Fax] tab in the job status screen, tap [Check Error Box] on the action panel.
How do I save received faxes to the machine’s hard disk (Inbound Routing)?
(On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
Received faxes can be saved to the machine’s hard disk. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer.
Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the saved Internet faxes.
You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail.
Received faxes are saved in the following directory: \\MFP\faxreceive
Important Notes:
• Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data.
• The “faxreceive” folder contains files of “Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data”.
• The folder is automatically created.
• The file name for received data can be set in “File Name Setting” in “Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data” in “Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings”.
How to save received faxes to the hard disk:
1. In “Settings (administrator)”, click [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Public Folder / NAS Setting]. (Administrator rights required.)
2. Select [Allowed] in “faxreceive:Use of Storage” and click the [Submit] button.
Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk:
1. In “Settings (administrator)”, click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings] (administrator rights are required).
• Data that can be saved are received faxes and received Internet faxes. Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved.
• Depending on the setting, received faxes that cannot be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box.
How do I forward received data manually?
Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt.
This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in “Settings (administrator)”. * The factory default setting is disabled.
When data is received, an icon is shown at the top of the screen.
Steps:
1. In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] key. The received data is listed.
You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping [Check Received Data] on the action panel of Job Status screen.
2. Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap [Forward to Other Address].
• Tap the list icon to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.
• Multiple sets of received data can be selected.
• When you select a single received data only, you can tap [Check Image] on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.
• To store the sender fax number as a number for “Allow/Reject Number Setting”, tap [Register as Junk Fax] on the action panel and, in the confirmation message screen, tap the [Store] key.
• Specify a sender fax number as a number for “Allow/Reject Number Setting” by selecting, in “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings] → [Allow/Reject Number Setting].
3. Select the destination from the Address Book screen, and tap the [Start] key.
How do I save received data to the document filing folder?
(On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
You can save received faxes in the document filing folder.
This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in “Settings (administrator)”. * The factory default setting is disabled.
When data is received, an icon is shown at the top of the screen.
Steps:
1. In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] key. The received data is listed.
You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping [Check Received Data] on the action panel of Job Status screen.
2. Tap the key of the received data you wish to save, and tap [File] on the action panel.
• Tap the list icon to show a list of received data. The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.
• Multiple sets of received data can be selected.
• When you select a single received data only, you can tap [Check Image] on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.
• To store the sender fax number as a number for “Allow/Reject Number Setting”, tap [Register as Junk Fax] on the action panel and, in the confirmation message screen, tap the [Store] key.
Specify a sender fax number as a number for “Allow/Reject Number Setting” by selecting, in “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings] → [Allow/Reject Number Setting].
3. Set the file information, and tap the [Save] key.
How do I store fax operations as a program?
This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation.
For example, suppose that the same A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″) size documents are distributed to branch offices in various regions once a month where:
(1) The same documents are faxed to each branch office
(2) To save paper, two document pages are faxed as a single page
(3) Smudges on the edges of the documents are erased before transmission
When a job program is not stored:
Enter the fax number for each branch. Specify N-Up. Specify Erase. Tap the [Start] key. Scan and send the original. Considerable time is required to send the documents each month because the above settings must be selected. In addition, mistakes are occasionally made when selecting the settings.
When a job program is stored:
Call the registered program. Tap the [Start] key. Scan and send the original. When a program is stored, settings are selected with ease by simply tapping the key of the program. In addition, transmission takes place according to the stored settings so there are no chances for mistakes.
Configuration and Prohibitions:
• To configure a program: Tap [Program Registration] that appears on the action panel when you operate any mode screens.
• Prohibit registration of programs / prohibit deleting of registered programs: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] →[Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Registration/Delection of All Program Items].
Important Notes:
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following contents cannot be stored in programs: Tapping the [Speaker] key, Quick File*, File*, page move and unspecified erase during preview, Metadata Entry, Send Settings, and Own Name Select. * On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
• A program in which sub addresses and passcodes are specified as an F-code destination records all sub addresses and passcodes.
Steps to use a stored program:
1. Place the original. According to the function stored in the program, place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Tap [Call Program] on the action panel.
3. Tap the desired program key.
4. Configure additional settings as required. Some settings cannot be added depending on the contents of the called program.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. After you have scanned the last original, tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax.
How do I send two pages as a single page (N-UP)?
Reduce two original pages to the equal size and send them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent.
For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″), B5, or A5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″)), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass.
Important Notes:
• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.
• The N-Up is only available for originals with A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″), B5, or A5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″) size.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numeric values, this function cannot be used.
• This function cannot be used together with Dual Page Scan or Card Shot.
Steps:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap OK.
To cancel the N-Up setting: Tap the [N-Up] key to uncheck it.
4. Tap the [Original] key.
5. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap OK.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax.
• If you tap the [Change Setting] key on the scan confirmation screen, you can change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be changed.)
How do I send both sides of a card as a single page (Card Shot)?
Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately.
When using this function, the original must be placed on the document glass.
Important Notes:
• If the original size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure. Check the original size once more, and specify it again.
• The ratio cannot be specified and “Rotation Sending Setting” cannot be selected.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
Steps:
1. Place a card face down on the document glass.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key.
4. Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. After the settings are completed, tap OK and [Back] keys in sequence.
• Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
• To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then adjust it by tapping +/-.
• To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper based on the entered original size, set the [Fit to Send Size] checkbox to ✓.
• After selecting Card Shot, tap the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you tap the scan size key.
• To cancel the specified size settings, tap the [Reset] key.
To cancel the Card Shot settings: Tap the [Off] key.
5. Tap the [Start] key, and scan the front side.
6. Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key to scan the reverse side. Before scanning the back of the card, tap the [Change Setting] key on the touch panel to change the exposure.
7. Tap the [Read-End] key. If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size.
How do I send a large number of pages (Job Build)?
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass. Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder. When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
This function is not available for Quick On Line Sending, manual transmission, Direct TX, or transmission using the speaker.
Important Notes:
• If you are going to change all original settings, select the settings before scanning the original.
• Up to 999 pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.
• If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.
• The scan settings can be changed for each set of originals.
Steps:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line. Originals can also be placed on the document glass.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Job Build] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.
To cancel the job build setting: Tap the [Job Build] key to uncheck it.
4. Change settings as needed.
5. Tap the [Start] key to scan the first original page.
6. Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat this step until all originals have been scanned.
• If needed, tap [Change Setting] before tapping the [Start] key, and change the original scan settings and send settings for the next original. The setting changes will be applied to the next job.
• If you tap the [Preview] key, you cannot scan additional pages.
To cancel scanning: Tap the [CA] key. All settings including scanned data will be cleared.
7. Tap the [Read-End] key.
If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen appears, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.
To change the time until transmission takes place automatically: Select “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Job Auto Start Time During Scanning].
How do I send originals of different sizes (Mixed Size Original)?
This feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, B4 (8-1/2″ x 14″) size originals mixed together with A3 (11″ x 17″) size originals.
When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original.
This feature can only be used with the following combinations of original sizes:
• A3 and B4, A3 and B5, B4 and A4, and A4 and B5
• A4R and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, and B5 and A5
• 11″ x 17″ and 8-1/2″ x 14″, 11″ x 17″ and 8-1/2″ x 13″
• 11″ x 17″ and 5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″
Important Notes:
• On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, duplex scanning is not possible when the above mixed width original scanning is performed.
• When Mixed Size Original is selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
• After the original scan size has been selected, Mixed Size Original cannot be specified.
• Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.
This function is not available if [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting] is set to “AB-3” in “Settings”.
Steps:
1. Place originals in the automatic document feeder. Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far left corner of the document feeder tray.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Mixed Size Orig.] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. For mixed size originals, set “Original” to “Auto”.
To cancel the mixed size original setting: Tap the [Mixed Size Orig.] key to uncheck it.
4. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I send an original as two separate pages (Dual Page Scan)?
The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound document as separate pages.
When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
Important Notes:
• This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto].
• Note that “Centre Erase” and “Edge+Centre Erase” cannot be used.
Steps:
1. Place the original on the document glass. Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Scan] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the Dual Page Scan setting: Tap the [Dual Page Scan] key to clear the checkmark.
4. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
How do I split a pamphlet by page and transmit the pages successively (Book Divide)?
The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order.
When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent.
This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto].
The document glass is not available for this function.
Steps:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key.
4. Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original. Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct. After the settings are completed, tap OK and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the Book Divide setting: Tap the [Off] key.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I erase peripheral shadows on the image (Erase)?
This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.
Erase Modes: Edge Erase, Centre Erase, Edge + Centre Erase, Side Erase.
Important Notes:
If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.
For example, if you set an erase width of 10 mm (1/2″) and reduce the image to 70% before transmission, the erase width will be reduced to 7 mm (3/8″).
To change the default erase width setting: Select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment]. Specify a value from 0 mm (0″) to 20 mm (1″) in increments of 1 mm (1/8″) for both edge erase and centre erase. The setting changed here will apply to [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment] in “Settings”.
Steps:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key.
4. Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. Check that the tapped checkbox is set to ✓. If the [Specify Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] checkboxes are set to ✓. If the [Specify Frame+Centre] key is tapped, all the checkboxes are set to ✓.
Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up, Down, Left, and Right on the front side to scan a 2-sided original.
• If the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox is set to ✓, the edge in the position opposite to the erased edge on the front side will be erased.
• If the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox is set to (blank), the edge in the same position as on the front side will be erased.
5. Specify the erase width. After the settings are completed, tap OK and [Back] keys in sequence.
• Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys.
• To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with +/-.
To cancel the erase setting: Tap the [Clear] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key.
• Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I send a thin original (Slow Scan Mode)?
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding.
When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible.
Steps:
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Adjust the original guides slowly. If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.
To cancel the slow scan mode setting: Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to uncheck it.
4. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I check the number of scanned original sheets before transmission (Original Count)?
Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission.
Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages.
For example, when a 2-sided original is transmitted, the number “1” will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitted, not “2” to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page.
Steps:
1. Place originals in the automatic document feeder.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Original Count] key. A checkmark appears on the icon.
To cancel the original count setting: Tap the [Original Count] key to uncheck it.
4. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
5. When scanning is completed, check the number of original sheets. The number that is displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number “1” will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned, not “2” to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page.
6. Tap the [OK] key to start transmission.
If this function is combined with [Job Build], the count result is displayed after the [Read-End] key has been tapped.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets: Tap the [Cancel] key and then tap the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the document feeder tray again and tap the [Start] key to re-scan.
How do I stamp scanned originals (Verification Stamp)?
This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned.
Important Notes:
• To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.
• When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
• If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.
• When the “O” mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge.
Steps:
1. Place originals in the automatic document feeder.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or [Others] key, and tap the [Verif. Stamp] key. The appropriate icon or checkbox is selected. If you tap the [Others] key, tap the [Back] key after the settings have been completed.
To cancel the verification stamp setting: Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or the [Others] key, and tap [Verif. Stamp] to clear the checkmark.
4. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
When you use the automatic document feeder to scan an original, you can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I call a fax machine and initiate reception (Polling)?
When you connect to another machine and receive a document from it, this is called “Polling”.
The document reception from another machine is called “Polling Reception”.
You can enter multiple destination numbers. When you enter multiple destination numbers, the document is received by polling in the sequence you have entered the destination numbers.
Document reception by polling from multiple machines is called “Serial Polling”.
Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service.
Important Notes:
• Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function.
• The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
• The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.
• If necessary, this function can be combined with the timer transmission to perform the polling reception at any time such as at night or when you are not present. (Only one timer polling reception can be set.)
Steps:
1. Enter the destination fax number.
• Multiple fax numbers can be entered (maximum of 500).
• Polling will take place in the order that the multiple fax numbers were entered. Document reception by polling from multiple machines is called “Serial Polling”.
• To enter multiple fax numbers, tap [+] after entering a fax number and enter the next fax number.
• In this procedure, one-touch keys that have a sub-address and passcode cannot be used.
• A one-touch key in which an address other than fax number is stored cannot be used.
2. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the Polling setting: Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark.
3. Tap the [Start] key to initiate fax reception. Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.
How do I initiate polling reception manually?
Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service.
Important Notes:
• Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function.
• This function cannot be used to poll multiple machines (serial polling).
• The function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
The receiving machine bears the expense (phone charges) of the polling reception.
Steps:
1. Tap the [Speaker] key. You will hear the dial tone through the machine’s speaker.
2. Enter the destination fax number. One-touch key for a contact or group in which multiple destinations are stored, and one-touch key for which an address other than fax number is stored cannot be used. After tapping the [Speaker] key, you can tap the [Speaker Volume] key to adjust the volume of the speaker.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key to receive originals (data). A checkmark appears on the icon.
To cancel the Polling setting: Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark.
How do I add sender information to faxes (Fax Own Number Sending)?
Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender fax number or destination name, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of each fax page you transmit.
| Setting | Description |
|---|---|
| Outside scanned image (factory default setting) | The transmitted image length will be length of sender information + length of original image. When the fax is printed by the receiving machine, it may be reduced or divided onto two pages. |
| Load | The sender information is printed inside the original image, and thus the transmitted image length is the length of the original. Note that the sender information will overlap part of the original image (the overlapped part of the original image will not appear). |
Example of the sender information printed:
(1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission.
(2) Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine.
(3) Sender fax number or destination name (one-touch key name)
(4) Page numbers: Page number/total pages
If destination name is set to be attached and the destination is not specified using a one-touch key, this information is not added to the fax and not printed.
Configuration Options:
• To set the date and time: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Clock Adjust].
• To store a sender name and sender fax number: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Own Name and Destination Set] → [Own Number and Name Set] → [Sender Data Registration]. When you use the Own Number Setting, always configure this information.
• To add the number of pages to be transmitted: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Send Settings] → [Printing Page Number at Receiver]. Page numbers appear in the format “page number/total pages”. Only the page number is printed when “Manual Transmission” or “Quick On Line Sending” is used.
• To select a sender fax number or destination: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Send Settings] → [Sender Destination Name Switch].
• Change the sender information address name to match the sender number: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Send Settings] → [Sender Destination Name Switch].
• Set the location where the sender information will be printed on the fax page: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Send Settings] → [Date/Own Number Print Position Setting]. To have the information printed outside the transmitted document image, tap the [Outside the Original Image] key. To have the information printed inside the document image, tap the [Inside the Original Image] key.
• Default Own Number Sending: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Send Settings] → [Default Own Number Sending]. You can include the date and your sender information (sender name and address) at the top of the page when the receiving machine prints an image that you send.
How do I temporarily change the sender information (Own Name Select)?
You can temporarily change sender information to be used in the own number sending by selecting from data stored separately.
The function is released when the transmission with the changed sender information ends.
Configuration Options:
• To store the sender information to be used for Own Name Select function: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Own Name and Destination Set] → [Own Number and Name Set] → [Registration of Own Name Select].
• Sender Name: Enter the sender name. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered for the sender name. After entering a sender name, tap the [Store] key. The lowest unused registration number from 01 to 18 will be automatically assigned to the sender name. This number cannot be changed.
• Sender Name List: Displays a list of stored sender names. When you select a sender name, it is deleted.
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Own Name Select] key.
4. Tap the sender information key to specify the sender information. After the settings are completed, tap OK and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the sender information setting: Tap the [Clear] key.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.
• When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I specify the time for communication (Timer Transmission)?
Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time.
This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low. A timer setting can also be specified for polling reception to receive a fax when you are not present.
Important Notes:
• When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch “|”. Transmission will not take place if the status is ” ” at the specified time.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not possible to leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmission.
• Up to 100 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• This function cannot be used in direct transmission mode or when the speaker is used to dial.
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer operation will begin after that transmission is finished.
• Only one timer polling operation can be stored at once. To receive data from multiple destinations by polling, specify Timer for serial polling.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, other functions, etc.) are automatically cleared after the transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function is used, the scanned original and settings are stored in the built-in hard drive.) * On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
• If a job scheduled for timer transmission is given priority on the job status screen, the timer will be cancelled. The transmission will begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• Other operations can be performed after a timer transmission is set up.
• A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] key.
4. Tap the [On] key.
5. Specify the date.
6. Specify the time (hour and minute) in 24-hour format. After the settings are completed, tap OK and [Back] keys in sequence.
• Tap the areas displaying the hour and minute respectively, and enter the values using the numeric keys.
• It is convenient to use +/- to finely adjust the time.
• The setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CA] key to cancel the operation. Correct the time in setting mode and then perform the timer transmission procedure.
To cancel the Timer Transmission settings: Tap the [Off] key.
To set the date and time of the machine: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Clock Adjust]. If [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] has been enabled, the date and time cannot be modified. In this case, select [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” and select [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] to disable the [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] setting.
7. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.
How do I change the print settings for the transaction report?
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when a transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed.
The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of destination, time required, number of pages, result, etc.).
Important Notes:
• Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in “Settings”; however, you can temporarily select different conditions for a transmission.
• For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
To set the printing conditions of transaction report: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Transaction Report Print Select Setting].
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Enter the destination fax number.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Transaction Report] key.
4. Tap the key of the print settings. After the settings are completed, tap OK and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the transaction report setting: Tap the [Do not Print] key.
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
•”Always Print”: A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
•”Print at Error”: A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
•”Do not Print”: Do not print a transaction report.
• Set the [Print Original Image] checkbox to ✓ to include the first page of the transmitted original in the transaction report.
• Even if the [Print Original Image] checkbox is ✓, the original cannot be printed when speaker dialling, manual transmission, direct transmission, polling reception, or F-code transmission is used.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.
• When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
Original image in transaction report:
When [Print Original Image] is enabled, the first page of the transmitted original is printed on the same sheet as the transaction report. The original image is reduced to allow it to fit on the sheet. If the vertical scanning length (X direction) of the original is longer than 432 mm (17-1/64″), the part that exceeds 432 mm (17-1/64″) may be cut off.
How do I send a fax when another machine polls my machine (Polling Memory)?
Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called “Polling Memory”. Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the other machine must be scanned into a polling memory box.
This function can only be used when the other machine is Super G3 or G3 compatible and has a polling function.
How do I restrict polling access (Polling Security Setting)?
The following explains “Polling Security Setting”, a feature restricting other machines that can use polling memory. When a machine requests fax transmission, you can only allow the machine to use polling memory if its programmed sender fax number matches a fax number stored in your machine as a polling passcode number. This function is called “Polling Security Setting”.
To use this function, first store polling passcode numbers (the sender fax numbers programmed in the other machines) in settings mode of the machine, and then enable the polling security setting.
The polling security setting can be enabled for up to 10 other machines.
To set the polling security: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Polling Setting] → [Set Fax Polling Security], [Add New], [Passcode Number Key List]. Note that these settings do not apply to F-code polling memory.
How do I scan a document into polling memory?
Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box).
Important Notes:
• If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous document. In this case, the number of polling times will be the number set for the newly scanned document.
• Disables all types of memory box registration. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Registration of Memory Box]. Configure the setting for each of the following items: Polling Memory, Confidential, Relay Broadcast (Direct Entry), Relay Broadcast (Address Book)
• You cannot set the Program, Timer, Transaction Report, Polling, and Document Filing*. * On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Select settings for the original to be scanned and other functions.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key.
4. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
5. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list.
6. Tap [Change Number of Times] on the action panel.
7. Tap the [Once] key or [Unlimited] key to specify the number of times. To repeat transmitting an original, tap the [Unlimited] key. After the settings are completed, tap OK and X.
8. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• A preview of the image will appear in the touch panel when the original is scanned.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
How do I check the document in the public box for memory polling?
You can check the document stored in the machine’s memory box (public box) for memory polling.
Steps:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key.
2. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
3. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. When a document is not stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key is greyed out.
4. Tap [Check Image] on the action panel to check the document. To print the document, tap [Print] on the action panel.
How do I delete a document from the public box?
Delete a document from the memory box (public box) when it is no longer required.
Steps:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key.
2. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
3. Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list.
4. Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel. If you tap [Check Image] on the action panel, you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased.
5. Tap the [Yes] key.
• The document is deleted and you return to the screen of step 2.
• If you tap [Check Image] on the action panel, you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased.
To cancel the document deletion: Tap the [No] key.
What is F-Code Communication?
This function allows the machine to communicate with other machines that also support F-code.
It enables exchange of confidential documents (confidential communication), retrieval (polling) and distribution (polling memory) of information, distribution of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) with other machines that support F-code communication. An F-code* is specified in each communication, enabling a higher level of security.
* F-code is a communication function based on the G3 standard of the ITU-T.
The ITU-T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards. It is a department of the International Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services.
How do F-codes work?
A fax that is transmitted with an F-code is received in the memory box of F-code communication in the receiving machine specified by the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If the F-code sent by the transmitting machine does not match the F-code in the receiving machine, reception will not take place.
The products of other manufacturers may use different terms for “Sub Address” and “Passcode”. If you need to contact the operator of another machine regarding sub-addresses and passcodes, refer to the terms used by the ITU-T in the table below.
| The machine | ITU-T | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| F-code polling memory box | F-code confidential box | F-code relay broadcasting function | |
| Sub Address | SEP | SUB | SUB |
| Passcode | PWD | SID | SID |
An F-code consists of a sub-address and passcode, and cannot be longer than 20 digits.
How do I create memory boxes in the machine for F-Code communication?
Before the F-code communication function can be used, special memory boxes must be created in “Settings”.
Set the box name and F-code (sub-address and passcode) in each memory box, and store them.
After you have created a memory box, notify the other party of F-code communication of the sub-address and passcode of the box.
Memory Box Contents:
• Memory Box Name
• Sub Address
• Passcode
• Recipient (only for F-code relay broadcast transmission)
• Print PIN (only for F-code confidential reception)
To create F-code memory boxes: Create in “Settings” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [F-Code Memory Box].
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in your machine.
• F-code confidential reception
• F-code polling memory
• F-code relay broadcast transmission
To use the following F-code communication functions, F-code memory boxes must be created in the other machine.
• F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
• F-code polling reception
• F-code relay request transmission
What is F-Code Dialling?
When performing an F-code operation, the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is appended to the fax number that is dialled. Check the F-code (sub-address and passcode) stored in the memory box in the other machine before you perform an F-code transmission. It is convenient to store an F-code (sub-address and passcode) together with the fax number in a one-touch key or group key.
To use the following F-code communication functions, your machine must dial the other machine.
• F-CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION
• F-code polling reception
• F-code relay request transmission
To use the following F-code communication functions, the other machine must dial your machine.
• F-code confidential reception
• F-code polling memory
• F-code relay broadcast transmission
If the destination machine does not have a passcode configured in the F-code, do not enter a passcode when dialling that machine.
Communication using the F-code (sub-address and passcode) is not available when dialling using a speaker or manual transmission.
To store and edit one-touch keys and group keys: Select [Address Book] in “Settings”.
How do I perform F-Code Confidential Transmission?
By sending a fax to an F-code memory box (confidential) stored in the receiving machine (your machine or the other machine), the sender can direct the transmission specifically to the user of the box.
This is convenient for sending sensitive documents that you do not wish people other than the recipient to see, or when the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments.
To print an F-code confidential fax, the PIN Code must be entered.
The F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box to be used should be verified by the sender and the recipient before the fax is sent.
To create F-code memory boxes: Create in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [F-Code Memory Box].
How do I send a confidential transmission using F-Codes?
Send a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F-code (sub-address and passcode).
If necessary, the F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. It is convenient to store this function in a program.
The F-code confidential transmission cannot be registered as a “Favorite” item.
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Specify the destination.
(1)Tap the [Direct Entry] key.
(2)Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys.
(3)Tap the [Sub Address] key. Symbol “/” is entered.
(4)Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys.
(5)Tap the [Passcode] key. Symbol “/” is entered.
(6)Enter the passcode using the numeric keys.
• If the sub-address and passcode are already registered, you can select a one-touch key as well.
• If the passcode is omitted for the memory box of destination machine, you can skip Steps (4) and (5).
3. Tap the [Start] key. Scanning of the original starts.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I check faxes received by F-Code confidential reception?
When an F-code confidential fax received, the fax is stored in the memory box specified by the F-code. To check received faxes, enter the PIN Code.
Important Notes:
• Confidential faxes are automatically given priority in the print job queue.
• The fax is automatically cleared from the memory box after being printed.
To print transaction report automatically when an F-code confidential fax is received: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Transaction Report Print Select Setting] → [Confidential Reception].
If you forget the PIN Code: There is no way to use the machine to check a PIN Code that has been specified. Exercise care not to forget the PIN Code. Should you forget or need to verify the PIN Code, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
Steps:
1. The machine rings and the fax is received. A beep sounds when reception ends.
2. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key.
3. From the [Confidential] tab.
4. Tap the key of the memory box containing the confidential fax. “” appears in the keys of memory boxes that have received faxes. The keys of memory boxes that have not received faxes are greyed out and cannot be tapped.
5. Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys. Take care to enter the correct PIN Code. If you make a mistake, a message will appear and you will return to the entry screen. You can tap the [Cancel] key to return to step 4.
6. Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. Displays the received data image. To print the document, tap [Print] on the action panel.
How do I perform polling reception using F-Codes?
This function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate reception of a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in the other machine. During the polling operation, your machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) configured in the other machine. Otherwise, polling reception will not take place.
Important Notes:
• Verify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) of the memory box in the other machine before you perform F-code polling reception.
• The receiving machine bears the telephone charges of the transmission.
• If necessary, use the F-code polling reception in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. Only one polling reception with a timer setting can be stored at a time.
• Polling multiple machines (serial polling) is not possible.
• Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the F-code for the polling reception function.
• The polling reception using the F-code cannot be registered as a “Favorite” item.
Steps:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the Polling setting: Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark.
2. Specify the destination.
(1)Enter the destination line number using the numeric keys.
(2)Tap the [Sub Address] key. Symbol “/” is entered.
(3)Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys.
(4)Tap the [Passcode] key. Symbol “/” is entered.
(5)Enter the passcode using the numeric keys.
• If the sub-address and passcode are already registered, you can select a one-touch key as well.
• If the passcode is omitted for the memory box of destination machine, you can skip Steps (4) and (5).
3. Tap the [Start] key. Your machine will call the other machine and initiate reception of the fax.
How do I scan a document into a memory box for F-Code polling transmission?
When your machine receives a transmission request from another machine, this function sends a fax stored in an F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine to that machine. The other machine must correctly specify the F-code (sub-address and passcode) configured in your machine. Otherwise, transmission will not take place.
An original to be sent to the other machine using F-code polling communication must be previously scanned into an F-code memory box (polling memory) in your machine.
Important Notes:
• If other documents have already been stored in the memory box, the document is added to the previously stored documents.
• By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically.
To create F-code memory boxes: Create in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [F-Code Memory Box].
You cannot set the Program, Timer, Transaction Report, Polling, and Document Filing*. * On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Select settings for the original to be scanned and other functions.
3. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key.
4. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
5. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box.
6. Tap [Change Number of Times] on the action panel, and set the polling times. To erase the original after its transmission, tap the [Once] key. To repeat transmitting an original, tap the [Unlimited] key. Change the settings as necessary. After the settings are completed, tap OK and [Back] keys.
7. Tap the [Start] key. Scanning of the original starts.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time.
• When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I check the document in the F-Code memory polling box?
You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box.
A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted. By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically.
Steps:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key.
2. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
3. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box.
4. Tap [Check Image] on the action panel. To print the document, tap the [Print] key.
How do I delete a document stored for F-Code polling transmission?
Delete the document stored in an F-code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document.
No original can be deleted from the memory box during communication.
Steps:
1. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key.
2. Tap the [Polling Memory] tab.
3. Tap the folder of the F-code memory polling box.
4. Tap [Empty out Box] on the action panel. If you tap [Check Image] on the action panel, you can check the image on the touch panel before it is erased.
5. Tap the [Yes] key. The document is deleted, and you return to Step 2.
To cancel the document deletion: Tap the [No] key.
How do I perform relay request transmission using F-Codes?
This function sends a fax to an F-code relay broadcast memory box in another machine and have that machine relay the fax to multiple destination machines.
When the destination machines are far from your machine, sending the fax to a relay machine that is close to the destination machines can help reduce telephone charges. A relay request transmission can be used in combination with the timer transmission function to further reduce cost.
Important Notes:
• F-code (sub-address and passcode) and the destination in the F-code relay broadcast memory box of the recipient machine should be verified by the recipient in advance.
• Before using this function, program the destination machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box in the relay machine.
• It is not necessary for the destination machines to support F-code communication.
• Your machine (the machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission) only bears the cost of sending the fax to the relay machine. The relay machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the destination machines.
• If necessary, this function can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer transmission. It is convenient to store this function in a program.
When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. (“Receiving Date & Time Print” is disabled.)
• To create F-code memory boxes: Create in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [F-Code Memory Box].
• Prohibit Broadcast: Create in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Disable Fax Broadcasting].
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Specify the destination.
If the sub-address and passcode are stored in the one-touch key, it is not necessary to take steps 3 to 6. Go to step 7.
3. Tap the [Sub Address] key. Enter “/”.
4. Enter the sub-address using the numeric keys.
5. Tap the [Passcode] key. Enter “/”.
6. Enter the passcode using the numeric keys. If a passcode has been omitted in the memory box of the destination machine, it is not necessary to take steps 5 and 6.
7. Tap the [Start] key. Scanning begins.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. When the relay machine receives the fax, it will automatically transfer the fax to the destination machines programmed in the memory box.
When you use the automatic document feeder to scan an original, you can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending a fax.
How do I use relay broadcast transmission using F-Codes?
When your machine receives an F-code relay request transmission, the fax is received and stored in an F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machine.
Your machine then relays the fax to each of the destination machines programmed in the memory box. Transmission to the destination machine takes place automatically.
Important Notes:
• Prior to carrying out the operation, inform the requesting party, who you will communicate with using F-code relay request transmission, of the sub-address and passcode of the F-code relay broadcast memory box in your machine.
• Program the destination machines in the F-code relay broadcast memory box when you create the box in your machine.
• It is not necessary for the destination machines to support F-code communication.
• The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the cost of sending the fax to your machine (the relay machine). Your machine bears the cost of sending the fax to each of the destination machines.
• If both direct SMTP and other sending methods are added to the forwarding destinations, transmission will not take place.
When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. (“Receiving Date & Time Print” is disabled.)
How do I manage F-Code Memory Boxes?
Create in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [F-Code Memory Box].
Storing a memory box:
When you tap the [Add New] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 100 F-code memory boxes can be stored for all functions (polling memory, confidential, and relay broadcast).
Editing and deleting a memory box:
When you select a memory box from the list, the edit screen appears for the box.
Tap the [Delete] key to delete the memory box.
Settings:
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Items common to all types | |
| Box Type | Select the type of box.
• Polling Memory: Store a memory box for F-code polling memory. The sub-address and passcode that you store in the memory box are necessary for the other machine to poll the machine (request transmission) using F-code communication. • Confidential: Store a memory box for F-code confidential communication. In addition, store a “Print PIN” in the memory box to print faxes received by confidential reception. The sub-address and passcode that you program in the memory box are necessary for the other machine to send a fax to the machine by F-code confidential transmission. • Relay Broadcast: Store a memory box for F-code relay broadcast transmission. Up to 30 destinations can be stored to forward the received data. The sub-address and passcode that you program in the memory box are necessary for the other machine to send a fax to the machine by F-code relay request transmission. |
| Memory Box Name | Enter a name (maximum of 18 characters) for the memory box. |
| Sub Address / Passcode | Enter a sub-address and passcode. A maximum of 20 digits can be entered for each sub-address and passcode. Separate a sub-address and passcode by a slash (“/”). |
| Items displayed when storing a confidential memory box | |
| Print PIN | Set a “Print PIN” for confidential reception. Enter a 4-digit number. |
| Items displayed when storing a relay broadcast memory box | |
| Forward Destination | Select the end recipients of the relay broadcast.
• Select the recipients from the address book. • Select Forward Address from the Address: Select an address from the address book. • Destination Entry: An address that is not stored in the address book can be directly entered. Enter the address in the same way as when storing an address for a mode. |
Important Notes:
• When programming a new memory box, a sub-address that is already programmed for another box cannot be used. However, the same passcode can be used for more than one memory box.
• [*] and [#] cannot be used in a sub-address.
• A passcode can be omitted.
• Do not forget the Print PIN. In the event that you forget the Print PIN or need to verify the Print PIN, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
How do I connect an extension telephone?
You can connect an existing telephone to the machine.
The telephone can be used for voice calls and to start fax reception on the machine. Connect the extension telephone as shown below. After connecting an extension telephone, configure the “External Telephone Setting” in setting mode (administrator).
Enable the “Tel/Fax Auto Change” function. This is useful as the telephone or fax operation is selected automatically according to the calling.
Important Notes:
• You cannot send a fax from your telephone.
• You can connect a telephone with a modular cable plug to your machine. Also, use the two-wire cable for telephone connection. If another type of cable is used, the telephone may not operate normally.
• If the plug on the telephone line cord does not fit into the socket on your extension phone, contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.
How do I receive a fax after answering a call on the extension telephone (Remote Reception)?
Follow the steps below if you need to start fax reception after answering a call and speaking on the extension telephone.
Dial [5], [*] and [*] buttons of the external telephone.
If you are using a pulse line, set the extension to send tone signals.
If the extension phone is still lifted when fax transmission ends, an alarm signal will sound and a message will appear in the touch panel. The alarm and message will stop when the extension phone is replaced.
Configuration Options:
• To receive a fax after answering a call on the extension telephone: Set “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)] → [Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings] to [Manual Reception].
• To change the number to receive faxes: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Remote Reception Number Setting]. Set a value from 00 to 99.
Steps:
1. While the machine is ringing, pick up the receiver to speak.
2. Signal the machine to start fax reception. Press 5 * * from the extension telephone.
3. Replace the receiver. The machine beeps when reception ends.
How do I make and receive phone calls using an extension phone?
You can make and receive calls like normal on your extension phone. A phone call can also be made by dialling on the machine.
How do I check the communication status of fax jobs?
When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To confirm the fax job status, tap the mode display and select the fax.
When you wish to stop or delete jobs or to perform priority processing, read the following items:
• STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED (page 1-133)
• PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB (page 1-134)
• CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS (page 1-136)
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 1-137)
Fax jobs include reception, timer transmission, and data forwarding as well as usual transmission.
How are completed fax transmission/reception jobs displayed?
A usual transmission job moves to the job list when transmission is completed. Then the status field displays “Send OK”.
However, received faxes, timer transmission faxes, retries, fax forwarding, and other fax jobs are displayed in the job status screen as follows:
Fax reception jobs:
When a fax is being received, the status field displays “Receiving” in the job queue list.
When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays “In Memory”. After the fax is printed, the status changes to “Received”.
Timer transmission jobs:
A timer transmission job appears at the end of the job queue list until the specified time is reached.
Transmission begins at the specified time. When transmission is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays “Send OK”.
Retry jobs:
A retry job appears at the end of the job queue list.
Transmission of the retry job starts according to the [Recall in Case of Line Busy] setting in “Settings”. When the transmission is completed, the retry job moves to the completed job list and the status changes to “Send OK”.
Reception jobs when the inbound routing settings are enabled:
When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting.
Received data is not printed: When a data is being received, “Receiving” appears in the job queue list. When the reception is completed, the status changes to “Waiting”.
Received fax is printed: When reception is completed, the status field displays “In Memory” in the completed job list. After the fax is printed, the status changes to “Received”. Then a job is added for which the status field displays “Waiting” in the job queue list. When forwarding the received fax is completed, the field changes to “Forward OK”.
How do I print image sending activity reports?
You can have the machine print a log of recent image sending activity (date, name of other party, time required, result, etc.). The Image Sending Activity Report contains useful information such as the types of errors that occurred.
The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report.
You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified time (once a day only).
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
To configure the image sending activity report: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Activity Report Print Select Setting].
What information appears in the result column of transaction and activity reports?
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
Examples of messages that are printed in the result column:
| Print Page | Description |
|---|---|
| Yes | The transaction was completed normally. |
| G3 | Communication took place in G3 mode. |
| ECM | Communication took place in G3 ECM mode. |
| SG3 | Communication took place in Super G3 mode. |
| Forward | The received data was forwarded. |
| No Response | No response from the receiving party. |
| Busy | Transmission was not possible because the other party was already using the line. |
| No | The transmission was cancelled while in progress. |
| MEMORY OVER | The memory became full during quick on-line transmission. |
| FULL | The memory became full during reception. |
| LENGTH OVER | The transmitted fax was over 59″ (1.5 m) long and therefore could not be received. |
| ORIGINAL ERROR | Direct transmission or manual transmission was not successful because a misfeed occurred. |
| PASS# NG | The connection was broken because the polling passcode was not correct. |
| NO RX POLL | The machine that was polled does not have a polling function. |
| RX POLL FAIL | The other machine refused the polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when polled because no data was in memory. |
| NO F-CODE POLL | The other machine refused an F-code polling operation, or your machine broke the connection when polled because no data was in its F-code memory polling box. |
| RX POLL# NG | The connection was broken because the sub-address for F-code polling memory was not valid. |
| F POLL PASS# NG | The connection was broken because the passcode for F-code polling memory was not valid. |
| BOX NO. NG | Your machine broke the connection because the specified sub-address for an F-code memory box does not exist. |
| F PASS# NG | Your machine broke the connection because the other machine sent an incorrect passcode for F-code communication. |
| RX NO F-CODE POLL | F-code polling was attempted, however, the other machine did not have an F-code polling memory box. |
| NO F FUNC | F-code communication was attempted, however, the other machine does not support F-code communication. |
| NO F-CODE | F-code communication was refused by the other machine because of an incorrect sub-address or other reason. |
| M. BOX: [xxxxxx] ****** | Data was received and stored in a confidential or relay broadcast memory box, or data was sent from a memory polling box. The name of the memory box appears in [xxxxxx], and the type of F-code operation (relay request reception, polling memory transmission, or confidential reception) appears in ******. |
| FAIL xx (xxxx) | The transaction failed due to a communication error. First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99. Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians. |
| Rejected | A fax was sent from a party from which reception is blocked. |
How do I enter the body text for a Scanner/Internet Fax?
After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
• To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key.
How do I clear all entered text in the body of a Scanner/Internet Fax message?
Tap the [Clear All] key. When this key is tapped, the entire body of the message is erased immediately, not just the selected line.
What are the character limits and editing options for the body text in Scanner/Internet Fax?
• Enter up to 1800 characters. (A line break counts as one character.)
• To edit the selected line, tap the [Edit] key. The soft keyboard will appear with the selected text entered.
How do I send a fax in Internet Fax mode?
This procedure can also be used to perform a direct transmission by Direct SMTP.
• If the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned, a message will appear and scanning will stop.
• When all originals have been scanned, the message “Job stored.” will be displayed together with a job control number. If necessary, use this number to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. If the job is a broadcast transmission, this number will also appear in the key of the job in the job status screen. For this reason, it is advisable to make a note of the number so that you can check the result easily.
• Mail Footer Registration: The specified text is automatically appended to the end of the body text of e-mail. This is convenient when you wish to append pre-set text such as a corporate policy. To enter the text to append, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Administration Settings] → [Mail Footer Registration] in “Settings (administrator)”. (Administrator rights are required.) Enter up to 900 characters. (The appended text is not included in the maximum number of characters that can be entered in the e-mail body.) To specify whether or not to append text, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Administration Settings] → [Add a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message Body] in “Settings”.
If a default address has been configured using “Settings” →[System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Address] → [Default Address Setting], the mode cannot be changed, or the destination cannot be changed or added. To switch to Internet fax mode, tap the [Cancel] key in the touch panel and then perform the transmission procedure.
1. Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
Do not place any objects under the original size detector. Closing the automatic document feeder with an object underneath may damage the original size detector plate and prevent correct detection of the document size.
• Place the original of the A5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″) size in the portrait orientation. If placed in landscape orientation, an incorrect size will be detected. For an A5R (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″R) size original, enter the original size manually.
• Rotation sending: A4, B5R and A5R (8-1/2″ x 11″ and 5-1/2″ x 8-1/2R”) originals are rotated 90 degrees, and respectively sent in the A4R, B5 and A5 (8-1/2″ x 11″R and 5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″) orientations. (Rotation sending is not available for originals with A4R, B5, or A5 (8-1/2″ x 11″R or 5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″) size.)
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of Internet Fax mode.
3. Specify the destination.
The icon of an envelope appears in one-touch keys in which Internet fax addresses are stored.
To change [Subject], [File Name], or [Body Text], tap the [Others] key and tap the [Send Settings] key.
4. Tap the [Original] key.
• Set the density, resolution, and format in [System Settings]→[Image Send Settings]→[Internet Fax Settings]→[Default Settings] in “Settings (administrator)”.
• Tapping the [Others] key allows you to configure various functions, for example, collectively sending two original pages as one sheet or original pages with different sizes.
5. Tap the appropriate orientation key.
After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If the original is placed on the document glass, the [Read-End] key appears in the touch panel. If the original is only one page, proceed to step 8. To scan more pages, go to the next step.
• If the original was inserted in the document feeder tray, a beep will sound when scanning is completed and transmission will take place.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image.
7. If the original was placed on the document glass, replace it with the next original and tap the [Start] key.
Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
8. Tap the [Read-End] key.
A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed.
Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original.
• If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends and the transmission is reserved.
• Tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size for each original page scanned. However, when “N-Up” or “Card Shot” is selected in Others, only change the exposure when scanning an even-numbered original page.
How do I change the subject, file name, and body text at the time of Internet fax transmission?
Change the subject, file name, and body text when performing an Internet fax transmission. If necessary, directly enter the text. Configure a file name, and other settings for an Internet fax using the Send Settings of the other functions.
• If the subject and file name are not changed, the settings in the Setting mode (Web version) are used.
• To configure the candidates for the subject, file name, and body text, click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] in “Settings (administrator)”.
• To enter text, see “NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS” in the “BEFORE USING THE MACHINE”.
1. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of Internet Fax mode.
2. Tap the [Send Settings] key.
3. To change the subject, tap the [Subject] entry box.
4. Tap a pre-set text key for the subject. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
To cancel the selection of the subject: Tap the [Clear] key.
If you wish to directly enter the text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to open the soft keyboard. Enter the subject and tap the [OK] key.
5. To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box.
6. Tap a pre-set text key for the file name. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
• To store the pre-set text for the file name, select [System Settings] in “Settings” → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [File Name Settings].
• If you wish to directly enter the text, tap the [Direct Entry] key to display the soft keyboard. Enter the file name and tap the [OK] key.
To cancel the selection of the file name: Tap the [Clear] key.
7. To change the body text, tap the [Body Text] entry box.
8. Enter the body text.
After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
• To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-Set Select] key.
• To directly enter the body text, tap the [Edit] key.
To clear all entered text: Tap the [Clear All] key. When this key is tapped, the entire body of the message is erased immediately, not just the selected line.
• Enter up to 1800 characters. (A line break counts as one character.)
• Use arrow keys to select on a line basis.
• To edit the selected line, tap the [Edit] key. The soft keyboard will appear with the selected text entered.
How do I send the same image to multiple destinations (broadcast transmission)?
Send the same scanned image to multiple scan, Internet fax, and fax mode destinations in a single operation. One operation allows you to send data to up to 500 destinations, including the reserved send jobs. (For example, if broadcast transmission jobs with 450 destinations are already reserved, data can be broadcasted to up to 50 destinations.)
It is convenient to store destinations you frequently use for broadcast transmission as contacts or groups. A maximum of 500 destinations can be stored in one contact. For broadcast transmission, the contact or group key can be simply tapped to retrieve multiple fax numbers. You can also send faxes with the one-touch key by setting the [Set as Default used] checkbox to checked when addresses are registered. If you wish to temporarily remove a destination from the stored addresses, open the detail confirmation screen and remove the destination in the screen.
• When the checkbox of “Settings (administrator)” -[System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Address Book Default Selection] → [Apply Addresses of Sending Modes Only] is set to checked (factory default setting), the image is only sent to those destinations among the destinations that are set to [Set as Default used] which are for the currently selected mode. If the checkmark is removed, the image can also be sent to destinations of other modes.
• When broadcast transmission includes Internet Fax addresses, the document is sent in black and white to all addresses.
• When Internet Fax mode addresses are included in broadcast transmission addresses, the image data is converted and sent as image data for Internet Fax. Even when scanned in colour, the image data is converted to Internet Fax black and white binary and sent to addresses such as e-mail addresses.
• If you wish to send the same image as fax to all destinations in normal mode, tap [Send Same Image as Fax Address] on the action panel. This cannot be selected when Internet Fax is included in the destinations.
• When Scan to E-mail and Internet Fax destinations are included, the send width for Scan to E-mail and Internet Fax will be the same as the send width for fax.
• Broadcast transmission is not possible to both direct SMTP addresses and other types of addresses.
A transmission is performed, ignoring hyperlinks with Scan to FTP and Scan to Network Folder addresses.
To register destinations in a contact or group: In the address book screen, tap [Add New] on the action panel, or tap the [Address Control] icon in the home screen.
Steps to perform a broadcast transmission:
1. Place the original.
Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Specify all destinations.
• One-touch keys that cannot be used for broadcast transmission are greyed out to prevent selection.
• If a Scan to FTP or Network Folder address is specified in a broadcast transmission, hyperlink e-mail transmission will not take place.
• If [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Be sure to press Next Address Key ([+]) before selecting the next address.] is enabled in “Settings (administrator)”, tap [+] before specifying the next destination.
• If you wish to send the same image (Mono2) as the one for the fax address to all destinations in normal mode, tap [Send Same Image as Fax Address] on the action panel.
3. Tap [Address Review] on the action panel.
4. Confirm the destination.
• To cancel a specified destination: Tap the key of the destination that you wish to cancel to release the selection.
• To switch delivery types (To/Cc/Bcc): Tap the address that you want to change, and tap [Change to To], [Change to Cc], or [Change to Bcc] on the action panel.
5. Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key ([Start] key in normal mode) to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key ([Start] key in normal mode). Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image.
What settings should be considered if multiple types of addresses are included in a broadcast transmission when Internet Fax addresses are not included?
When a broadcast transmission includes a mix of several types of addresses (such as scan mode and Internet Fax mode destinations), its settings are enabled for all addresses regardless of which mode screen is used to configure them. Note the following exceptions when Internet Fax addresses are not included:
| Setting | Description |
|---|---|
| File format (file compression mode) | The compression mode set with [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Compression Mode at Broadcasting] in “Settings (administrator)” is used for all destinations. |
| Colour Mode | When the colour mode setting is [Full Colour] in scan mode, the image will be sent in Mono2 to fax addresses and in colour to scan addresses. To send the image in Mono2 to all addresses, tap [Send Same Image as Fax Address] on the action panel in normal mode. |
| Original Count | An address of a mode in which the number of original sheets are specified, if it exists, is enabled. |
| Scan file size | If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an attachment size limit has been set using [Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments] or [Maximum Size of Data Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network Folder)] (in “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings]), the limit will also apply to destinations for which a limit is not set. |
| N-Up | This mode is available only for Fax. It is linked to a mode with an appropriate function. |
| Drop Out colour | This mode is available for Scanner and Data entry. It is linked to a mode with an appropriate function. |
| RGB | This mode is available for Scanner, Network Folder, and FTP/Desktop. It is linked to a mode with an appropriate function. |
What restrictions apply to settings when Internet Fax addresses are included in a broadcast transmission?
When Internet Fax addresses are included in the destinations, the following restrictions apply:
| Setting | Restriction |
|---|---|
| Colour Mode | Fixed at black & white binary. |
| File format (file compression mode) | Fixed at TIFF. |
| Original | Transmission will take place to all addresses using the same image width as Internet Fax. |
| Background Adjustment | Cannot be set. |
| Blank Page Skip | Cannot be set. |
| Drop Out colour | Cannot be set. |
| Contrast | Cannot be set. |
| Sharpness | Cannot be set. |
| RGB | Cannot be set. |
| Sign | Cannot be set. |
| Encrypt | Cannot be set. |
| Multicrop | Cannot be set. |
| Business Card Scan | Cannot be set. |
| Image Crop | Cannot be set. |
Broadcast transmission is not possible to both direct SMTP addresses and other types of addresses.
How do I resend an image to destinations where a broadcast transmission failed?
The results of a completed broadcast transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the image to those destinations.
1. Tap the job status display.
2. Tap the [Scan] tab or [Internet Fax] tab, and tap the [Complete] key.
If the broadcast transmission included destinations of different modes, the same broadcast transmission key will appear in each of those modes.
3. After tapping the key of the completed broadcast transmission, tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel.
4. After tapping the [Failed] tab, tap [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] on the action panel to resend the image.
The steps to follow after [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] is tapped differ depending on whether or not document filing is used. (On some models, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
• Using document filing: You will return to the document filing resend screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Perform the document filing resend procedure. (There is no need to re-scan the original.)
• Not using document filing: You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place the original and perform the steps of the broadcast transmission.
How can I send an Internet Fax from a PC (PC-I-Fax)?
A file on a computer can be sent via the machine as a fax (PC-I Fax function). Faxes are sent using the PC-I Fax function in the same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. Image data for transmission will be created and sent as an Internet fax. By using the “Log Viewer” application, Internet faxes can be sent using the transmission log displayed in the Log Viewer. For the procedures for using this function, see the PC-Fax driver Help.
• To send an Internet fax using the PC-I-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed and then updated using the CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function can only be used on a Windows computer.
How do I disable PC-I-Fax Transmission?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission]. This prohibits PC-I-Fax transmission.
Can I receive Internet faxes to a connected computer using the PC-I-Fax function?
This function is available for transmission. Internet faxes received on the machine cannot be received to a computer that is connected to the machine.
How do I automatically scan both sides of an original (2-sided original)?
The automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original. The settings on 2-sided scanning are cleared when transmission has completed.
• You cannot use 2-Sided scanning when the original size is set to Long Size.
• On some models, duplex scanning is not possible when originals of mixed width are scanned.
1. After tapping the [Original] key, tap the [Book] or [Tablet] key.
See the figure provided in the PDF to check the binding edge of the original and select the key to be tapped.
In normal mode, tap the [2-Sided Tablet] or [2-Sided Book] key.
2. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the placed original.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
To cancel 2-sided scanning: Tap the [1-Sided] key. In normal mode, tap the [2-Sided Tablet] key or the [2-Sided Book] key that has been forcibly displayed and cancel the display.
How are scan size and send size determined, and how does it affect the image?
When the original is placed, its size is automatically detected. In normal mode, the size of the placed original is indicated as the “Scan Size”, and the size to be transmitted is indicated as the “Send Size”.
For example, if the scan size (the placed original) is A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″) and the send size is auto, and if the machine determines the send size to be B5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″), the image will be reduced before transmission.
• Only standard original sizes can be automatically detected.
• When the original size is an inch size or a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan size.
How do I specify the original scan size in paper size when it’s non-standard or not detected correctly?
When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size.
When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 only.
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. After tapping the [Original] key, tap the [Scan Size] key.
3. Tap the appropriate original size key. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
If you are sending a long original, tap the [Long Size] key. Use the automatic document feeder to scan a long original. The maximum width that can be scanned is 1,000 mm (39-3/8″) (the maximum height is 297 mm (11-5/8″)).
How do I specify the original scan size using numeric values for non-standard originals like cards or postcards?
When scanning a non-standard size original such as a card or postcard, specify the original size using numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 25 mm to 432 mm (1″ to 17″), and the height can be from 25 mm to 297 mm (1″ to 11-5/8″).
When the scan size is specified by numeric values, the send size cannot be specified.
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Original] key.
3. After tapping the “Scan Size” key, tap the [Direct Entry] key.
4. Specify the original size.
• Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
• It is convenient to use [+] and [-] to finely adjust the entered size.
5. Tap the [OK] key.
After the settings are completed, tap [OK] twice. On the base screen, check that the specified size is displayed on the [Original] key.
To cancel the specified size settings: Tap the [Auto] key.
How do I store, amend, delete, or retrieve frequently used non-standard original sizes?
Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes.
• The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is turned off.
• A total of up to 12 non-standard original sizes can be registered for copying, fax, and image sending.
• The added original sizes will also appear in other modes.
Storing original sizes (Amend/Delete):
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Original] key.
3. Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab.
4. Tap [Store/Delete] key.
5. Tap a key (an empty slot) for storing a custom original size. Tap a key that does not show a size.
To amend or delete a previously stored key: Tap the key that you want to amend or delete. The following screen will appear.
• To amend the key, tap the [Amend] key and go to the next step.
• To delete the key, tap the [Delete] key. Make sure that the original size has been cleared and tap the [OK] key.
6. Specify the original size.
Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys. It is convenient to use [+] and [-] to finely adjust the entered size.
7. Tap the [OK] key.
Tap the [OK] key, and check that the key of the size stored on the Scan Size screen is added properly. After you have checked it, tap [OK].
To cancel the operation: Tap the [CA] key.
Retrieving a stored original size:
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Original] key.
3. Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab.
4. Tap the key of the original size that you wish to retrieve.
After selecting the key of the original size, tap the [OK] key. Check that the specified size is displayed on the Scan Size screen.
To cancel the operation: Tap the [CA] key.
How do I specify the send size of the image, and what are the limitations?
Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced.
• The send size cannot be specified when [Long Size] is selected for the scan size, or when the scan size is specified by numeric values.
• The send size cannot be specified when [TIFF-S] is selected for the format in Internet fax mode. (The send size is fixed at A4R (8-1/2″ x 11″R).)
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Original] key.
3. Tap the [Send Size] key.
4. Tap the desired send size key. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
Depending on the paper size specified for the “Scan Size”, it may not be possible to select some sizes for the “Send Size”. You cannot tap size keys that are unavailable for the “Send Size”.
How do I set the image orientation for scanning?
When setting scan size and send size:
5. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the original image.
If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
To configure the default setting of image orientation, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Image Orientation] in “Settings (administrator)”.
The ratio used for reduction or enlargement of the original will appear between the “Scan Size” and the “Send Size”.
How do I change the exposure and original image type for scanning?
Optimum scanning is ensured by selecting exposure and original image type based on the original.
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the exposure setting each time you change pages.
• The contrast for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings.
When using the automatic document feeder, the exposure setting cannot be changed once scanning has begun. (If “Job Build” is used in Others, change the exposure each time a new set of originals is inserted.)
• Set the default contrast: Refer to page 4-52 of the PDF.
• Set the default document settings: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Original Image Type]. Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original (only in scan mode and USB memory device scan mode). The following settings can be configured: Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photo, Text, Photo, Printed Photo, Map.
To adjust exposure in Scan mode or Data entry mode:
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Exposure] key.
3. Tap the key assigned to the original type you wish to set based on the original type.
4. Tap the arrow keys to adjust the exposure. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
When [Auto] is selected, changing the exposure sets the original image type to [Text/Printed Photo] automatically.
What are the available exposure settings and their suggestions?
| Exposure Setting | Suggestion |
|---|---|
| Auto | This setting automatically adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original. |
| Manual 1-2 | Select this setting when the original consists of dark text. |
| Manual 3 | Select this setting for a normal original (neither dark nor light). |
| Manual 4-5 | Select this setting when the original consists of light text. |
How do I select the original type in Scan mode or Data entry mode?
| Setup Items | Description |
|---|---|
| Auto | The original image type is automatically selected to match the original. |
| Manual – Text/Printed Photo | This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and printed photographs, such as a magazine or catalogue. |
| Manual – Text/Photo | This mode provides the best balance for scanning an original which contains both text and photographs, such as a text document with a photo pasted on. |
| Manual – Text | Use this mode for regular text documents. |
| Manual – Photo | Use this mode to scan photos. |
| Manual – Printed Photo | This mode is best for scanning printed photographs, such as photos in a magazine or catalogue. |
| Manual – Map | This mode is best for copying maps with light colour shading and fine text. |
How do I select the resolution for scanning, and what are the considerations?
Specify the resolution setting.
For normal text originals, 200 x 200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently legible. For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600 x 600 dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible. In this event, reduce the number of pages scanned or take other measures to decrease the file size.
When using the automatic document feeder, the resolution setting cannot be changed after scanning has begun. (However, when “Job Build” is used in Others, change the resolution each time a new set of originals is inserted.)
• When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages, change the resolution setting each time you change pages.
• The resolution for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings.
1. Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode.
2. Tap the [Resolution] key.
3. Tap the key of the desired resolution. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
• This cannot be selected when Internet Fax addresses are included.
• If there is a mix of destinations in different modes, tap the mode switch key to switch modes to set the resolution in each mode. However, FTP/Desktop and Network Folder are set to the same mode.
• If you set the file format to [Compact PDF] in [Format], or the compression ratio to [Bk Letter Emphasis], the resolution is set to [300x300dpi].
What are the available file format combinations for [Colour/Greyscale] and [B/W] tabs in Scan or Data Entry mode?
Change the file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image at the time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number of pages per file can be changed.
The file type of [B/W] mode and the file type of [Colour/Greyscale] mode are linked. The file type cannot be set separately for each. (When [JPEG] is selected for [Colour/Greyscale] mode, [TIFF] is automatically selected for [B/W] mode.)
| [Colour/Greyscale] tab | [B/W] tab |
|---|---|
| PDF*1 | PDF*1 |
| Compact PDF*1, 2, 3 | PDF*1 |
| Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*1, 2, 3 | PDF*1 |
| PDF/A-1a*1, 4 | PDF/A-1a*1, 4 |
| PDF/A-1b*1, 4 | PDF/A-1b*1, 4 |
| PDF/A*1, 3, 5 | PDF/A*1, 3, 5 |
| Compact PDF/A-1a*1, 3, 6 | PDF/A-1a*1, 4 |
| Compact PDF/A-1b*1, 3, 6 | PDF/A-1b*1, 4 |
| Compact PDF/A*1, 2, 3, 5 | PDF/A*1, 3, 5 |
| Compact PDF/A-1a (Ultra Fine)*1, 3, 6 | PDF/A-1a*1, 4 |
| Compact PDF/A-1b (Ultra Fine)*1, 3, 6 | PDF/A-1b*1, 4 |
| Compact PDF/A (Ultra Fine)*1, 2, 3, 5 | PDF/A*1, 3, 5 |
| Encrypt PDF*1 | Encrypt PDF*1 |
| Encrypt/Compact PDF*1, 2, 3 | Encrypt PDF*1 |
| Encrypt/Compact PDF (Ultra Fine)*1, 2, 3 | Encrypt PDF*1 |
| TIFF | TIFF |
| JPEG | TIFF |
| XPS | XPS |
| TXT(UTF-8)*4 | TXT(UTF-8)*4 |
| RTF*4 | RTF*4 |
| DOCX*4 | DOCX*4 |
| XLSX*4 | XLSX*4 |
| PPTX*4 | PPTX*4 |
*1 When PDF (including encrypted and high compression) is selected for the file format, Flate Compression can be used to reduce the file size.
*2 On some models, this only appears when the Enhanced compression kit is installed.
*3 Flate Compression can be used with all models. When using the high compression PDF that is provided standard on some models, data is always compressed by Flate Compression, regardless of whether Flate Compression is enabled or disabled in the system settings.
*4 On some models, this only appears when the OCR expansion kit is installed.
*5 When using certain models, or models with the OCR expansion kit installed, this item cannot be displayed.
*6 On some models, this only appears when the OCR expansion kit and the Enhanced compression kit are installed.
What should be noted when [PDF/High] is specified as the file format, and what is Flate Compression?
Note the following when [PDF/High] is specified in the [Colour/Greyscale] file format. (On some models, this only appears when the Enhanced compression kit is installed.)
• When broadcasting to an address with [PDF/High] specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as Compact PDF files.
• When broadcasting to an address with [PDF/High] and [PDF/Compact/U-Fine] specified, all files for the scanner will be sent as Compact PDF (Ultra Fine) files.
• If [PDF/High] is specified, the resolution cannot be changed in the scanner mode. The resolution is set to 300 x 300 dpi.
• If [PDF/High] is set when a resolution setting has been specified in scanner (or other) mode, the resolution setting will be cancelled and the Compact PDF resolution will be used for transmission.
• When [PDF/High] is selected, [Resolution] cannot be changed while waiting for the next original or in [Change Setting] in the job build settings.
• If [PDF/High] is set when an original type setting has been specified in scanner (or other) mode, [Photo] will change to [Text/Photo] and [Map] will change to [Text/Printed Photo].
• The condition of the original may prevent the OCR function from correctly recognizing some characters and graphics, and omissions or incorrect recognition of characters may result.*
• The OCR function is not guaranteed to completely reproduce all characters, graphics, or other contents of a scanned original.*
* On some models, the OCR expansion kit is required.
Flate Compression:
After compressing a PDF file by JPEG compression, this function compresses the file by lossless compression to further reduce the file size by a small amount. When the data contains significant solid colour, this increases the effectiveness of compression. When sending a PDF file, Flate Compression enables greater reduction of the file size than conventional methods. If the recipient’s PDF viewer does not support Flate Compression, the recipient may not be able to view the PDF file. In this case, Flate Compression can be disabled.
To enable Flate Compression: Enable or disable Flate Compression in [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [PDF Compression Options] in “Settings (administrator)”.
How do I change the file format in Scan or Data Entry mode?
1. Tap the [File Format] key. If you are in data input mode, start from step 5.
2. Tap the [Colour/Greyscale] or [B/W] key.
• The format setting for [B/W] mode is the file format with the [B/W Start] key is tapped.
• The format setting for [Colour/Greyscale] mode is the file format with the [Colour Start] key is tapped.
• When [Colour/Greyscale] mode is selected and the enhanced compression kit is installed, the [Compact] and [U-Fine] checkboxes appear. To suppress image quality deterioration and reduce the data size of a file to be transmitted, select Compact PDF. Select [U-Fine] only when you select Compact PDF.
3. Tap the key of the desired file type. After the settings are completed, tap [OK]. (This step refers to selecting between options like PDF, TIFF, XPS etc. as shown in the UI mockups for machines without OCR and with OCR on page 5-62).
4. (Only when [PDF] or [PDF/A-1a] is selected on the machine that has the OCR function) To enable OCR, select the [OCR] checkbox and tap [OCR Setting]. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
• When “Long Size” is selected for the original, [OCR] cannot be used.
• Select the scanning language in the language settings. The following languages can be selected: Japanese, English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Finnish, Danish, Hungarian, Czech, Polish, Russian, Greek, Portuguese, Turkish, Slovak, Catalan, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Korean.
• When [RTF], [DOCX], [XLSX], or [PPTX] is selected for the file format, you can set the font of the output text.
• When the [Detect Image Direction] checkbox is selected, the orientation of the original is detected and the image is rotated before transmission.
• When the [File Name Auto Extraction] checkbox is selected, the text string that is read from the file is included in the file name. If a file name is set, the set file name will be used for transmission.
• You can set the accuracy of OCR in [OCR Accuracy:]. Select from [Auto] or [Priority Text]. When [Priority Text] is selected, the character reading accuracy is raised before scanning. When [Priority Text] is selected, accuracy in diagram and table areas may be degraded. Only change the setting when you particularly want to increase the accuracy of text areas.
For more detailed settings (Normal Mode):
5. To select more detailed settings, tap the [Detail] key to switch to normal mode.
6. Tap the [File Format] key.
7. Tap the [Colour/Greyscale] or [B/W] tab and select the format mode for scanning.
• The format setting for [B/W] mode is the file format with the colour mode set to [Mono2].
• The format setting for [Colour/Greyscale] mode is the file format with the colour mode set to [Full Colour] or [Greyscale].
8. Tap the key of the desired file type. (This step refers to selecting file types and compression options as shown in the UI mockups on page 5-64).
When [Colour/Greyscale] mode is selected, the [Compact] and [U-Fine] checkboxes appear. To suppress image quality deterioration and reduce the data size of a file to be transmitted, select Compact PDF. Select [U-Fine] only when you select Compact PDF. (On some models, the Enhanced compression kit is required for this feature).
9. (Only if the machine has the OCR function) Tap the [Compression Mode] key or [Compression Ratio] key. (This step is for B/W or Colour/Greyscale respectively, as shown on page 5-65).
10. Tap the Compression key or Compression Ratio key.
• [Bk Letter Emphasis] in the [Colour/Greyscale] tab is a file format that reduces the data size while suppressing deterioration of black text.
• On the machine that has the OCR function, tap [OK] when you have completed the settings.
11. To change the number of pages per file, set the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox to checked, and use numeric keys to specify the number of pages per file.
• When the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is checked, one file is created for each of the number of pages at the right. When the checkmark is removed, one file is created for all pages.
• When [Specified Pages per File] is selected, consecutive numbers are added to the created file names.
• When [JPEG] is selected for the file type, one file is created for each page. For this reason, the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox does not appear.
How do I change the colour mode for scanning in Internet Fax?
Change the colour mode used to scan the original.
In Easy mode: Tap the [B/W Start] or [Colour Start] key when scanning the original.
To set the settings used when each key is tapped, select “Settings (Web version)” – [System Settings]→ [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Easy Scan Settings].
In Normal mode:
1. Tap the [Detail] key to switch to the normal mode.
2. Tap the [Colour Mode] key.
3. Tap the key of the desired colour mode for the original. Available modes are Auto, Full Colour, Mono2, Greyscale.
• Auto: The machine detects whether the original is colour or black and white and automatically selects full colour or black and white (Mono2 or Greyscale) scanning.
• Full Colour: The original is scanned in full colour. This mode is best for full colour originals such as catalogues.
• Mono2: Colours in the original are scanned as black or white. This mode is best for text-only originals.
• Greyscale: The colours in the original are scanned in black and white as shades of grey (greyscale).
4. Tap the [Greyscale] or [Mono2] key to set the B/W mode for automatic colour selection. (This step applies if “Auto” was selected in step 3).
Specify whether Mono2 or greyscale is used when scanning black and white originals. Note that if the file format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in greyscale. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
The B/W mode can be set only when the [Auto] key is selected in the colour mode setting (step 3).
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode (the colour mode settings for Internet Fax are typically fixed or set in system settings).
If there is a mix of destinations in different send modes, tap the mode selection key to select a send mode (E-mail, DeskTop/FTP or Data Entry) to set the colour mode for each mode.
How do I set scan settings automatically (Auto Set)?
(On some models, the OCR expansion kit is required.)
To automatically set scan settings appropriate for the original, tap the [Auto Set] key in the base screen of Easy Mode.
The following functions are set automatically:
• Image Orientation
• Resolution
• Blank Page Skip
Each function setting value/parameter can be changed in setting mode.
• When “Auto Set” is enabled, greyed out functions cannot be enabled.
• When an Internet Fax address is selected, “Auto Set” cannot be enabled.
To change the “Auto Set” setting, use “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Auto Scan Setting]. The settings below can be selected:
• Set Image Orientation Automatically: The orientation of placed originals can be automatically detected. Set whether the original is scanned by one-sided scanning or two-sided scanning.
• Set Resolution Automatically: You can have the machine automatically set the resolution.
• Blank Page Skip: Set whether or not blank original pages are automatically skipped during scanning.
How do I check the image to be transmitted (Preview)?
Check the image that will be sent in the touch panel before transmission. You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. As you can adjust the exposure and resolution to scan the original while checking it in the preview screen, you can send a better quality original to the destination.
• Depending on the size of the transmission data, part of the preview image may not appear in the preview screen in the touch panel.
• The preview function is not available when the original size is set to Long Size.
How do I store scan operations as a program?
This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″) size documents are scanned into a file and sent to each branch office once a month.
• The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission.
• The following contents cannot be stored in programs: Tapping of the [Speaker] key, Quick File*, File*, Page changes and unspecified erases during preview, Metadata Settings, Send Settings, Own Name, Sign E-mail, Encrypt E-mail. (* On some models, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
• Up to 48 programs can be stored.
• Up to 500 destinations can be stored in one program.
• A program in which sub addresses and passcodes are specified as an F-code destination records all sub addresses and passcodes.
This function cannot be used in data entry mode.
To configure a program: Tap [Program Registration – Register Current Settings] on the action panel that appears when you operate any mode screens.
To use a stored program:
1. Tap the [Detail] key to switch to the normal mode.
2. Place the original and tap [Call Program] on the action panel. According to the function stored in the program, place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
3. Tap the desired program key. You can also change the name, delete, register in favorite, or register for home screen from this menu.
4. Configure additional settings if needed. Some settings cannot be added depending on the contents of the called program.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image.
How do I send two pages as a single page (N-Up)?
Reduce two original pages to the equal size and send them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent. For the standard size (A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″), B5 or A5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″)), original pages are scanned from both the single pass feeder and document glass.
• This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode.
• The N-Up is only available for originals with A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″), B5 or A5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″) size.
• Transmission is not possible at a size smaller than the original size.
• When the scan size of the original is specified by numeric values, this function cannot be used.
• This function cannot be used together with Dual Page Scan or Card Shot.
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of Internet Fax mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the N-Up setting: Tap the [N-Up] key to uncheck it.
5. Tap the [Original] key.
6. Tap the [Image Orientation] key with the same orientation as the original image. If this setting is not correct, a suitable image may not be transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap [OK].
7. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. Tap the [Change Setting] key in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure is changed.)
How do I scan originals of different sizes (Mixed Size Original)?
Scan originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, when B4 (8-1/2″ x 14″) size originals are mixed together with A3 (11″ x 17″) size originals. When scanning the originals, the machine automatically detects the size of each original.
This function can only be used with the combinations of original sizes as shown below:
• A3 and B4, A3 and B5, B4 and A4, and A4 and B5
• A4R and B5, B4 and A4R, B4 and A5, and B5 and A5
• 11″ x 17″ and 8-1/2″ x 14″, 11″ x 17″ and 8-1/2″ x 13″, and 11″ x 17″ and 5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″
• On some models, two sided scanning cannot be used when scanning originals of mixed width as in the above.
• When Mixed Size Original is selected, an original scan size cannot be specified.
• After the original scan size has been selected, Mixed Size Original cannot be specified.
• Rotate cannot be used when Mixed Size Original is enabled.
• This function is not available if [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device Control] → [Original Size Detector Setting] is set to “AB-3” in “Settings (administrator)”.
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Insert the originals with the corners aligned together in the far left corner of the document feeder tray.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. Otherwise, tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
For mixed size originals, set “Original” to “Auto”.
To cancel the mixed size original setting: Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key to uncheck it.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I scan both sides of a card onto a single page (Card Shot)?
Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately.
• If the scan size is larger than the send size, it will result in a sending failure.
• The ratio cannot be specified and “Rotation Sending Setting” cannot be selected.
1. Place a card face down on the document glass.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Card Shot] key.
5. Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
• Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter the sizes using the numeric keys.
• To quickly set the size, first specify a value close to the desired ratio value by the numeric keys, then tap [-] or [+] for adjustment.
• To enlarge or reduce the images to fit the paper based on the entered original size, tap the [Fit to Send Size] key.
• After selecting Card Shot, tap the [Original] key in the base screen to change the original scan size or the send size. In this case, the screen of this step appears when you tap the scan size key.
To cancel the Card Shot settings: Tap the [Off] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key, and scan the front side.
7. Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key to scan the reverse side. Before scanning the back of the card, tap the [Change Setting] key on the touch panel to change the exposure.
8. Tap the [Read-End] key.
If you will continue by scanning the front of the card, you can tap the [Change Setting] key to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size.
How do I simultaneously scan multiple cards, receipts or other small originals to individual files (Multicrop)?
This function automatically crops and scans multiple cards, receipts, or other small originals placed on the document glass to individual files.
• This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device.
• The e-mail will be sent without being divided if System Settings – [Image Send Settings]→[Scan Settings]→[Condition Settings]→[If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.] is enabled and [Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments(E-Mail)] is set. If the transmitted e-mail exceeds the limit, a send error occurs.
1. Place the multiple originals that you want to scan on the document glass.
Cautions when placing the originals:
• Up to 50 originals can be placed at once.
• Separate the originals by at least 5 mm.
• Available originals sizes are 40 to 297 mm in height and 40 to 432 mm in width.
• If the shape of an original is not square or rectangular, the original may not be cropped correctly.
2. Keep the auto document feeder open, not closed. If you scan the originals with the auto document feeder closed, it will not be possible to detect the outlines of the originals and scanning will fail. Always use this function with the auto document feeder open. If a light source such as an electric light shines onto the originals during scanning, cropping may not be successful. Adjust the angle of the automatic document feeder so that the light source does not affect the image. Do not look directly at the light during scanning.
3. Tap the mode display and change to the base screen of the desired mode.
4. Specify the destination.
5. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multicrop] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. When you have completed the setting, tap the [Back] key.
When original count is enabled, the number of scanned originals will appear during scanning.
To cancel the multicrop setting: Tap the [Multicrop] key to remove the checkmark.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning the originals. When scanning is completed, place the next originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the above step until you have scanned all originals, and then tap the [Read-End] key. When transmission is completed, a beep sounds.
• Restrictions when multicrop is enabled: The following restrictions apply when multicrop is enabled. Restricted items may change automatically in some cases.
• Resolution: 600 x 600 dpi cannot be used.
• Scan size / send size: Only auto can be used.
• Two-sided original: Only one-sided original is enabled.
• Image Orientation: Cannot be used. (Each cropped original is corrected to the orientation that is least skewed.)
• Format: High compression and ultra-fine cannot be used.
• Compression / compression format: Black text emphasis cannot be used.
• One file per page: Cannot be set when the checkmark is enabled and the number is “1”.
• The following functions cannot be used at the same time as multicrop: Job Build, Slow Scan Mode, Mixed Size Original, Erase, Dual Page Scan, Book Divide, Card Shot, Verif. Stamp, Blank Page Skip, File*, Quick File*, Preview, Business Card Scan, Image Crop (* On some models, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
• When the Multicrop setting is cancelled, the following items retain the setting changes that occurred when Multicrop was enabled: Resolution, Scan Size, Send Size, 2-Sided Original, File Type, OCR, Compression Mode/Compression Ratio, Specified Pages per File.
• Depending on the original, it may not be extracted to the file correctly.
How do I scan a business card, read the text string, create a file, and send the file (Business Card Scan)?
(On some models, the OCR expansion kit is required.)
You can scan a business card, extract the name and telephone number from the text string read by OCR, and create and send a vCard or other file.
This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device. The e-mail will be sent without being divided if System Settings – [Image Send Settings]→[Scan Settings]→[Condition Settings]→[If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.] is enabled and [Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments(E-Mail)] is set. If the transmitted e-mail exceeds the limit, a send error occurs.
1. Place the multiple business cards that you want to scan on the document glass.
Cautions when placing business cards:
• Up to 20 business cards can be placed at once.
• Separate the business cards by at least 5 mm.
• Available business card sizes are 45 x 85 mm to 110 x 110 mm.
• If the shape of a business card is not square or rectangular, the business card may not be cropped correctly.
• Place the business cards with the top side of the cards at the far side of the document glass as shown. If the cards are placed in the wrong orientation, it will not be possible to read the cards correctly.
2. Keep the auto document feeder open, not closed. If you scan the business cards with the auto document feeder closed, it will not be possible to detect the outlines of the business cards and scanning will fail. Always use this function with the auto document feeder open. If a light source such as an electric light shines onto the originals during scanning, cropping may not be successful. Adjust the angle of the automatic document feeder so that the light source does not affect the image. Do not look directly at the light during scanning.
3. Tap the mode display and change to the base screen of the desired mode.
4. Specify the destination.
5. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Business Card Scan] key.
6. Tap the [On] key, and change settings as needed. When you have completed the settings, tap the [OK] key and then the [Back] key.
• If original count is enabled, the number of scanned originals will appear during scanning.
• Change the language setting to match the language used on the business card.
• To use the full name as the file name, enable [Use Full Name on Card as the File Name].
• To send the scanned image file together with the file format selected in [File Format], enable [Also Send Image].
To cancel the business card scan setting: Tap the [Off] key.
7. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning the originals. When scanning is completed, place the next group of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the above step until you have scanned all originals, and then tap the [Read-End] key. When transmission is completed, a beep sounds. The image of the scanned business card is sent together with the VCard or CSV file set in File Format.
• Restrictions when Business Card Scan is enabled: The following restrictions apply. Restricted items may change automatically in some cases.
• Resolution: Only 300 x 300 dpi or 400 x 400 dpi can be used.
• Scan size / send size: Only auto can be used.
• Two-sided original: Only one-sided original is enabled.
• Image Orientation: Cannot be used. (Each cropped original is corrected to the orientation that is least skewed.)
• Format: High compression and ultra-fine cannot be used.
• Compression / compression format: Black text emphasis cannot be used.
• One file per page: Cannot be set when the checkmark is enabled and the number is “1”.
• The following functions cannot be used at the same time as Multicrop: Job Build, Slow Scan Mode, Mixed Size Original, Erase, Dual Page Scan, Book Divide, Card Shot, Verif. Stamp, Blank Page Skip, File*, Quick File*, Preview, Multicrop, Image Crop (* On some models, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
• When the Business Card Scan setting is cancelled, the following items retain the setting changes that occurred: Resolution, Scan Size, Send Size, 2-Sided Original, File Type, OCR, Compression Mode/Compression Ratio, Specified Pages per File.
• Depending on the business card, it may not be extracted to the file correctly.
What information can be extracted from a scanned business card?
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Name | The name is extracted. |
| Kana | When the language is set to Japanese, you can convert the name to kana. |
| Pinyin | When the language is set to Chinese, you can convert the name to pinyin. |
| Postal code | The postal code is extracted. |
| Address | The address is extracted. |
| Company/group name | The company/organization name is extracted. |
| Department | The department is extracted. |
| Job title | The position is extracted. |
| Telephone number | The telephone number is extracted. Up to five. |
| Fax number | The fax number is extracted. Up to five. |
| URL | The URL is extracted. Up to five. |
| E-mail address | The E-mail address is extracted. |
| Other | Other is used if none of the above apply. |
How are file names assigned when using Business Card Scan?
The user can assign any file name to a file. When [Use Full Name on Card as the File Name] is enabled, the name on a scanned business card can be assigned as the file name. If you do not set a file name, the machine will assign an automatically generated file name. File names are assigned as follows in each setting:
| Setting | File | File name | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| User entry | vCard | User_0001.vcf, User_0002.vcf | The name entered by the user (“User” in this case) is inserted at the beginning of the file name. |
| User entry | CSV | User.csv | The name entered by the user (“User” in this case) is inserted at the beginning of the file name. |
| User entry | Scanned image | User_0001.jpg, User_0002.jpg | The name entered by the user (“User” in this case) is inserted at the beginning of the file name. |
| File name auto extraction | vCard | AAAAAA_0001.vcf, AAAAAA_0002.vcf, BBBBBB_0001.vcf, Untitled_0001.vcf, Untitled_0002.vcf | Example: The names read from business cards are “AAAAAA”, “BBBBB”. When there are cards with the same first and last name such as “AAAAAA”, the number at the end is a serial number. If the name could not be read, the file name is “Untitled”. If there are multiple untitled files, the number at the end is a serial number. |
| File name auto extraction | CSV | AAAAAA_0001.csv | Example: The names read from business cards are “AAAAAA”, “BBBBB”. When there are cards with the same first and last name such as “AAAAAA”, the number at the end is a serial number. If the name could not be read, the file name is “Untitled”. If there are multiple untitled files, the number at the end is a serial number. |
| File name auto extraction | Scanned image | AAAAAA_0001.jpg, AAAAAA_0002.jpg, BBBBBB_0001.jpg, Untitled_0001.jpg, Untitled_0002.jpg | Example: The names read from business cards are “AAAAAA”, “BBBBB”. When there are cards with the same first and last name such as “AAAAAA”, the number at the end is a serial number. If the name could not be read, the file name is “Untitled”. If there are multiple untitled files, the number at the end is a serial number. |
| Automatic generation | vCard | MXxxxx_yyyyyy_zzzzzz_0001.vcf, MXxxxx_yyyyyy_zzzzzz_0002.vcf | “xxxx” is the model name, “yyyyyy” is the scan date, and “zzzzzz” is the scan time. |
| Automatic generation | CSV | MXxxxx_yyyyyy_zzzzzz_0001.csv | “xxxx” is the model name, “yyyyyy” is the scan date, and “zzzzzz” is the scan time. |
| Automatic generation | Scanned image | MXxxxx_yyyyyy_zzzzzz_0001.jpg, MXxxxx_yyyyyy_zzzzzz_0002.jpg | “xxxx” is the model name, “yyyyyy” is the scan date, and “zzzzzz” is the scan time. |
If the user sets a file name when file name auto extraction is enabled, the user’s file name is given priority.
How do I scan multiple photos at once to individual files (Image Crop)?
This function automatically scans photographs placed on the document glass to individual files.
This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save to External Memory Device. Settings (administrator) -“Image Send Settings”→”Scan Settings”→”Condition Settings”→”If the E-mail attachment(s) exceed maximum size, it will be sent in multiple files.” is not applied. If the transmitted e-mail exceeds the limit, a send error will occur.
1. Place the multiple originals that you want to scan on the document glass.
Cautions when placing the originals:
• Up to 50 originals can be placed at once.
• Separate the originals by at least 5 mm.
• Available originals sizes are 40 to 297 mm in height and 40 to 432 mm in width.
• If the shape of an original is not square or rectangular, the original may not be cropped correctly.
• The top and bottom of each original cannot be distinguished automatically, so take care to orient the originals appropriately.
2. Close the automatic document feeder. The scanning method is different from multi-crop. Close the automatic document feeder.
3. Tap the mode display and change to the home screen of the desired mode.
4. Specify the destination.
5. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Image Crop] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
When original count is enabled, the number of scanned originals will appear during scanning.
To cancel the image crop setting: Tap the [Image Crop] key to remove the checkmark.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning the originals. When scanning is completed, place the next group of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the above step until you have scanned all originals, and then tap the [Read-End] key. When transmission is completed, a beep sounds.
• Restrictions when image crop is enabled: The following restrictions apply. Restricted items may change automatically in some cases.
• Scan size / send size: Only auto can be used.
• Two-sided original: Only one-sided original is enabled.
• Image Orientation: Cannot be used. (Each cropped original is corrected to the orientation that is least skewed.)
• Format: High compression and ultra-fine cannot be used.
• Compression / compression format: Black text emphasis cannot be used.
• One file per page: Cannot be set when the checkmark is enabled and the number is “1”.
• The following functions cannot be used at the same time as image crop: Job Build, Slow Scan Mode, Mixed Size Original, Erase, Dual Page Scan, Book Divide, Card Shot, Verif. Stamp, Blank Page Skip, File*, Quick File*, Preview, Multicrop Business Card Scan (* On some models, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
• When the image crop setting is cancelled, the following items retain the setting changes that occurred: Resolution, Scan Size, Send Size, 2-Sided Original, File Type, OCR, Compression Mode/Compression Ratio, Specified Pages per File.
• Depending on the photo, it may not be extracted to the file correctly.
How do I scan many originals at once by separating them into sets (Job Build)?
This function lets you separate an original consisting of numerous pages into sets, scan each set using the automatic document feeder, and transmit the pages in a single transmission. You can also send a fax by placing originals in both the automatic document feeder and on the document glass. Use this function when there are more original pages than can be placed at once in the automatic document feeder. When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The settings that you select for the first set can be used for all remaining sets.
• Up to 9999 (excluding Internet Fax) pages can be scanned. Note that when the memory is being used for other jobs, fewer pages can be scanned.
• If the memory becomes full during scanning, a message will appear and the transmission will be cancelled.
• The scan settings can be changed for each set of originals.
1. Place originals in the automatic document feeder. Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray. Originals can be stacked up to the indicator line.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Job Build] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. If you are performing Scan to E-mail, tap the [Others] key and then tap the [Job Build] key.
To cancel the job build setting: Tap the [Job Build] key to uncheck it.
5. Change settings as needed.
6. Tap the [Start] key to scan the first original page.
7. Place the next set of originals and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all originals have been scanned.
• If needed, tap [Change Setting] before tapping the [Start] key, and change the original scan settings and send settings for the next original. The setting changes will be applied to the next job.
• If you tap the [Preview] key, you cannot scan additional pages.
To cancel scanning: Tap the [CA] key. All the settings including scanned data will be cleared.
8. Tap the [Read-End] key.
How do I scan an original, like a book, as two separate pages (Dual Page Scan)?
The left and right sides of an original are scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to successively scan each page of a book or other bound document. When using dual page scan, the original must be placed on the document glass.
Original scan size vs. Transmitted image:
• A3 (11″ x 17″) x 1 page becomes A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″) x 2 pages
• B4 (8-1/2″ x 14″) x 1 pages becomes B5 (5-1/2″ x 8-1/2″) x 2 pages
• This function is available when the original size setting is set to [Auto].
• Note that “Centre Erase” and “Edge+Centre Erase” cannot be used.
1. Place the original on the document glass. Align the centre of the original with the appropriate size mark. The page on the left side (when facing the machine) is copied first.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Dual Page Scan] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the dual page scan setting: Tap the [Dual Page Scan] key to uncheck it.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
How do I split a saddle-stitch pamphlet by page and transmit the pages successively (Book Divide)?
The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order before transmission. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent.
This function can be enabled when the original size setting is set to [Auto]. The document glass is not available for this function.
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Book Divide] key.
5. Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original (Left Binding, Right Binding, Tablet). After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence. Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and make sure that the binding edge is correct.
To cancel the Book Divide setting: Tap the [Off] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
How do I adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter (Background Adjustment)?
You can adjust the background by making light areas of the original darker or lighter. [+] makes the background darker. [-] makes the background lighter.
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Background Adjustment] key.
5. Tap [+] or [-] or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] key in sequence.
To cancel the background adjustment setting: Tap the [Off] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has ended.
• You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
• When the colour mode setting is [Mono2], the background adjustment function will not operate.
How do I add contrast to the scanned original before transmission?
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Contrast] key.
5. Tap [+] or [-] or slide the slider to adjust the contrast level (Low, 2, 3, 4, High). After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the contrast settings: Tap the [Off] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I enhance the outline of the scanned original before transmission (Sharpness)?
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sharpness] key.
5. Tap [+] or [-] or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness (Less Sharp, 2, 3, 4, More Sharp). After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the sharpness setting: Tap the [Off] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I remove chromatic colours from the scanned original before transmission (Drop Out Colour)?
This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Drop Out colour] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the drop out colour setting: Tap the [Drop Out colour] key to uncheck it.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. Tap the [Change Setting] key in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be changed.)
How do I adjust red/green/blue colour components (RGB Adjust)?
This function heightens or lightens any one of the three colour components R (red), G (green), and B (blue).
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [RGB Adjust] key. This setting is only applied to colour jobs.
5. Tap [+] or [-] of the colour (R, G, B) you want to adjust or slide the slider to adjust the colouring. Touch [+] to darken and [-] to lighten selected colour tone. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the RGB Adjust setting: Tap the [Off] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat the procedure until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
You can tap the [Preview] key to check a preview of the image before sending an image. Tap the [Change Setting] key in the scan-end confirmation screen to change the exposure, resolution, scan size, and send size. (However, when scanning each even-numbered page of the original, only the exposure can be changed.)
How do I erase peripheral shadows on the image (Erase)?
When scanning thick originals or books, erase any peripheral shadows that may be produced on the image.
Erase modes include: Outer Frame Erase, Centre Erase, Edge + Centre Erase, Side Erase.
• This function erases the parts of the image where shadows tend to form, but does not detect shadows and erase only the shadows.
• If a ratio setting is used in combination with an erase setting, the erase width will change according to the selected ratio. For example, if you set an erase width of 10 mm (1/2″) and reduce the image to 70% before scanning it, the erase width will be reduced to 7 mm (3/8″).
• When the erase setting is selected, the image orientation will be forcibly portrait.
To change the default erase width setting: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment]. The width can be set from 0 mm to 20 mm (0″ to 1″). The factory default setting is 10 mm (1/2″). The setting changed here will apply to [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment] in “Settings”.
1. Place the original.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Erase] key.
5. Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase (Up, Down, Left, Right, Centre), and specify the erase position (Outer Frame, Specify Frame+Centre, Specify Frame). Check that the tapped checkbox is set to checked. If the [Specify Frame] key is tapped, the [Up], [Down], [Left], and [Right] checkboxes are set to checked. If the [Specify Frame+Centre] key is tapped, all the checkboxes are set to checked. Specify the erase edge on the reverse side when erasing edges of one to three sides of Up, Down, Left, and Right on the front side to scan a 2-sided original by using the [Reverse erase position of back face] checkbox.
6. Specify the erase width. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
• Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys.
• To quickly set the area, first specify a value close to the desired value by the numeric keys, then adjust it with [+] or [-].
To cancel the erase setting: Tap the [Clear] key.
7. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
How do I scan a thin original using Slow Scan Mode to prevent misfeeding?
Use this function when you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder. This function helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. When slow scan mode is selected, 2-sided scanning is not possible.
1. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Adjust the original guides slowly. If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the slow scan Mode setting: Tap the [Slow Scan Mode] key to uncheck it.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How do I eliminate blank pages from a transmission (Blank Page Skip)?
If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to send only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless blank sheets without checking an original.
• If an original of which one side is blank is scanned, blank pages are skipped for 2-sided sending.
• In a broadcast transmission to destinations including fax and Internet fax destinations, this function is applied to scan mode destinations only.
• Depending on the original, some pages that are not blank may be detected as blank pages and thus not being sent, and some pages that are blank may not be detected as blank and thus sent.
• This function cannot be used in Internet fax mode.
• If the [Send Same Image as Fax Address] key is tapped, this function is cancelled if a fax address is specified for the destination.
1. Place the original.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Blank Page Skip] key.
5. Tap the [Skip Blank Page] or [Skip Blank and Back Shadow] key. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the Blank Page Skip setting: Tap the [Off] key.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended.
7. When scanning ends, check the number of original sheets and the number of sheets to be sent and tap the [OK] key to start transmission.
• When Job Build mode is used, the confirmation message will appear after the [Start] key is tapped.
• On the confirmation screen, the number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of sheets to be sent excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five original sheets that include two blank pages are scanned by duplex scanning, (A) will show “5”, (B) will show “10”, and (C) will show “8”.
If this step is not performed within one minute after the above confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the image will not be reserved for transmission.
How do I check the number of scanned original sheets before transmission (Original Count)?
Count the number of scanned original sheets and display the count before transmission. Checking the number of scanned original sheets before transmission helps prevent transmission mistakes.
• The count result is displayed with the number of scanned original sheets, not the number of scanned original pages. For example, when a 2-sided original is transmitted, the number “1” will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitted, not “2” to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page.
• When a broadcast transmission is performed, if the original count function is selected in any of the modes, the function will operate for all destinations.
• The setting should be enabled separately for each mode.
1. Place originals in the automatic document feeder.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Original Count] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the original count setting: Tap the [Original Count] key to uncheck it.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended.
6. Check the number of original sheets displayed on the confirmation screen. The number displayed is the number of scanned original sheets, not pages.
7. Tap the [OK] key to start transmission.
If this function is combined with [Job Build], the count result is displayed after the [Read-End] key has been tapped. If this step is not performed within one minute after the confirmation screen appears, the scanned image and settings will be cleared and the base screen will reappear. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the image will not be reserved for transmission.
If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets: Tap the [Cancel] key and then tap the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings and destination settings will not be cleared. Insert the original sheets in the document feeder tray again and tap the [Start] key to re-scan.
How do I stamp scanned originals for verification (Verification Stamp)?
This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. An “O” mark is stamped in fluorescent pink.
• To use the verification stamp function, the optional stamp unit must be installed.
• When 2-sided originals are used, the front of each original is stamped twice.
• If an error occurs during scanning, an original that was not scanned may be stamped.
• When the “O” mark that is stamped on originals starts to become faint, replace the stamp cartridge.
1. Place originals in the automatic document feeder.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or [Others] key, and tap the [Verif. Stamp] key. The appropriate icon or checkbox is selected. If you tap the [Others] key, tap the [Back] key after the settings have been completed.
To cancel the verification stamp setting: Tap [Verification Stamp] on the action panel or the [Others] key, and tap [Verif. Stamp] to clear the checkmark.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended.
Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. However, settings for this function cannot be changed in the preview screen.
How is sender information added to faxes (I-Fax Own Address Send)?
Your sender information (date, time, sender name, sender address, number of pages) is automatically added to the top of the file you transmit. This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode.
Example of the sender information printed:
(1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission.
(2) Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine.
(3) Source Address.
(4) Page numbers: Page number/total pages.
• Storing and setting sender information:
Date, time: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Clock Adjust].
Sender name, sender address: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Own Number and Name Set] → [Sender Data Registration]. If you intend to use the I-Fax Own Address Send function, be sure to configure this information.
Page numbers: Select whether or not to include page numbers using [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Internet Fax Settings] → [Send Setting] → [Printing Page Number at Receiver] in “Settings (administrator)”.
• Position of sender information: The sender information is printed at the top of the scanned image data. This makes the transmission data longer than the scan size, so it may be reduced or divided onto two pages when printed by the receiving machine.
How do I change the print settings for the Transaction Report for Internet Fax?
A transaction report is automatically printed out to alert you when an Internet fax transmission fails or when a broadcast transmission is performed. The transaction report contains a description of the transmission (date, start time, name of destination, time required, number of pages, result, etc.). Transaction reports are printed based on conditions set in the setting mode. Select different conditions for a transmission as required.
This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode. For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations.
1. Place the original.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of Internet Fax mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Transaction Report] key.
5. Tap the key of the print settings (Do not Print, Print at Error, Always Print). After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
To cancel the transaction report settings: Tap the [Do not Print] key.
• The print conditions for a transaction report are as follows:
• “Always Print”: A transaction report is printed no matter whether the transmission succeeds or fails.
• “Print at Error”: A transaction report is printed when transmission fails.
• “Do not Print”: Do not print a transaction report.
• Set the [Print Original Image] checkbox to checked to include part of the transmitted original in the transaction report.
6. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
When [Print Original Image] is enabled, the first page of the transmitted original is printed on the same sheet as the transaction report. The original image is reduced to allow it to fit on the sheet. If the vertical scanning length (X direction) of the original is longer than 432 mm (17-1/64″), the part that exceeds 432 mm (17-1/64″) may be cut off.
How do I start a transmission at a specified time (Timer Transmission)?
Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to perform reserved, broadcast or other transmissions during your absence or at night or other times when telephone rates are low.
• When a timer transmission is set, keep the main power switch in the “ON” position. If the main power switch is in the “OFF” position at the specified time, transmission will not take place.
• When performing a timer transmission, you must scan the original into memory when you set up the transmission. It is not possible to leave the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and have it scanned at the reserved time of transmission.
• Up to 100 timer transmissions can be stored at once.
• Settings selected for a timer transmission (exposure, resolution, and other functions) are automatically cleared after the transmission is finished. (However, when the document filing function* is used, the scanned original image and settings are stored in the built-in hard drive. * On some models, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
• If another transmission is in progress when the specified time arrives, the timer transmission will begin after that transmission is finished.
• If a job scheduled for timer transmission is given priority on the job status screen, the timer will be cancelled. The transmission will begin as soon as the job in progress is completed.
• The time can be specified up to a week in advance.
• After the timer transmission settings are specified, start the transmission in the same way as other functions.
• A timer transmission can be deleted in the job status screen.
1. Place the original.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of each mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Timer] key.
5. Tap [On] key.
6. Specify the date. (Today, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday)
7. Specify the time (hour and minute) in 24-hour format. After the settings are completed, tap [OK] and [Back] keys in sequence.
• Tap the areas displaying the hour and minute respectively, and enter the values using the numeric keys.
• It is convenient to use [+] or [-] to finely adjust the time.
• The setting will show the current time. If the time is not correct, press the [CA] key to cancel the operation. Correct the time in setting mode and then perform the timer transmission procedure.
To cancel the Timer Transmission settings: Tap the [Off] key.
To set the date and time of the machine: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Clock Adjust]. If [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] has been enabled, the date and time cannot be modified. Select [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” and select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] to disable the [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] setting.
8. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
• If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.
• When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission.
The original is scanned into memory. The original cannot be scanned at a specified time.
How do I add an electronic signature when sending an image (Scan to E-mail)?
You can add a signature when sending a scanned image. This allows the recipient to check your sender information in the electronic signature. This function is available for Scan to E-mail.
To add an electronic signature to a scanned image:
• In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
• When [Select at Sending] is selected in “Sign E-mail” in “Settings (administrator)”, you can specify whether or not an electronic signature is added each time you send an image. When [Always Enable] is selected, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Place the original.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of E-mail mode.
3. Specify the destination.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Sign E-mail] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the sign E-mail setting: Tap the [Sign E-mail] key to uncheck it.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
How do I encrypt the transmitted data (Scan to E-mail)?
You can encrypt the transmitted data to strengthen security. This function is available for Scan to E-mail.
To encrypt transmitted data:
• In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings].
• When [Select at Sending] is selected in “Encrypt E-mail” in “Settings (administrator)”, you can specify whether or not the data is encrypted each time you send an image. When [Always Enable] is selected, the setting cannot be changed.
1. Place the original.
2. Tap the mode display to switch to the initial screen of E-mail mode.
3. Specify the destination.
• Data encryption is not possible when the address is directly entered.
• Encrypted data can only be sent to an address for which you have registered a user certificate. Register a user certificate for the address in “Settings (Web version)” – [Address Book] → [E-mail] → “User Certificate”. Only one E-mail address can be registered for an address that has a user certificate.
• If the “Disable sending to the addresses which cannot be encrypted.” checkbox is checked in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [S/MIME Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Encryption Settings], addresses without a user certificate cannot be selected. When the checkmark is removed, the data is sent without encryption.
4. Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Encrypt E-mail] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key.
To cancel the encryption setting: Tap the [Encrypt E-mail] key to remove the checkmark.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original.
How do I send a scanned document by Gmail (Gmail Link Function)?
Gmail Connector is a function for sending scanned documents by e-mail via the Gmail server using a Google account. To use Gmail Connector, you must log in using an account that has a Gmail address in the format “***@Gmail.com”.
Before using Gmail link function:
• System settings: Enable the “Gmail” setting in “Settings (Administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [External Service Connect] → [E-mail Connect Settings].
• Add the Gmail icon to the home screen:
1. Tap [Edit Home] on the action panel.
2. In home edit mode, tap an unused shortcut key.
3. Tap the [Gmail] key.
4. Tap [Exit Home Edit Mode] on the action panel. You will exit home edit mode and return to the home screen.
Sending a scanned document by Gmail link function:
1. Tap the [Gmail] key in the home screen. The Gmail login screen appears.
2. Enter your Google account information. The settings screen appears.
3. Select the address of the recipient and scan settings.
4. To view a preview of the scanned image, tap the [Preview] key.
5. Tap the [Start] key. The sent e-mail is managed in “Sent Mail” of Gmail.
How do I send a scanned document by Exchange (Exchange Link Function)?
Exchange link function is a function for sending scanned documents by e-mail using Exchange server and Exchange Online offered by Microsoft Corporation. You can connect to “Microsoft Exchange Server 2010/2013” or “Exchange Online (Cloud Service)”.
Before using Exchange link function:
• System settings:
To connect to Exchange Server: Enter the host name (FQDN) of the Exchange server in “Hostname” of “Settings (Administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [External Service Connect] → [E-mail Connect Settings]→[Exchange].
To connect to Exchange Online: Select “Use Exchange Online” in Settings (administrator) -“System Settings”→”Network Settings”→”External Service Connect”→”E-mail Connect Settings”→”Exchange”.
• Add the Exchange Connector icon to the home screen:
1. Tap [Edit Home] on the action panel.
2. In home edit mode, tap an unused shortcut key.
3. Tap the [Exchange (E-Mail)] key.
4. Tap [Exit Home Edit Mode] on the action panel. Exit home edit mode and return to the home screen.
Sending a scanned document by Exchange:
1. Tap the [Exchange (E-Mail)] key in the home screen. The Exchange login screen appears.
2. Enter the user name and password used to connect to the Exchange server or the Exchange Online. The settings screen appears.
3. Select the address of the recipient and scan settings.
4. To view a preview of the scanned image, tap the [Preview] key.
5. Tap the [Start] key. The sent e-mail is managed in “Sent Mail” of Exchange.
What settings are available on the Gmail/Exchange link function settings screen?
This screen allows you to enter recipient settings, the e-mail subject, a message, and the name of the file to be attached. You can also change the account used to log in and select advanced scan settings.
Recipient settings: Enter the desired recipient addresses in the To, Cc, and Bcc text boxes. To enter multiple addresses, separate the addresses by commas. You can also search for addresses in the address book.
Search screen: You can tap the search icon next to the To, Cc, and Bcc text boxes to search for a saved address. Enter the text you want to find in the text box and tap [Search Start]. A list of the addresses that begin with the entered text will appear. You can select multiple addresses from the list. When searching for an address, you can switch between the regular address book and a global address book. To search again, enter the text you want to find in the text box and tap [Search Again].
Checking an address: You can tap the [Address List] key to show the list of addresses to be used. You can check the addresses in To, Cc, and Bcc. You can also remove addresses from the list. To remove an address, select the address and tap the [Delete] key. When a contact is selected in the list, no additional contacts can be directly entered. When an address is entered in To, Cc, or Bcc, a clear all (X) icon appears. To cancel all addresses that are displayed, tap the clear all icon.
Subject, message, and file name settings: Enter a subject for the e-mail, a message, and the file name of the scanned image to be attached.
Changing the login account: You can change the account currently used for login to a different account. Tap the [Switch Accounts] key to open the Gmail or Exchange login screen, and enter the user name and password of the account that you want to use.
Scan settings (Details screen): To select advanced scan settings, tap the [Detail] key. The scan settings below can be selected (refer to specific pages in the PDF for details on each):
Colour Mode
Resolution
Format (including Colour/Greyscale and B/W tabs with various PDF, TIFF, XPS, OCR options)
Original (Scan Size, Image Orientation, Duplex Setup)
Job Build
Blank Page Skip
How do I print Image Sending Activity Reports for Internet Fax?
Print a log of recent image sending activities (date, name of destination, time required, result, and other items). The Image Sending Activity Report contains information that is useful in dealing with problems, such as the types of errors that occurred. The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report. You can have the machine print the Image Sending Activity Report each time the number of transactions reaches 201, or at a specified time (once a day only).
The contents of the Image Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted.
To configure the image sending activity report: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Internet Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Activity Report Print Select Setting].
What do the messages in the result column of an Internet Fax transaction or activity report mean?
Error types and other information are printed in the result column of transaction and activity reports. When a transaction or activity report is printed, check the result of the transaction in the result column and take action as needed.
| Print Page | Description |
|---|---|
| OK | The transaction was completed normally. |
| Cancel | A transmission was stopped while in progress, or a reserved transmission job was cancelled. |
| FULL | The memory became full during reception. |
| Rejected | An Internet fax was sent from a party that is blocked. |
| Report Wait | Transmission confirmation was enabled, but transmission confirmation was not received within the set time. |
| NG LIMIT | Transmission was not possible because the file size exceeded the machine’s file size limit setting. |
| An e-mail was received, however, the attached file was not a TIFF-F file or there was no attached file, and thus printing was not possible. | |
| FAIL xx (xxxx) | The transaction failed due to a communication error. First 2 digits of communication error number: Error code from 00 to 99. Last 4 digits of communication error number: Code for use by service technicians. |
| displayed* | Displayed at the receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set. |
| dispatched* | Forwarded elsewhere before being displayed at the receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set. |
| processed* | Processed without being displayed at receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set. |
| deleted* | Message deleted at receiving machine when delivery confirmation is set. |
| denied* | Receiving machine refused to notify sending machine of message processing content when delivery confirmation is set. |
| failed* | An abnormal condition occurred when delivery confirmation is set. |
* If the receiving machine is a SHARP machine, the receiving machine will return “dispatched” if the fax was received normally, or “processed” if reception failed. When delivery confirmation is set for Internet Fax, the disposition field value indicated on the delivery confirmation return e-mail appears.
How does the machine receive Internet faxes automatically?
The Internet fax function periodically connects to the mail server (POP3 server) and checks whether or not Internet faxes have been received. When faxes have been received, the faxes are automatically retrieved and printed. In the default setting, this function checks for reception once every five minutes.
• If faxes will be received at night, keep the main power switch of the machine in the “ON” position.
• If the machine is out of paper or there is no paper that matches the size of the received fax, a message will appear in the touch panel. Follow the instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper.
• You can print the received Internet fax data at the specified time.
• You can print the received Internet fax data when a password has been entered (Hold setting for received data print).
• You can print, forward, or save the received Internet fax data after checking it.
1. The machine rings and fax reception begins automatically. A beep sounds when reception ends.
2. The fax is automatically printed.
How do I receive Internet faxes manually?
If the interval for checking for received faxes is somewhat long and you wish to check immediately, you can manually initiate reception. The [Receive] key can be tapped only when POP3 server settings are configured in the Setting mode (administrator). Tap the [Receive] key to connect to the mail server and retrieve received faxes.
How do I print a PIN code-protected fax (Hold setting for received data print)?
Enable this setting to have faxes received and stored in memory without being printed. To print the faxes, a PIN Code must be entered. When this function is used, a PIN Code entry screen appears in the touch panel when a fax is received.
To enable the hold setting for received data print: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Hold Setting for Received Data Print].
When the previously programmed 4-digit PIN Code is entered using the numeric keys, printing begins. When the [Cancel] key is tapped, the PIN Code entry screen closes; however, the data in memory key will blink in the touch panel. The PIN Code entry screen will reappear when you tap the blinking key or change modes.
• To display the received data list screen after entering the PIN Code: In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting].
• To transfer received data to another machine: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings].
You can check the received data image on the touch panel before printing.
• The received faxes will be stored in memory regardless of whether they are received automatically or manually.
• When the received data is transferred to another machine, data stored in memory is also transferred. At that time, the same PIN Code entry screen will appear as for printing. Forwarding will not take place unless the PIN Code is entered.
How do I print received fax data at a specified time?
This function allows you to print received data at a specified time. For stress-free printing, you should avoid printing large numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print.
Important points:
• The printed data is automatically deleted from memory.
• If the power is turned off at the specified time, printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on.
• This function can be specified when the Received Data Image Check Setting is enabled.
• If Hold Setting for Received Data Print is enabled, this function cannot be used.
To print received data at the specified time:
In “Settings”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Time Specified Output of Received Data].
To disable the hold setting for received data print:
In “Settings (administrator)”, disable this function using [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Hold Setting for Received Data Print].
How can I check the image of received fax data before printing?
You can check the image of received data on the touch panel before printing. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in “Settings (administrator)”. *The factory default setting is disabled.
Note:
• Depending on the size of the received data, part of the check image on the touch panel may not appear.
• The received data list can also be shown in the job status screen that appears when you tap the job status display. The received data can be forwarded, deleted, or saved from Received Data List.
When data is received, an icon is shown at the top of the screen.
Steps to check the image:
1. In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] key. The received data is listed.
Alternatively, you can display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping [Check Received Data] on the action panel of Job Status screen.
2. Tap the key of the received data you wish to check, and tap [Check Image] on the action panel. This displays the received data image.
3. A preview image is an image for the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result. Tap the image you wish to print, and tap [Print] on the action panel. The machine starts printing the image.
• [Select All Page]: Selects all displayed images.
• [Release All Page]: Cancels all images that have been selected by “Select All Page”.
• Use +/- keys to enlarge or reduce an image.
• Use rotation keys to rotate image counterclockwise or clockwise.
Additional options on the action panel:
• Tap the thumbnail icon to show thumbnails of received images (Thumbnail screen). The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.
• To delete a received image, tap [Delete] on the action panel.
• To transfer the selected received image, tap [Forward to Other Address] on the action panel.
• To save the selected received image, tap the [File] key. (On certain models like MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
• Tap [Erase Specified Range] on the action panel to delete unwanted area of the image. Specify the image area you wish to delete in the Erase Specified Range screen.
How do I forward received Internet fax data (Fax Data Forward)?
When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received Internet faxes are forwarded to another previously registered Internet fax address (including direct SMTP).
Important points:
• Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.
• If some pages of a fax that is being forwarded were successfully printed, only those pages that were not printed will be forwarded.
• If forwarding was not successful because the transmission was cancelled or a communication error occurred, the faxes that were to be forwarded will return to the print queue on the machine.
• If a PIN Code entry screen appears after tapping the [OK] key, “Hold Setting for Received Data Print” has been enabled. Enter the PIN Code using the numeric keys to begin forwarding.
Steps to forward received Internet fax data:
1. Tap the [Settings] key on the Home screen.
2. Select the [System Settings] key and tap the [Image Send Settings] key.
3. Tap the [Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)] key.
4. To start forwarding, tap the [Execute] key of “Forward Received Data” in “I-Fax Settings”.
How do I forward received data to preset destinations (Inbound Routing Settings)?
Received Internet faxes can be automatically forwarded to a fax destination number, an Internet fax address, an e-mail address, a file server address, a desktop address, or a network folder address. Received data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed.
In setting mode (Web version), configure the inbound routing settings. This explanation assumes that the setting mode (Web version) has been accessed with administrator rights.
Quickly set whether or not to forward data for each forwarding table:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Administration Settings] → [Inbound Routing], and tap [Enable]/[Disable] on the displayed forwarding table to switch the settings.
Important points:
• When faxes forwarded using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be printed on the faxes. (“Receiving Date & Time Print” is disabled.)
• The received data is not forwarded to a hyperlink destination that is registered in the specified address.
• A direct SMTP address cannot be specified as a forwarding destination.
Steps to configure inbound routing:
1. In “Settings (Web version)”, click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Administration Settings].
2. In “Inbound Routing”, select [Enable] and click the [Submit] button.
• Users without administrator rights can be prohibited from storing, editing, and deleting forwarding tables in this screen, and from specifying which table is used. To do so, set the checkboxes for: Disable Registration of Forward Table, Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table, Disabling of Forward Condition Change to checked.
• Specify in [Print Style Setting] whether or not to have the machine print the faxes to forward when inbound routing is enabled. After the settings are completed, be sure to click the [Submit] button.
– [Always Print]: Always prints received data before forwarding the data.
– [Print at Error]: Prints received data only when an error prevents forwarding.
– [Save Only at Error]: Saves received data only when an error prevents forwarding. For the saved data, the error address can be confirmed and the data can be resent.
3. Click [Sender Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] menu in the “Settings (Web version)”.
4. Enter the sender address or fax number in “Internet Fax Address” or “Fax Number” as appropriate, and click the [Add to List] button. The sender address or number you entered will be added to the “Address to be Entered” list.
• Enter the address directly (maximum of 1500 characters) or select the address from a global address book by clicking the [Global Address Search] button.
• To store multiple sender addresses or fax numbers, repeat these steps.
• If you wish to have only faxes from specified addresses forwarded, store the desired sender addresses. Send addresses stored here can be selected from a list when you store a forwarding table.
• A maximum of 500 sender numbers/addresses can be stored.
• To delete an entered address, select the address in “Address to be Entered” and click the [Delete] button.
5. When you have finished adding addresses, click the [Submit] button.
6. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the “Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings” menu in the “Settings (Web version)” menu and click the [Add] button.
7. Enter a “Table Name”. (A maximum of 50 forwarding tables can be stored.)
8. Select the sender whose faxes will be forwarded.
• To forward all received data, select [Forward All Received Data].
• To forward only data received from specific senders, select [Forward received data from specified senders only.]. To forward all data except data from specific senders, select [Forward all received data except that from specified senders.]. Select the appropriate senders from the list and click the [Add] button.
(When selecting senders from the “Sender Number/Address Setting” list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key on your keyboard to select multiple senders.)
9. Select the forwarding conditions.
• To always forward received data, select [Always Forward].
• To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward received data only on specified days.] and select the checkbox of the desired day of the week. To specify a time, select the [Set Forwarding Time] checkbox and specify the time.
(Up to three forwarding day and time settings can be set for one forwarding table, and a forwarding destination can be set for each set time. To configure these settings, use the [Forward Condition] tabs to access each setting.)
10. Select the file format. The format can be set separately for each forwarding address (for each of forwarding addresses 1, 2, and 3 in the table).
• Images forwarded in TIFF format may not be displayed correctly in some recipient environments. In this event, change the file format to PDF.
• If the Internet fax address is selected as a recipient, data is forwarded in TIFF regardless of the specified format.
• If a fax number is selected as a recipient, the file format is ignored.
11. Select the recipient from the address book. You can specify multiple registered addresses or telephone numbers from the address book of the machine. Up to 1,000 recipients can be registered for Recipients 1, 2, and 3 in total. When you select the recipients from the address book, up to 400 recipients can be registered for network folder, FTP/Desktop, Internet fax, and fax. (A direct SMTP address cannot be specified as a forwarding destination.)
12. Enter a recipient directly and specify the recipient.
• Specify this information if necessary.
• Enter an E-mail address, an Internet fax address, or a fax number directly and tap the [Add to forwarding destinations] key.
• When you specify an E-mail address or a fax number, you can use the global address search.
• When you specify a fax number, also specify the sending line and international correspondence mode.
• When entering the recipients directly, up to 100 recipients can be registered for E-mail address, network folder, FTP/Desktop, Internet fax, and fax.
13. Click [Submit].
14. Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the “Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings” menu in the “Settings (Web version)” menu.
15. From the forwarding table, select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on Forward Condition].
16. Select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.] from the forwarding table. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 9. If you wish to use different forwarding conditions than those set in step 9, set the forwarding permission settings.
• To use the inbound routing function, enable the forwarding tables that you wish to use from among the stored tables.
• To delete a forwarding table, click the checkbox next to the table name so that it is selected and click [Delete].
17. Click [Submit].
How do I save received faxes to the machine’s hard disk (Inbound Routing)?
(On certain models like MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
Received faxes can be saved to the machine’s Hard disk. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (single) for the saved Internet faxes. You can also receive notification of the storage result or storage folder by E-mail. Received faxes are saved in the following directory: \\MFP\faxreceive
Important points regarding saved faxes:
• Up to 500 files can be stored in one folder as received data.
• The “faxreceive” folder contains files of “Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data”.
• The folder is automatically created.
• The folder name is automatically assigned based on the setting of “Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data” in the received data save settings.
How to save received faxes to the hard disk:
1. In “Settings (administrator)”, click [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Public Folder / NAS Setting]. (Administrator rights required.)
2. Select [Allowed] in “faxreceive:Use of Storage” and click the [Submit] button.
Settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk:
1. In Setting mode (administrator), click [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] → [Inbound Routing (Storage) Settings] → [Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data]. (Administrator rights required.)
• Data that can be saved are received faxes and received Internet faxes. Confidential reception and polling reception faxes cannot be saved.
• Depending on the setting, received faxes that cannot be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box.
How do I forward received data manually?
Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in “Settings (administrator)”. *The factory default setting is disabled. When data is received, an icon is shown at the top of the screen.
Steps to forward received data manually:
1. In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] key. The received data is listed.
(You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping [Check Received Data] on the action panel of Job Status screen.)
2. Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap [Forward to Other Address].
• Tap the thumbnail icon to show thumbnails of received images (Thumbnail screen). The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.
• Multiple sets of received data can be selected.
(When you select a single received data only, you can tap [Check Image] on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.)
3. Select the destination from the Address Book screen, and tap the [Start] key.
How do I save received data (faxes)?
(On certain models like MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.)
Save received faxes in the document filing folder. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in “Settings (administrator)”. *The factory default setting is disabled. When data is received, an icon is shown at the top of the screen.
Steps to save received data:
1. In the System Information, tap the [Event Information] tab and tap the [Check Fax Reception Image] key. The received data is listed.
(You can also display the received data list by tapping the job status display and tapping [Check Received Data] on the action panel of Job Status screen.)
2. Tap the key of the received data you wish to save, and tap [File] on the action panel.
• Tap the thumbnail icon to show thumbnails of received images (Thumbnail screen). The list view or thumbnails view can be changed depending on the setting mode.
• Multiple sets of received data can be selected.
(When you select a single received data only, you can tap [Check Image] on the action panel and check the image on the preview screen.)
3. Set the file information, and tap the [Save] key.
How do I check the status of transmission/reception jobs for Image Send?
When you tap the job status display, jobs are displayed in a list. To check the status of a scanner mode job, select the [Scan] tab. To check the status of an Internet fax job, select the [Internet Fax] tab.
Image send jobs include reception, timer transmission, and data forwarding as well as usual transmission.
For stopping/deleting jobs or priority processing, refer to:
• STOPPING/DELETING A JOB IN PROGRESS OR RESERVED
• PRIORITY PROCESSING OF A RESERVED JOB
• CHECKING A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS
• CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS
For Image Send job operations, see “COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS”.
What do the different statuses mean for completed transmission/reception jobs (Internet Fax)?
A usual transmission job moves to the job list when transmission is completed. Then the status field displays “Send OK”. However, Internet Fax jobs such as reception, timer transmission, retries, and forwarding are displayed in the job status screen as follows:
Reception job:
During Internet Fax receiving, the status field displays “Receiving” in the job queue list. When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays “In Memory”. After Internet Fax printing is completed, the status changes to “Received”.
Timer transmission jobs:
A timer transmission job appears at the end of the job queue list until the specified time is reached. Transmission begins at the specified time. When transmission is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays “Send OK”.
Internet Fax transmission job with reception report request specified:
An Internet Fax transmission job with a reception report request specified, excluding a direct SMTP transmission job, is placed into the standby state at the bottom of the Job Queue screen after a transmission has been completed. “Report Wait” appears in the status field. The screen changes to the completion screen when a reception report e-mail has been received from the destination.
Reception jobs when the inbound routing settings are enabled:
When the inbound routing settings are enabled, reception jobs are handled as follows depending on the print setting (see FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA TO PRESET DESTINATIONS (INBOUND ROUTING SETTINGS)):
• Received data is not printed: When data is being received, “Receiving” appears in the job queue list. When the reception is completed, the status changes to “Waiting”.
• Received Internet fax is printed: When reception is completed, the status field displays “In Memory” in the completed job list. After the fax is printed, the status changes to “Received”. Then a job is added for which the status field displays “Waiting” in the job queue list. When forwarding the received fax is completed, the field changes to “Forward OK”.
How do I scan from a computer (PC Scan Mode)?
You can install the scanner driver on your computer and use a TWAIN compliant application to scan an image using your computer. Scanning from your computer is most useful for scanning a single original such as a photo, particularly when you want to adjust scan settings as you scan. By contrast, scanning at the machine is most useful for continuous scanning of multiple originals.
An interface standard used for scanners and other image input devices. When the scanner driver is installed on your computer, you can use any TWAIN-compliant application to scan an image.
Important points:
• For the procedures for installing the scanner driver and configuring settings, see the Software Setup Guide.
• This function cannot be used when it has been disabled using “Disable Scan Function” in the system settings (administrator).
• The procedures for selecting the scanner driver and starting scanning vary depending on the TWAIN-compliant application. For more information, see the manual for the application or Help.
• When a large image is scanned at high resolution, the amount of data will be very large and scanning will take a long time. Be sure to select appropriate scan settings for the original (text, photo, etc.).
• A print job cannot be printed while remote PC scan is in progress. The print job will print when remote PC scan ends.
• Remote PC scan cannot be performed while a print job is in progress.
As an example, the procedure for scanning from the “Sharpdesk” application is explained below.
[At the machine]
Prohibit PC Scan: To prohibit sending when a fax number or address is manually entered, or to enable the hold setting for received data print, in “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disabling of PC Scan].
1. Place the original. Place the original face up in the document feeder tray, or face down on the document glass.
2. Tap the [PC Scan] mode icon to switch to PC Scan mode. If the [PC Scan] mode icon does not appear, tap the arrow to move the screen. (When PC scan mode is selected, only the [Exit] key displayed in the touch panel can be used on the machine; no other keys can be used.)
[At your computer]
3. Start the TWAIN-compliant application on your computer and select [Select Scanner] from the [File] menu.
4. Select the scanner driver of the machine.
(1) Select [SHARP MFP TWAIN K].
(2) Click the [Select] button.
5. Select [Acquire Image] from the [File] menu. The scanner driver opens.
6. Preview the image.
(1) Select the location where the original is placed (“Scanning Source” menu):
• If the original is a one-sided original and is placed in the document feeder tray, select [SPF(Simplex)].
• If the original is a 2-sided original and is placed in the document feeder tray, select [SPF(Duplex – Book)] or [SPF(Duplex – Tablet)] depending on whether the original is a book-style or tablet-style original. In addition, select [Left edge is fed first] or [Top edge is fed first] depending on the orientation of the original.
(2) Select scan settings:
“Scanning Mode” menu: Switch between the “Standard” screen and the “Professional” screen. In the “Standard” screen, select “Monitor”, “Photo”, “FAX” or “OCR” depending on the original type and your scanning purpose. If you wish to change the initial settings of any of the four buttons or select the resolution or other advanced settings, change to the “Professional” screen.
“Image Area” menu: Select the scan area. If “Auto” is selected, the original size detected by the machine will be scanned. You can also set the scanning area in the preview window with your mouse.
(3) Click the [Preview] button. The preview image will appear in the scanner driver. If you are not satisfied with the preview image, repeat (2) and (3). If the [Zoom Preview] checkbox is selected before the [Preview] button is clicked, the selected area will be enlarged in the preview window. If the checkmark is removed, the preview image will return to normal. Note that if SPF is selected in the “Scanning Source” menu, the [Zoom Preview] function cannot be used.
• For further information on the scan settings, click the ? button in the preview image screen of step 7 (see below) to open scanner driver Help.
• If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only one original page will be scanned for the preview image. If you wish to include that original in the scan, return it to the document feeder tray.
7. Select scanning settings while viewing the image.
[Rotate] button: Each time this button is clicked, the preview image rotates 90 degrees. This lets you change the orientation of the image without picking up and placing the original again. The image file will be created using the orientation that appears in the preview window.
[Image Size] button: Click this button to specify the scan area by entering numerical values. Pixels, mm, or inches can be selected for the units of the numerical values. If a scanning area has already been specified, the entered numbers will change the area relative to the top left corner of the specified area.
Auto-set button: When a preview image is displayed and a scanning area is not specified, you can click the button to automatically set the scanning area to the entire preview image.
• For further information on the scan settings, click ? button to open scanner driver Help.
• If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray, only the top page will be previewed. The top page will be delivered to the original exit tray. Be sure to return the previewed page to the document feeder tray before previewing again or scanning.
8. Click the [Scanning] button. Scanning begins. The image appears in your application. Assign a file name to the scanned image and save it as appropriate in the software application you are using.
[At the machine]
9. Tap the [Exit] key.
10. Tap the [Yes] key (if prompted to finish PC scan mode).
What is Metadata Delivery (Data Entry) and how is it prepared?
When the application integration module kit is installed, metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) is generated based on pre-stored information and transmitted separately from an image file that is generated for sending a scanned image. The metadata file is created in XML format.
By linking the metadata with applications such as document management software, a workflow application, or an encryption server, a sophisticated document solution environment can be built.
Using the application integration module kit, information on a generated image file can be entered at the touch panel and transmitted along with the image as an XML file.
Image file and Metadata (XML file) can be sent to various destinations:
• Scan to E-mail
• Scan to FTP
• Scan to Network Folder
• Scan to Desktop (Client Computer that Uses Network Scanner Tool)
The server can be a Fax server, document management software, workflow application, and encryption server, etc.
What settings are required in the setting mode (Web version) for Metadata Delivery?
To configure the settings related to metadata, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Metadata Settings] → [Metadata Entry] in “Settings (administrator)”. (Administrator rights are required.) Enable metadata delivery.
Storing Metadata Sets:
Store the items (the metadata set) to write to the XML file that will be generated during scanning. Up to 10 metadata items can be configured in a metadata set. A stored metadata set can be selected at the time of transmission.
Addresses specified in “Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry” when a metadata set is stored can be selected as transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, or a global address book search. (Addresses for which metadata entry is not allowed cannot be specified as transmission destinations.)
METADATA DELIVERY USING SCAN TO DESKTOP:
When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name on the PC.
When Network Scanner Tool is used as a means of sending a metadata file to a third party application, this setting must be disabled to allow cross referencing between the image file and XML file by means of the file name generated by the computer. (When setting the file name in [Options ▼], to ensure that an existing file on the PC is not overwritten by a transmitted file of the same name, be sure to configure the file name so that name duplication will not occur; for example, by including a unique extension (the date, etc.) in the generated file name. If the file name setting is left blank, the machine will automatically generate a unique file name.)
It is recommended that you use Network Scanner Tool to receive metadata.
Using third party applications:
Various types of third party applications exist. Some applications can start automatically from Network Scanner Tool and some cannot.
When the auto-run function of an application is enabled, Network Scanner Tool will start the application with the “.exe” command using the image file name as a parameter. For example, when Network Scanner Tool is set to start application “APP.EXE”, the “APP.EXE IMG.TIF” command is applied. If a file was specified to receive metadata, the metadata file name cannot be specified at the same time using the command to start the application directly. (However, the metadata file is stored in the same folder as IMG.TIF in the computer.)
How do I transmit metadata?
Select a metadata set, enter each item, and perform metadata delivery.
Metadata delivery is performed using the document filing function. The [Data Entry] tab appears in the transmission settings screen of document filing mode to allow metadata delivery. In addition, perform metadata delivery using document filing in [Metadata Entry] in “Settings (Web version).”
Important Points:
• In data entry mode, configure metadata settings to perform metadata delivery. To perform transmission without sending metadata, switch the screen from data entry mode to a different mode and then perform transmission.
• When metadata settings have been configured or an address is specified in data entry mode, it will not be possible to switch to another mode.
• Before configuring metadata settings, specify addresses in all available modes. After metadata settings have been configured, specify only addresses in modes that are allowed in the selected metadata.
Steps to transmit metadata:
1. Tap the [Data Entry] icon on the [Home Screen], and tap [Metadata Set]. (If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3. If no metadata sets have been stored, Metadata Entry is unavailable. Store metadata set in the setting mode (Web version) before performing transmission.)
2. Tap the key for the desired metadata set.
3. The keys of the items stored in the metadata set will appear. Tap the key of the item that you wish to enter.
4. Tap the key of the value that you wish to enter, and tap the [OK] key. To directly enter the metadata value, tap the [Direct Entry] key. On the soft keyboard screen that appears, tap the [OK] key. You will return to the screen shown in step 3. After the settings are completed, tap OK. (To cancel the selection of the metadata value: Tap the [Clear] key.)
5. Configure image or other settings, and perform the scan send procedure.
• Configure job detail settings and then start transmission using the same operations as in other modes.
• When directly entering an address, tap [Touch to input Address] to display the screen for selecting an address type. If the address type such as E-mail, Internet Fax, Fax, Network Folder, or Direct SMTP is selected, the address type entry screen appears.
What are the types of metadata fields included in the XML file?
The following three types of metadata are included in the XML file that is transmitted.
• Data automatically generated by the machine: These data are always included in the XML file and are automatically stored on your PC.
• Previously defined fields: These fields are automatically recognized by the machine and assigned to appropriate XML tags. These fields can be selected, and can only be included in the XML file if they are enabled in the setting mode (Web version).
• User defined fields: Custom fields are added to the XML file. These fields can be selected and are defined in the setting mode (Web version).
If a defined metadata field is one of the following fields, a message will appear informing you that the field cannot be filled in. Enter appropriate information in the related items of the send settings.
| Name entered in metadata fields | Description | Where entered |
|---|---|---|
| formName | Name of the user who sent the job. If the name is not entered as metadata, the sender name determined by the usual rules for determining the sender name will be applied as metadata. | [Reply-To] (sender name of selected sender) |
| replyTo | E-mail address to which the transmission result will be sent. | [Reply-To] (E-mail address of selected sender) |
| documentSubject | Job name appearing in the E-mail “Subject” line, or job name on the fax cover sheet. When the user enters a [Subject] in the send settings screen in the touch panel, the entered value is applied as metadata. | [Subject] (Blank until a value is set in the send settings screen.) |
| fileName | Enter the file name of the image to be sent. | [File Name] (Only when the [Allow Custom Filenames] checkbox is selected in the metadata entry screen in the setting mode (Web version)) (Blank until a value is set in the send settings screen.) |
How are Metadata Settings configured?
If the Application Integration Kit is installed, you can control the metadata to be used in other applications. The stored metadata is displayed on the metadata settings page. You can add a metadata, and edit or delete an existing metadata.
• [Add] key: Adds a new metadata set.
• List: Lists the currently stored metadata sets.
Metadata Delivery: Enables or disables the metadata delivery function.
Metadata Set Registration: When you tap the [Add] key, the registration screen appears. Up to 10 items can be stored.
Edit or Delete Metadata Set: When you tap a title on the list, the edit screen appears for that metadata set. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the metadata set.
Settings:
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Metadata Set Name | Enter a metadata name. |
| Metadata Destination | Select a destination where you wish to send the image and metadata. |
| Allow Custom Filenames | Enable or disable to edit the name of image file and XML file to be sent by the metadata send job. |
| Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry | Set the destination information to be used for metadata transmission. |
| Name | Enter a metadata name to be displayed on the touch panel. |
| XML Tag Name | XML Tag Name |
| Entry Type |
• Direct entry: Allows direct entry of each metadata from the soft keyboard or the numeric keypad. • Metadata list: Allows a selection of metadata from the previously entered data list. You must enter optional values for metadata selection in the input area. Entries must be separated by semicolons or commas. Each option can be comprised of up to 70 characters. • Initial entry by default: Uses a default value as the first value of the entered metadata list. |
| Include MFP Extended Scan Settings in XML File. | When the machine generates metadata automatically, the “metadataSetName”, “userLoginId” (if user authentication is used), “pageSize”, and “imageMode” are added to the metadata. |
| To Be Used as Default | The current metadata set is used as the default. |
What is Document Filing and how is it used?
Document filing saves the original scanned on the machine, transmitted fax image, or print data from a computer on the hard drive of the machine or an external memory device as data. The stored files can be printed or transmitted as required. Editing of the stored files, for example combining, is also possible. (On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.) A PDF file created for PC browsing can be displayed or printed on a computer.
Uses of document filing:
Using the document filing function allows you to additionally print out conference material with the same settings, or print out ledger sheets used for routine tasks as required.
• Additionally printing out conference material with the same settings: Scanning is not necessary. No settings are necessary. Printing only. Settings are stored together with original data.
• Printing out ledger sheets as required: Example: Daily report, Business trip application, Vacation application. Printing only.
TYPES OF DOCUMENT FILING:
There are the following ways to save a file using document filing: [Quick File] and [File] in copy mode or image send mode, and [Scan to HDD] and [Scan to External Memory Device] in document filing mode.
| Quick File | As a copy, image send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard drive. Use this function when you want to quickly and easily store document data without specifying a file name or other information. The stored file can also be used by other people. Do not use this method to save files that you do not want others to use. |
| File | As a copy, image send, or other job is performed, this function saves the document data to the hard drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved to enable efficient file management. A password can also be established. |
| Scan to HDD | This function scans an original and stores it to the hard drive. Like File, various types of information can be appended. |
| Scan to External Memory Device | This function scans an original and stores it in an external memory device such as a USB memory device. Like File, various types of information can be appended. |
What should I know before using Scan to HDD in Document Filing?
Folder types:
Three types of folders are used to store files on the hard drive using the document filing function. Folders on the hard drive are: Quick File Folder, Main Folder, Custom Folder.
• Quick File Folder: Documents scanned using [Quick File] on the action panel are stored in this folder. A user name and file name are automatically assigned to each job.
• Main Folder: Scanned documents are stored in this folder. When you store a job in the Main folder, you can specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name. A password (5 to 32 characters) can also be set when storing a file (“Confidential” save) as required.
• Custom Folder: Folders with custom names are stored inside this folder. Scanned documents are stored in the stored folder. Like the Main folder, a custom folder allows you to specify a previously stored user name and assign a file name when storing a job. Passwords (PIN code: 5 to 8 digit number) can be established for custom folders and for files saved in custom folders. (A maximum of 1000 custom folders can be created on the hard drive.)
Convenient items to store:
When storing a job using [File] in copy mode or image send mode, or [Scan to HDD] in document filing mode, it is convenient to store the items below. These settings are not required when storing a job using [Quick File].
| User Name | This is necessary if you will be assigning a user name to stored files. A user name is also used as a search condition when searching for a file. |
| Custom Folder | The Main folder is initially available as a location for storing files by [File] and [File Store]. Store a custom folder and specify it as a location for storing files. Specify a password for the user folder as required. Enter the PIN Code to use the folder. |
| My Folder | A previously created custom folder can be selected as “My Folder”, or a new folder created as “My Folder”. When “My Folder” has been configured and user authentication is used, “My Folder” will always be selected as the destination of [File] and [File Store]. |
• To store a custom folder for document filing: On the Web page, select “Settings (administrator)” → [Document Operations] → [Document Filing] → [Custom Folder]. On the machine, select “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Document Filing Control] → [Custom Folder].
• To store a user name and specify a folder as “My Folder”: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [User List].
Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored:
Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom folders and in the Main folder:
| Examples of original types | Number of pages* | Number of files |
|---|---|---|
| Full colour original (Text and photo example) Size: A4 | Max. 5700 | Max. 3000 |
| Black & white original (Text) Size: A4 | Max. 13000 |
Number of pages and number of files that can be stored in the Quick File folder:
| Examples of original types | Number of pages* | Number of files |
|---|---|---|
| Full colour original (Text and photo example) Size: A4 | Max. 700 | Max. 1000 |
| Black & white original (Text) Size: A4 | Max. 2000 |
*The indicated numbers are guidelines for the number of pages that can be stored when all pages are full colour, and when all pages are black & white.
Copying in sort mode uses the same memory area as the main folder and custom folder. For this reason, when too much data has been stored in the main folder and custom folder, it may not be possible to perform a large copy job using sort mode. Delete unnecessary files from the main folder and custom folder.
The original types above are examples to make the explanation easier to understand. The actual number of pages and number of files that can be stored will vary depending on the contents of the original images and the settings when the files are stored.
Information added to files:
When saving a file using “File”, add the following information to distinguish it from other files.
| User Name | The user name is required to enter a file ownership and other information. The user name must be registered in advance. |
| File Name | Names a file. |
| Stored to | Specifies a folder to store files. |
| Property |
Sharing: Any user can display and operate files having the “Sharing” property. Protect: Once “Protect” is set, its file cannot be edited, moved, and deleted. No password setting is required. Confidential: You can set a password (5 to 32 characters) for file protection. |
• The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File.
• When you select [Create Downloadable File] in Scan to HDD and save as a confidential file, the properties cannot be changed.
To store a user name: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [User Control] → [User List].
IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING DOCUMENT FILING:
• Files stored using [Quick File] are provided with the “Sharing” property that can be accessed by any person for output and sending. Therefore, do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others using the [Quick File] function.
• When saving a file with [File], you can save it with the “Confidential” property. Set a password for a “Confidential” file to prevent the file from being used by other people. Exercise care to prevent other people from obtaining the password.
• The property of a stored “Confidential” file can be changed to “Sharing” by “Property Change” as required. Do not store sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be used by others.
• Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the disclosure of sensitive information due to manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or File function, or incorrect operation of the Quick File function or File function by the operator who saves the data.
How do I use Document Filing in each mode?
To use Document Filing, select the action panel for each mode. To save data simultaneously with a copy or fax, tap [File] or [Quick File] on the action panel in each mode.
To use Document Filing from the beginning, select the action panel in the Document Filing mode. Tap any one of the keys to scan and save the original (e.g., Scan to HDD, Scan to External Memory Device, FTP to Print, etc.).
• [File] and [Quick File]: These keys may not appear on the action panel depending on the mode or settings. In this case, tap [Others] on the base screen in each mode, and then tap [Quick File] or [File].
• Using document filing in print mode: To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver.
• Using document filing in PC-Fax/PC-I-Fax mode: To use document filing in PC-Fax or PC-I-Fax mode, select document filing settings in the PC-Fax driver. For more information, see Help in the PC-Fax driver.
How do I save files with Document Filing while using another mode (Quick File)?
This function allows you to store an original in copy mode or image send mode as an image file in the Quick File folder of the machine. The image file stored in quick file mode can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to copy the document or transmit it in image send mode without having to locate the original.
As an example, the procedure for using “Quick File” in copy mode is explained below.
• Quick File can be used in normal mode.
• When a file is stored using Quick File, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second (Example: Copy_02022018_112030)
Save location: Quick File Folder
When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected.
Only the file name and location of a file stored in the Quick File folder can be changed.
To delete all files in the Quick File folder with the exception of protected files: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Delete All Quick Files]. Configure settings to have all files deleted when the power is turned on as required.
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
2. Change to normal mode and tap [Quick File] on the action panel so that it is selected (checkbox appears). (When a message relating to saving confidential information appears, tap the [OK] key.)
3. Start a copy or image sending. When the function is executed, the image data of the original is stored in the Quick File folder.
To prevent accidental saving of the file, the message “The scanned data is stored in the quick file folder.” appears for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [Start] key is tapped. To change the message display time, in “Settings (administrator)” → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Message Time Setting].
To cancel Quick File: Tap [Quick File] to uncheck it.
How do I save files with Document Filing while using another mode (File)?
Tapping the [File] key of the document filing function when printing or transmitting an original in each mode allows you to store the original in the Main folder or stored Custom folder as a file simultaneously with printing or transmission. The stored file can be retrieved at a later time, allowing you to recopy or resend the original without having to locate it.
As an example, the procedure for using “File” in copy mode is explained below.
• File can be used in normal mode.
• When a file is stored using File without appending file information, the following user name and file name are automatically assigned to the file.
User Name: User Unknown
File Name: Mode_Month-Day-Year_Hour-Minute-Second (Example: Copy_02022018_112030)
Save location: Main Folder
Steps:
1. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. (There are also cases where settings are required to be made before a preview is carried out.)
2. Change to normal mode and tap [File] on the action panel to specify the file information. To select the user name, file name, folder, and property setting, see “File Information”. After configuring the above settings, you will return to this screen. Go to the next step. If you do not wish to assign a user name or other information to the file, go to the next step.
To save on the HDD:
• Changing the property
• Specifying a user name
• Assigning a file name
• Specifying the folder
• Creating PDF for PC browsing
To save in an external memory device:
• Assigning a file name
• Specifying the folder
• Creating PDF for PC browsing
3. Tap [OK]. You will return to the base screen of copy mode.
4. Select copy settings and then tap the [Start] key. Simultaneously with starting copy, the original is stored as a file. The selected copy settings are also saved.
How do I configure File Information for Document Filing (Property, User Name, File Name, Folder, PDF for PC browsing)?
Specifying a property, user name, file name, and folder makes it easier to manage and search for a file. In addition, when [Confidential] is selected for Property and a password is established, other people will not be able to view the file without permission.
Changing the property:
A protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being moved, or automatically or manually deleted. Three properties are available for saved files: “Sharing”, “Protect”, and “Confidential”.
• Sharing: A “Sharing” file can be changed to “Protect” or “Confidential” using “Property Change” in the Job Settings.
• Protect: “Protect” does not require setting of a password, but prevents a file from being moved, deleted or edited. A password cannot be established.
• Confidential: To protect a “Confidential” file, a password is set. (The password must be entered to retrieve the file.) When a file is saved in encrypted PDF format, the file property is automatically set to “Confidential”.
Restrictions on changing the property:
• A file that is set to “Sharing” can be changed to “Protect” or “Confidential” as required. However, a “Sharing” file that is saved in the Quick File folder can only be changed to “Protect”.
• A file that is set to “Protect” can be changed to “Sharing” or “Confidential” as required. However, a “Protect” file that is saved in the Quick File folder can only be changed to “Sharing”.
• A file that is saved in the Quick File folder cannot be changed to “Confidential”. If the file is moved to the Main folder or a custom folder, the property can be changed to “Confidential”.
• Two properties cannot be selected for a single file.
Default property settings for filing: To have “Confidential” be enabled by default when using Filing, select [Confidential] in “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings]→[Document Filing Settings]→[Condition Settings] → [Default Mode Settings]. Administrator permission settings for confidential files.
Administrator Authority Setting: For files and user folders that have a password, this setting allows the administrator password to be entered instead of the password when accessing the file or folder. Also, you can change the preset ratio if necessary. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings]→[Document Filing Settings]→[Condition Settings] → [Administrator Authority Setting].
To change property:
1. Select [Property] in the File Information screen.
2. When you have selected [Confidential], enter a password (5 to 32 characters). Every time you enter one digit, “*” is displayed.
Specifying a user name:
1. Tap the [User Name] text box. When user authentication is used, the user name that was used for login is automatically selected. In this case, this step is not necessary. (The user name must first be stored by selecting [User Control] in “Settings (administrator)” →[User List].)
2. Tap the key of the user name. Alternatively, you can select a user name by tapping the [Call with Registration Number] key and entering the user number. The user number must be first set by selecting [User Control] in “Settings (administrator)” →[User List].
3. Tap [OK]. The system goes back to the screen of step 1 to display the selected user name.
Assigning a file name:
A file name can be assigned to the file.
1. Tap the [File Name] text box and enter the file name. Enter a file name using up to 30 characters.
File Name notes:
• If a file name that already exists is specified, a tilde and a serial number are added after the file name and this file is saved as a different file. The file name is not case-sensitive. For example, if the “test.txt” file already exists and you specify the “TEST.TXT” file, the file will be saved as “TEST.TXT~1” file.
• If the length of the file name exceeds the limit, excess characters will be omitted and a serial number will be added to the end of the file name.
Specifying the folder:
Specify the folder for storing the file.
1. Tap the [Stored to] text box. If a user name with a “My Folder” setting is selected, “My Folder” of that user will automatically be selected.
2. Tap the key of the folder where you want to store the file, and tap [OK]. If a password has been set for the folder, a password entry screen appears. Enter the password (5 to 8 digit number) using the numeric keys and tap the [OK].
Creating PDF for PC browsing:
Tap the [Create PDF for PC Browsing] checkbox to check it, and a public PDF for PC browsing will be created when the file is saved.
Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing: You can set the initial file format of public PDF or the file for download which is created during execution of each job. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing].
B/W: Compression Mode (None, MH (G3), MMR (G4))
Colour/Greyscale: Compression Ratio (Low, Middle, High)
Settings during each job execution: When each of copy, printer, scanner, Internet fax, fax, or stored scan data is executed, you can specify to create a public PDF and to set the resolution of public PDF.
How do I save document data only (Scan to HDD)?
Storing from Easy Scan:
1. Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen.
2. Tap [Scan to HDD/USB].
3. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
4. Tap [Scan to HDD]. (When equipped with the OCR function, you can tap the [Auto Set] key to automatically set appropriate scan settings for the original.)
5. To select settings, tap the key of each desired setting.
6. Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start scanning. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended.
Storing from Document Filing:
1. Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key on the Home screen.
2. Tap [Scan to HDD] on the action panel.
3. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
4. Check the file name and save location, and tap keys for any settings you want to select (e.g., Colour Mode, Resolution, Original, File Format, Options, Exposure, Job Build, Scan Size, Store Size).
• When the [Create Downloadable File] checkbox is checked, the [File Format] key is greyed out and cannot be used. You will not be able to download scan data in the specified format from the Web page.
• For original scan settings, see the explanation of the copy or image send mode.
• If the original is 2-sided, be sure to tap the [Original] key and then tap the [2-Sided Tablet] key or the [2-Sided Book] key as appropriate for the original.
• To set a user name, file attribute, or password, tap [Options].
• When a file is created with [Create Downloadable File] disabled, this setting cannot be enabled later.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended.
What are the default settings for Scan Save?
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] to configure the following:
• Image Orientation: Changes the image orientation.
• Default Colour Mode Settings: Selects the default settings for black & white and colour when Scan to HDD is used.
– Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Mode: This setting disables selection of B/W settings from the base screen when the colour mode is set to Auto.
• Default Exposure Settings: Default exposure settings for document filing can be configured. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select [Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels.
• Default Original Image Type: Select the original type beforehand to enable scanning at a resolution suitable for the original.
• Initial Resolution Setting: One of the following resolutions can be selected for the default resolution for transmission.
• Scan Complete Sound Setting: Adjusts the volume of the beep that sounds when scanning ends. The beep can also be turned off.
• Default Output Tray: Selects the default output tray for printing a file stored by Scan to HDD. The items that appear will vary depending the machine configuration.
• Erase Width Adjustment: This is used to set the default erase width for erase function. Specify a value from 0 mm (0″) to 20 mm (1″) in increments of 1 mm (1/8″) for both edge erase and centre erase.
• Card Shot Settings: This is used to set the default original size for the card shot function. Specify a value from 20 mm (1″) to 210 mm (8-1/2″) in increments of 1 mm (1/8″) for both the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions of the original.
– Fit to Store Size: Always displays the [Fit to Store Size] key on the card shot screen.
How do I save files in an external memory device?
To prohibit saving to an external memory device: In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Storing to External Memory Device]. Disables to store to the external memory device.
Storing from Easy Scan:
1. Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen.
2. Tap [Scan to HDD/USB].
3. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
4. Tap [Scan to USB]. (When equipped with the OCR function, you can tap the [Auto Set] key to automatically set appropriate scan settings for the original.)
5. To select settings, tap the key of each desired setting.
6. Tap the [Colour Start] or [B/W Start] key to start scanning. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended.
Storing from Document Filing:
1. Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key on the Home screen.
2. Tap [Scan to External Memory Device] on the action panel.
3. Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass.
4. Check the file name and save location, and tap keys for any settings you want to select.
• For original scan settings, see the explanation of the copy or image send mode.
• If the original is 2-sided, be sure to tap the [Original] key and then tap the [2-Sided Tablet] key or the [2-Sided Book] key as appropriate for the original.
5. Tap the [Start] key to start scanning. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and file store have ended.
Scan to USB memory device (direct connection):
1. Connect the USB memory device to the machine.
2. When a screen for selecting the action appears, tap [Scan to External Memory Device].
• To select detailed settings in normal mode, select the [Perform Detail Setting] checkbox.
(If the machine/device save screen is open, this screen will not appear.)
3. Tap the [Colour Start] key or [B/W Start] key. To check a preview of a document, tap the [Preview] key.
4. After scanning all originals, tap the [Read-End] key. (When you scan the original using the automatic document feeder, this screen does not appear.)
5. Check the [Sending data has been completed.] message, and remove the USB memory device from the machine.
What is the sequence for using a stored file in Document Filing?
The screens and procedures differ depending on whether or not user authentication is enabled.
Also in setting mode (Web version), you can use document filing. In setting mode (Web version), click [Document Operations] → [Document Filing], and then click the folder that contains the file you wish to use. You can also check a preview of a stored file in setting mode (Web version).
Sequence:
1. Switch to document filing mode.
2. Select the file that you wish to retrieve. When the folder is selected, the files in the folder will appear. Select the file that you wish to retrieve. Select a file from the thumbnail images of the stored files or retrieve a file using the search function.
3. Select an operation item. Select the desired operation and configure settings (e.g., File Printing, File Transmission, File Moving, Delete File, File Image Checking, File Merging). (When retention is selected on the printer, reset items that cannot be set for retention do not appear.)
What are the Document Output Options for stored files?
The use of a stored file can be allowed or prohibited by operation type and by the mode from which the file was stored. The items that appear will vary depending on the functions that have been added to the machine.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Copy | For each mode, select whether or not copying of stored files is allowed. |
| For each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed. | |
| Scan Send | For each mode, select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed. |
| Internet Fax Send(Incl. PC-I-Fax) | Select whether or not I-Fax transmission of stored files is allowed. |
| Fax Send(Incl. PC-Fax) | For each mode, select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed. |
| Scan to HDD | For each mode, select whether or not stored files is allowed. |
How do I use the File Selection Screen in Document Filing?
The file selection screen can be displayed in “List” format or “Thumbnail” format to display thumbnail images of files.
List display mode features:
• Switch the file display mode between list and thumbnail.
• Return to the base screen of document filing mode.
• Displays the saved files (File Name, User Name, Date).
• Switch the file key displayed for each job type.
• Search for a file saved in a folder.
• Displays the functions that can be used (e.g., Change Setting to Print, Move, Check Image, See Detail Information, Print and Delete the Data).
• Reset all settings (CA key).
• Start printing immediately (Print Now key).
• Select or clear all files. Tapping this key switches the key display mode between [Select All] and [Cancel All].
• Tap the hard disk usage status key to display the usage status of the machine’s built-in hard disk drive.
Thumbnail display mode features:
• Switch the file display mode between list and thumbnail.
• Displays thumbnails of the saved files.
• Action panel functions similar to list mode.
Sorting order:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Sort Method Setting]. Selects an order of display files stored in the Main Folder, Custom Folder, and Quick File Folder. Select one of the following settings:
• File Name
• User Name
• Date
How do I select a file to retrieve in Document Filing?
1. Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key. When user authentication is enabled and “My Folder” is configured by selecting [User Control] in “Settings (administrator)” → [User List], the custom folder specified as “My Folder” opens.
2. Tap the key of the folder that contains the desired file. If the folder with a PIN Code is tapped, a PIN Code entry screen will appear. Enter the PIN Code (5 to 8 digit number) using the numeric keys and tap the [OK].
3. Tap the key of the desired file. If the file with a PIN Code is tapped, a PIN Code entry screen will appear. Enter the PIN Code (5 to 32 characters) and tap the [OK].
• Tap the [Print Now] key to printed out the file with the settings used for its storage.
• Tap the [Filter by Job] key to display the keys of a particular mode such as copy or scanner mode, enabling quick data search.
• Tap the [File Name] key, the [User Name] key, or the [Date] key to change the order of display of the files.
• Select [User Control] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Authority Group List]. Then, in authority group setting for the users who are currently logged in, select [Job Settings] → [Document Filing] and enable [Display only the Files of Logged-in Users] to display only files stored by the users who are currently logged in.
How do I print a stored file from Document Filing?
A file stored using document filing can be retrieved and printed when needed. The settings used when the file was stored are also stored, and thus the file can be printed again using those settings. The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings.
• Print settings that are changed by re-manipulation of the file cannot be saved.
• The printing speed may be somewhat slow depending on the resolution and exposure mode settings of the stored file.
• When retention is selected on the printer, reset items that cannot be set for retention do not appear.
Prohibiting of print system settings when reprinting:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disable Text/Stamp functions for Reprinting]. When a stored file is retrieved and printed, the printing functions are disabled. This function prevents an inconsistency of the date between the original data and output data and others.
Process data after the file is printed:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Setting of store/delete after file print]. Select whether or not to save or delete a file after printing.
Quick printing:
Prints a file with the various settings used when it was saved. Select a file and tap the [Print Now] key. To delete data after printing, set the [Print and Delete the Data] checkbox to checked.
Changing settings before printing:
After selecting the desired file:
1. Tap [Change Setting to Print] on the action panel.
2. Change the print settings.
3. Select the [Delete] checkbox (if checked) when needed.
4. Tap the [Start] key. The file will be printed.
How do I perform multi-file printing from Document Filing?
1. Select the keys of the multiple files that you wish to print.
• Confidential files cannot be printed simultaneously with other files.
• A file in the currently selected folder cannot be selected simultaneously with a file in a different folder.
• If the job type is changed with the By Job Display key or the screen is changed by tapping an icon while a file is selected, the selection of the file will be cancelled.
2. Tap [Print] on the action panel.
3. When not printing with the number of copies at data saving, tap the [Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job.] checkbox to set to unchecked. When printing with the number of copies at data saving without specifying copies, go to step 5.
4. Use [+] / [-] to specify the number of copies. As required, directly tap the numeric value display key and change the value using the numeric keys.
5. To delete the file after printing, tap the [Delete] checkbox to set to checked.
6. Tap the [OK] key to start printing.
How do I perform batch printing from Document Filing?
Batch Print Settings:
In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Batch Print Settings]. Set whether or not the [All Users] key and the [User Unknown] key are prohibited in the user name selection screen when printing all files, whether files are sorted by date in newest or oldest order, and whether file names are sorted in ascending or descending order.
Steps for batch printing:
1. Tap the [Batch Print] key.
2. Tap the [User Name] text box.
3. Select the user name. After selecting the user name, tap [OK].
If you have selected [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Batch Print Settings] and disabled the [Selection of [All Users] is not allowed.] checkbox and [Selection of [User Unknown] is not allowed.] checkbox, select the [All Users] key and [User Unknown] key.
If you tap the [All Users] key, all files in the folder (the files of all users) are selected.
If you tap the [User Unknown] key, all files in the folder with no user name specified are selected.
4. If a password has been established, tap the [Password] key. Enter the password (5 to 32 characters) and tap [OK]. Only files that have the same password will be selected. If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the next step.
5. When not printing with the number of copies at data saving, tap the [Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job.] checkbox to set to unchecked. When printing with the number of copies at data saving, go to step 7.
6. Use [+] / [-] to specify the number of copies. As required, directly tap the numeric value display key and change the value using the numeric keys.
7. To automatically delete the file after printing, tap the [Delete] key.
8. Tap the [Start] key to start printing. If there are no files that match the search conditions, you will return to the file list screen. (If [Delete the Data] on the action panel is tapped, all files that match the current search conditions will be deleted.)
How do I delete All Quick Files?
All files in the Quick Save folder except for protected files can be deleted with “Settings (administrator)” – [System Settings] → [Document Filing Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Delete All Quick Files]. However, the state of the machine may prevent some files from being deleted.
• Delete: Tap this key to start deletion of all files immediately.
• Delete quick files at power up. (Protected files excluded): This is used to automatically delete all files in the Quick File Folder (with the exception of protected files) when the [Power] button is turned “On”.
How do I transmit a stored file from Document Filing?
The settings used when the file was stored with document filing are stored, and thus the file can be transmitted using those settings. If needed, you can also change the transmission settings to modify the retrieved file.
After selecting the desired file:
1. Tap [Send] on the action panel.
2. Select settings for sending.
3. Tap the [Start] key.
Important Points:
• A file saved in black and white or greyscale cannot be transmitted in colour.
• A stored print job cannot be transmitted.
• These transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options.
• If any of the following other modes were included in the saved file, the file cannot be transmitted: “Stamp”, “Photo Repeat”, “Multi-Page Enlargement” for copying.
• If any of the following other modes were included in the saved file, the file can be transmitted, but other functions cannot be executed: “Margin Shift”, “Transparency Inserts”, “Book Copy”, “Tab Copy”, “Stamp”, “Centring”
• Depending on the reduction or enlargement ratio used when storing a file, it may not be possible to send the stored file using a selected resolution setting. In this event, try changing the resolution. However, when sending a stored file by Internet fax, transmission may not be possible even if the resolution is changed.
• Files saved in other than Internet Fax mode cannot be sent to an Internet Fax address.
How do I move a stored file in Document Filing?
This changes the file storage location (the file is moved to another folder). A file whose property is “Protect” cannot be moved. To move a protected file, change its property to “Sharing” or “Confidential”.
After selecting the desired file:
1. Tap [Move] on the action panel.
2. Tap the [Move to:] key.
• A file cannot be moved to the Quick File folder.
• To change the file name, tap the [File Name] key.
3. Tap the key of the folder to which you want to move the file. If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (5 to 8 digit number) using the numeric keys and tap the [OK]. (When multiple files are moved, file names cannot be changed.)
4. Tap the [Move] key.
How do I delete a stored file in Document Filing?
Stored files that are no longer required can be deleted. A file whose property is “Protect” cannot be deleted. To delete a protected file, change its property to “Sharing” or “Confidential”.
After selecting the desired file:
1. Tap the [Delete] key.
2. Check the file and then tap the [Yes] key.
How does Automatic Deletion of Files in Document Filing work?
You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted by specifying the folders and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the disclosure of sensitive information and frees space on the hard drive.
Automatic Deletion of File Settings:
Document filing settings are described below. Tap the [Document Filing Settings] key to configure the settings. Time and folder settings can be configured to have files in specified folders (stored by document filing) automatically deleted at a specified time. Up to 3 settings can be stored to be automatically deleted.
The procedure for using this function is as follows:
(1) Select [Setting 1], [Setting 2], or [Setting 3].
(2) Set the time and date for automatic deletion.
(3) Select the desired folder.
(4) Specify whether or not protected files and confidential files are to be deleted.
(5) Enable the stored settings.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Schedule | Select an automatic deletion cycle. • Every Day: Auto deletion every day at the specified time. • Every Week: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the week. • Every Month: Auto deletion at the specified time on the specified day of the month. |
| Folders | To select the folder separately, select [Folder Select] and select the desired folder. To select all folders, including the folder currently being created, select [All Folders (Including folders registered hereafter)]. |
| Delete Protected File | Enable this setting to include protected files in the deletion. |
| Delete Confidential File | Enable this setting to include confidential files in the deletion. |
Delete Now:
When this is executed with a folder selected, all files in the folder will be immediately deleted regardless of the date and time setting.
Executing automatic deletion during Auto Power Shut-Off:
(If this is not selected, the files will be deleted after the machine wakes from auto power shutoff mode.) Execute Auto Deletion even if Auto Power Shut-Off is enabled. When the checkbox is not selected (unchecked), the files will be deleted after the machine wakes from auto power shutoff mode.
How do I perform File Image Checking in Document Filing?
The file image checking screen displays file information (e.g., HDD_02022018_112030, User Unknown, A4, Auto Colour), file preview images, page number, and total page count. You can enlarge/reduce the preview screen and rotate it in increments of 90 degrees.
• Depending on the size of the image, part of the image may be clipped off in the image check screen on the touch panel.
• A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result.
• The image check screen does not appear when multiple files are selected.
After selecting the desired file:
1. Tap [Check Image] on the action panel.
2. Check the image of the file.
How do I perform File Merging in Document Filing?
You can combine files that have been saved by Document Filing.
• If you have only selected a single file, the [Combine File] key is not displayed.
• The file name is a combination of “the first file name”, “a tilde (~)”, and “Serial No.”. As required, change the file name at a later time.
• The files are joined in the selected order.
After selecting two desired files:
1. Tap [Combine File] on the action panel.
2. Append file information. To select the user name, file name, folder, and property setting, refer to “File Information”. To delete the original file, select the [Delete Original File] checkbox.
• Changing the property
• Specifying a user name
• Assigning a file name
• Specifying the folder
• Creating PDF for PC browsing
3. Tap the [Execute] key. Combining of files starts, and after the processing is finished, the “Combining complete” message appears.
To cancel the operation: Tap the [CA] key. Note that the operation cannot be cancelled when the original file is being deleted after the files are combined.
How do I retrieve and use a file from the Job Status Screen in Document Filing?
Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen. This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another destination.
1. Tap the job status display.
2. Tap the tab with a file to be retrieved (e.g., Print, Scan, Fax, Internet Fax), and tap the [Complete] key.
3. Tap the key of the desired file from the completed job. A file that has been processed by Quick File or File can be selected for a job in the retrieve operation.
4. Tap [Send] or [Change Setting to Print] on the action panel.
(To view detailed information on a file, select the file, and then tap [Check Details of Selected Job] on the action panel.)
How do I use File Search and Retrieval in Document Filing?
When there are many stored files, it may take some time to locate a file. The search function of document filing mode can be used to find a file quickly. Searching is possible even when you only know part of the file name or folder name. As required, a folder can also be specified as a search range.
Example: Only part of a file name is known: “Conference”. You can find all folders and files that contain the word “Conference”.
1. To search for a specific folder, tap its key. (If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (5 to 8 digit number) using the numeric keys.)
2. Tap the search icon (magnifying glass).
3. Select search conditions. Tap each text box and set the search condition. To search for the current folder, set the [Search Just Within the Folder] checkbox to checked.
• [User Name]: Search using the user name. Select a user on the user selection screen that appears, and then tap [OK].
• [Login Name]: Search using the login name. Enter the login name on the soft keyboard that appears and tap the [OK] key.
• [File or Folder Name]: Search using the file name or folder name. Enter the file name or folder name on the soft keyboard that appears and tap the [OK] key.
• [PIN Code/Password]: Search for files that have a password set. Enter the password with the soft keyboard that appears, and tap the [OK] key.
• [Date]: Search using the date when the file was created. When you have selected [Today] or [Date Set], set the time and date.
4. Tap the [Search Start] key. A list of the files that match your search conditions will appear. Select the desired file from the list. The job settings screen will appear. To return to the base screen of document filing mode, tap the [CA] key. To return to the file search screen, tap the [Search Again] key.
• When you search using [File or Folder Name], custom folders that match the search characters will also appear in the list. When a folder key is tapped, a list of the files in the folder appears. Tap the desired file in the list.
• Also in setting mode (Web version), you can use the file search function. Click [Document Operations] in “Settings (Web version)” →[Document Filing] → [Search].
How do I print an external file using Document Filing?
A file stored in the FTP server, USB memory device, or network folder of a PC can be printed. The file can also be modified before printing by changing the print settings.
On the action panel, tap [Select File from FTP to Print], [Select File from USB Memory to Print] or [Select File from Network Folder to Print].
How do I operate Document Filing in the Web Page (Settings Web)?
Document Filing operations can be performed from the Web page using “Settings (Web)” – [Document Operations] → [Document Filing].
Main Folder:
The files that are in the Main Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “PIN Code/Password of File”.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Display Style | Saved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format. |
| Job Classification | The saved files that are displayed can be filtered by job. |
| Display Items | Set the number of files that are displayed. |
Quick File Folder:
Files in the Quick File Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete].
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Display Style | Saved files can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format. |
| Job Classification | The saved files that are displayed can be filtered by job. |
| Display Items | Set the number of files that are displayed. |
Custom Folder:
The files that are in the Custom Folder can be displayed. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “PIN Code/Password of File”.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Index | The displayed Custom Folder names can be filtered by index. |
| Display Items | Set the number of files that are displayed. |
Search:
Use these settings to enter search conditions. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “PIN Code/Password of File”.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| User Name | Enter the user name. (Up to 32 characters) |
| Select from User List | Click the [Setup] button and search for users from the list. |
| Login Name | Set the number of files that are displayed. |
| Search Folder | Set the folder. |
| File Name | Enter a file name. (Up to 30 characters) |
| PIN Code/Password of File | Enter the password that is set for the file (5 to 32 digits). |
| Stored Date | Set the date and time the file was saved. |
Search Result:
Use these settings to enter search conditions. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in “PIN Code/Password of File”.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Display Style | The files that were found can be displayed in list format or thumbnail format. |
| Job Classification | The found files can be filtered by job. |
| Display Items | Set the number of files that are displayed. |
File Batch Print:
Multiple files can be printed at once by batch printing. Search for the files using search conditions, and then select multiple files from the displayed search results. If you want to use the number of copies set when each file was saved by Document Filing, select “Apply the Number of Copies Stored in Each File”. If you want to set a different number of copies, enter the desired number in “Enter the Number”. Click [Print] to print the file. To have the file deleted after printing, select the “Print and Delete the Data” checkbox.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Search Condition | |
| User Name | Enter the user name. (Up to 32 characters) |
| Select from User List | Click the [Setup] button and search for users from the list. |
| Search Folder | Set the folder. |
| File Name | Enter a file name. (Up to 30 characters) |
| PIN Code/Password of File | Enter the password that is set for the file. (5 to 32 digits) |
| Search Result | |
| Job Classification | The found files can be filtered by job. |
| Billing Code | |
| Main Code | Select this checkbox, and then enter the main code. (32 characters or less) |
| Sub Code | Select this checkbox, and then enter the sub code. (32 characters or less) |
How do I display the setting mode on the machine?
1. Tap the [Settings] key on the home screen. The setting mode screen appears on the touch panel. The setting menu appears at the top of the displayed screen. Tap the setting in the menu that you want to configure. For details of the settings, see the explanation for each item.
2. On the upper tab, tap the item that you want to set. The setting menu appears on the left side of the displayed screen. Tap the setting in the menu that you want to configure. When you tap the [System Settings] tab, item keys appear on the screen. When you tap the key of an item, a setting item menu appears. (When you tap the [Image Send Settings] key, further item keys appear.)
• To quit the setting mode, tap the [Cancel] key in the upper right corner of the screen.
• For details on login procedures when user authentication is enabled, see “USER AUTHENTICATION”.
Administrator password: To maintain security, the machine administrator should promptly change the password after the machine is purchased. To change the password, see “Change Password”. To ensure a high level of security, change the password at regular intervals.
How do I display the setting mode (Web version)?
When the machine is connected to the network, access the built-in Web server of the machine using the PC’s Web browser. From the setting mode of the machine, print the IP address of the machine and enter the address on the PC’s Web browser.
1. Tap the [Settings] key.
2. Tap [Status] → [Network Status] from the menu.
3. Scroll the screen down and check “IPv4 Address” in IPv4 Settings of TCP/IP.
4. Start the Web browser on the PC, and enter the IP address of the machine. Start a Web browser on a PC on the same network the machine is on, and enter the IP address of the machine.
Recommended Web browsers:
• Internet Explorer: 10 or later (Windows®)
• Firefox (Windows®), Safari (Mac OS®), Chrome (Windows®): Latest version or immediately previous major release
Depending on the machine settings, user authentication may be required to display the setting mode (Web version). For password and other information required for user authentication, contact the administrator of the machine.
What information is displayed in Machine Identification?
The Machine Identification displays the system information of the machine. It displays the model name, current status, and machine location.
The following items are displayed or can be interacted with:
[Update] key: Updates the information displayed.
Unit Serial Number: Indicates the serial number of the machine.
Name: If [Name] is not set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the [Machine Identification] screen appears.
Model Name: Displays the standard model name of the machine.
Machine Location: The information entered in the [Machine Location] item in [Machine Identification] appears. If no name has been set, [Not Set] appears.
Current Status: Displays the current status of the machine. If two or more errors occur at the same time, only one status is displayed according to the priority order. The errors and machine conditions are displayed in the following priority order:
• Printer Error
• Account Limit
• Incorrect Paper
• Overdue service maintenance
• Paper jammed
• Marker supply missing
• No toner
• Replace waste toner box.
• Cover open
• The paper is not available.
• Input tray empty
• Specified input tray missing
• Specified output tray full
• Offline
• Printer Warning
• Toner low
• Paper low
• Input tray missing
• Output Tray Full
• Output tray near full
• Near to overdue service maintenance
• Ready
• Auto power shut-off
• Warming Up
• Busy
Memo: Displays text that the administrator entered. If you have logged in as an administrator, you can enter a memo. If no name has been set, [Not Set] appears. When you tap the [Not Set] key, the Machine Identification screen appears.
Supply Status: Displays the current status of supplies. If staples are installed, their status is displayed.
Paper Input Tray Status: Displays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine.
[Reboot the MFP] key: Displays the restart screen. (Administrator rights are required.)
[Enter the Power Save Mode] key: Displays the power save mode screen. (Administrator rights are required.)
How is the Total Page Count shown?
This function shows the page count in each mode.
• Pages printed directly from the machine such as list prints are included in the “Other Prints” count.
• The items displayed (or printed) will vary depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed.
• Before printing the number of pages used, select “Settings (administrator)” → [Status] → [Data List] → [List for Administrator].
• In All Sending Address List, the following items are handled by 2-sided printing on an item basis: Individual List, Group List.
What information is displayed in Device Status?
This screen shows the device status.
[Update] button: Updates the information displayed.
Paper Input Tray Status: Displays the current status of the paper trays installed in the machine.
Output Tray Status: Displays the current status of the output tray installed in the machine.
Supply Status: Displays the current status of supplies. If staples are installed, their status is displayed.
Device Configuration: Displays the information of options installed in the machine.
HDD Status: Displays the usage status of the hard disk drive. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
What information is displayed in Network Status?
The Network Status screen shows the general status information and the statuses relevant to, TCP/IP, DNS, and WINS protocols. The information displayed here consists of the items that are configured in the Network Settings and their settings.
How can I check the Firmware Version?
The Firmware Version display shows the firmware version of the machine as a list.
How do I perform a Power Reset?
The Power Reset screen enables you to restart the machine or enter the power save mode. This function requires administrator rights.
Reboot the MFP: Reboots the machine. Tapping the [Execute] key opens the Restart screen, and then tapping the [Execute] key again restarts the machine.
Enter the Power Save Mode: Shifts the machine to power save mode. Tap the [Execute] key to open the power save mode screen.
How can I print Data Lists?
Lists showing the settings and information registered in the machine can be printed. The two-sided or one-sided list printing setting is determined by Device Control – Data List – 1-Sided/2-Sided.
What lists are available for users to print from the Data List?
The following lists are available for users:
Machine Status List: This list shows information needed by regular users, such as hardware statuses, software statuses, printer environment settings, and paper tray settings.
Printer Test Page: This is used to print the PCL Symbol Set List, various font lists, and the NIC page (network interface settings, etc.). It includes:
• PCL Symbol Set List
• PCL Internal Font List
• PCL Extended Font List
• PS Font List
• NIC Page
Note: When “Prohibit Test Page Printing” is enabled, Printer Test Page cannot be used to print test pages. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] →[Prohibit Test Page Printing].
Sending Address List: Lists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine. It includes:
• Individual List
• Group List
• Memory Box List
Document Filing Folder List: This shows the folder names for document filing. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
What lists are available for administrators to print from the Data List?
You can print out the lists and reports that only the administrator can refer to. When using “Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)” or “Image Sending Activity Report (Fax)” in Image Sending Activity Report (Auto), you can specify 1-sided or 2-sided printing via settings.
The following lists can be printed:
• Home Screen List
• Copy Settings List
• Printer Settings List
• Image Send Settings (Metadata Set List, Common Settings List, Scan Settings List, Fax Settings List*, I-Fax Settings List*)
• Document Filing Settings List*
• Sharp OSA Settings List
Common: Lists of the administrator settings for the following modes can be printed.
• Paper Settings List
• Machine Identification Settings List
• Operation Settings List
• Keyboard Settings List
• Device Control List
Network Settings:
• Network Settings List
Security Settings:
• Security Settings List
Energy Save Setting:
• Energy Save List
Image Quality Adjustment:
• Image Quality Adjustment List
Image Sending Activity Report: The following Image Sending Activity Reports can each be separately printed.
• Image Sending Activity Report (Fax)*
• Image Sending Activity Report (Scan)
• Image Sending Activity Report (Internet Fax)*
Data Receive/Forward List: The following lists showing reception settings and forwarding settings can be printed.
• Allow/Reject Number List
• Allow/Reject Mail & Domain Name List
• Inbound Routing List
• Document Admin List
* This can be used when the corresponding peripheral device is installed.
How does Hexadecimal Dump Mode work?
This function is used to print the print data from a computer in hexadecimal format together with the corresponding ASCII text. This mode allows you to check whether or not print data from the PC is being transmitted to the printer correctly.
What is I/O Timeout in Printer Settings?
The I/O timeout can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 999. The I/O timeout function temporarily breaks the connection if the set duration of time elapses without any data being received by the port. After the connection is broken, the port is set to auto selection or the next print job is begun.
How to enable the Network Port for printing?
The “Enable Network Port” setting enables printing from the network port.
How to configure Network Port Emulation Switching?
This setting is used to select the emulated printer language when the machine is connected by a network port. The following settings can be configured:
• Auto
• PostScript
• PCL
Unless printer errors occur frequently, it is recommended that you use the factory default setting “Auto”.
What are the Port Switching Methods?
Port Switching Method selects when port switching takes place.
Switch at End of Job: The port changes to auto selection when printing ends.
Switch after I/O Timeout: When the time set in “I/O Timeout” elapses, the port changes to Auto Selection.
How to set Initial Status Settings for printing without a printer driver?
If you print data in an environment where the printer driver is not used (e.g., using MS-DOS system or a PC without the provided driver), set the detailed printing conditions. The “Disable Blank Page Print” function will be effective even when the PCL printer driver is used.
The following settings can be configured:
Copies: 1 – 9999 sets
Orientation: Portrait, Landscape
Paper Size: Set the default paper size.
Output Tray: Set the default delivery tray.
Paper Type: Set the default paper type.
Resolution Setting: 600dpi, 600dpi (High Quality), 1200dpi*1
Disable Blank Page Print: Enabled, Disabled
2-Sided Print: 1-Sided, 2-Sided(Book), 2-Sided(Tablet)
N-Up Print*2: 1-Up, 2-Up, 4-Up, 8-Up
Layout (for N-Up Print):
• Left to Right*3
• Right to Left*3
• Right, and Down*4
• Down, and Right*4
• Left, and Down*4
• Down, and Left*4
Fit To Page*5: Use Fit to Page, Do not use Fit to Page
Output:
• Use Print per Unit, Do not use Print per Unit
• Staple Position*6: None, 1 Staple at Back, 2 Staples, 2 Staples (Top)
• Use Punch*7, Do not use Punch*7
Separator Page: Insert Before Job (Paper Tray), Insert After Job (Paper Tray)
Quick File*8: Disabled, Enabled
*1 This item cannot be used in MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050.
*2 Paper sizes that can be used with this function are A3, B4, A4, 11″ x 17″, 8-1/2″ x 14″, and 8-1/2″ x 11″. (This function may not take effect with some print methods.)
*3 Can be selected when 2-Up is selected.
*4 Can be selected when 4-Up/8-Up is selected.
*5 Only effective when printing PDF, JPEG, and TIFF files.
*6 When the finisher is installed.
*7 When a punch module is installed.
*8 On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
How to configure PCL Settings?
This is used to set the symbol sets, fonts, and line feed code used in a PCL environment.
The following settings can be configured:
PCL Symbol Set Setting: Specify the symbol set used for printing. Select from 35 items.
PCL Font Setting: Select a font used for printing. Options: Internal Font, Extended Font, (List of internal fonts when extended fonts are not installed.)
PCL Line Feed Code: This setting is used to select how the printer responds when a line feed command is received. Options:
• 0.CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF
• 1.CR=CR+LF; LF=LF;FF=FF
• 2.CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF
• 3.CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF
Wide A4: When this is enabled, 80 characters per line are printed on the A4 (8-1/2″ x 11″) size paper using a 10-pitch font. (When this setting is disabled, up to 78 characters are printed per line.) Options: Enabled, Disabled.
How to configure PostScript Settings?
When an error occurs during PostScript printing, these settings determine whether or not an error notice is printed and whether or not the PostScript data is received in binary format. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, this can only be enabled when the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
The following settings can be configured:
Screen Settings: Configure image settings for PostScript. Options: Standard, Text/Photo, Text, Photo, Dot (High Line Number), Dot (Low Line Number).
Print PS Errors: When a PS (PostScript) error occurs during PostScript printing, this setting determines whether or not an error notice is printed. Options: Enabled, Disabled.
Binary Processing: Configure image settings for PostScript. Options: Enabled, Disabled.
How to configure OOXML Settings for direct printing Excel files?
To print an Excel file by direct print, select a sheet (with the part to be printed selected) or the entire book. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Direct print expansion kit is required.
What are Print Release Settings used for?
Select this option to use E-mail printing.
How to configure E-mail Print Settings?
Select this option to use E-mail printing.
E-mail Print: Set whether or not E-mail print is performed.
POP3 Server: Set the POP3 server used for E-mail.
Port Number: Set the port number of the E-mail server.
POP Authentication: Set this to perform POP authentication for E-mail.
User Name: Set the E-mail user name.
Password: Set the password used for E-mail.
Check Interval: Set the automatic e-mail check frequency (polling interval).
Enable SSL: Use when SSL is used.
How to configure Direct Print Settings (FTP)?
Configure these settings if you will be printing files on an FTP server by direct print. A list of available FTP servers is shown. To add an FTP server, click the [Add] button and configure the settings.
FTP Server Registration: Configure FTP server settings.
Name: Set the name to be used for direct print.
FTP Server: Set the name of the FTP server.
Directory: Set the directory of the FTP server that has the files.
User Name: Set the user name used to log in to the FTP server.
Password: Set the password used to log in to the FTP server.
Enable SSL: Set to enable SSL.
Use PASV mode: Set to use PASV mode.
How to configure Direct Print Settings (Network Folder)?
Configure these settings if you will be printing files on a network folder by direct print. A list of available network folders is shown. To add a network folder, click the [Add] button and configure the settings.
Registration of Network Folder: Configure network folder settings.
Name: Set the name to be used for direct print.
Folder Path: Set the folder path that has the files.
User Name: Set the user name used to log in to the network folder.
Password: Set the password used to log in to the network folder.
How to configure Print Setting from PC/Mobile Terminal?
Configure these settings to print files on a computer or mobile terminal by direct print.
FTP Print: Specify whether or not FTP print settings are used for direct print.
Port Number: Enter the port number used for direct print.
Use Banner: Specify whether or not a banner page showing print information is also printed.
How to set the Default Address for Scan Settings in Image Send?
A default address can be stored that makes it possible to transmit by simply pressing the [Colour Start] key or the [B/W Start] key without specifying an address.
Default Address Setting:
• If [Apply E-mail address of the user for login.] is selected, the E-mail address of the login user is set as the default destination.
• When [Apply Home Directory of The User for Login] is selected, the default address is the home directory of the user that logged in.
The home directory setting depends on whether the user logs in by internal or external authentication.
Only a single default address can be set for Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder.
Add Selected: Select an address that is to be used by default.
Apply E-mail address of the user for login.: The E-mail address of the login user is set as the default address. Select [Allow cancel of the first entered address] based on your intended use.
Apply Home Directory of The User for Login: The home directory of the login user is set as the default address. Select [Allow cancel of the first entered address] based on your intended use.
Allow cancel of the first entered address: You can cancel the E-mail address of the login user that is entered automatically. To cancel, tap the [x] button next to the address entry field. When this setting is disabled, selection of an address other than the entered default address is prohibited. If an e-mail address is not set for the logged-in user, scanner transmission cannot be used.
Select From Address Book:
• To display your desired address book, narrow the search by alphabet or category with the list of [Index]. You can select the number of addresses that are to be displayed at a time with [Display Items].
• When you select the desired address name and tap the [Store] key, the selected address can be selected for the default address.
How to configure Administration Settings for Image Send?
Advanced Settings:
• Disable Selection of Reply-to: Prohibit select of transmission destinations.
File Naming: You can select the information included in the name of scanned files.
• Unit Serial Number: You can add the machine’s serial number to the file name.
• Text: You can add any text to the file name. (Up to 64 characters)
• Sender Name: You can add the sender’s name to the file name.
• Date & Time: You can add the date and time of transmission to the file name.
• Session Page Counter: You can add counter information to the file name.
• Unique Identifier: An ID number can be created for each file and added to the file name. Note: To prevent duplicate file names, select Date or Unique Identifier.
Default Subject: Set a maximum of 80 full-width/half-width characters for the default subject for E-mail and Internet Fax transmission.
Add Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message Body: You can automatically add job information to the body message of e-mail.
Add a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message Body: You can add any text as a footer to the body message of e-mail.
Mail Footer Registration: When [Add a Footer Automatically to the Mail Message Body] is enabled, set a maximum of 900 full-width/half-width characters for the footer.
Subject Name Settings: You can save a preset subject for transmitted files. Click the [Add] key and set a maximum of 80 full-width/half-width characters for the subject.
File Name Settings: You can save a preset file name for transmitted files. Click the [Add] key and set a maximum of 80 full-width/half-width characters for the file name.
Message Body Settings: You can save a preset e-mail subject and body message (fixed text). Click the [Add] key and set a maximum of 80 full-width/half-width characters for the subject, and a maximum of 1800 full-width/half-width characters for the body message (fixed text).
How to configure Default Settings for Internet Fax?
Configures the default settings for Internet fax.
Resolution Setting:
• Apply the Resolution Set when Stored: You can apply the resolution setting that was set when the file was saved to transmission of the file. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
• Resolution Setting: Set the resolution used for file transmission.
• Half Tone: Enable half-tones.
Auto Wake Up Print: When the [Power] button is “Off” (but the main power switch is “On”) and an Internet fax is received, this function activates the machine and prints the fax. When this function is disabled, received Internet faxes are not printed until the ([Power] button) is switched “On”.
How to configure Initial File Format Setting for Internet Fax?
File Type: This is used to set the file type for Internet fax transmission. The following settings can be configured:
• TIFF-S
• TIFF-F
If one of the following functions is set, the image will be sent in TIFF-F format even if TIFF-S is set: Mixed Size Orig., Dual Page Scan, Book Divide, Card Shot, N-Up.
Compression Mode: This is used to set the compression mode for Internet fax transmission. The following settings can be configured:
• MH (G3)
• MMR (G4)
[MMR (G4)] cannot be selected when [File Type] is set to [TIFF-S].
How to adjust Speaker Volume Settings for Internet Fax?
Adjusts the volume of fax receive signals and communication error signals heard through the speaker. A fax receive signal sounds after the machine checks the mail server and retrieves received faxes. A communication error signal sounds when a delivery failed e-mail is received from the destination Internet fax machine.
How does Original Print on Transaction Report work for Internet Fax?
When a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report. Select one of the settings below:
• Always Print
• Print at Error
• Do not Print
This setting will not be effective if the “Transaction Report Print Select Setting” is set to “Do not Print”.
How to configure Transaction Report Print Select Setting for Internet Fax?
Selects whether or not a transaction report will be printed, and if printed, the condition for being printed. Select a setting for each of the following operations:
Single Sending:
• Always Print
• Print Out Error Report Only
• Do not Print
Broadcasting:
• Always Print
• Print Out Error Report Only
• Do not Print
Receiving:
• Always Print
• Print at Error
• Do not Print
When a transaction report is printed, this is used to print part of the first page of the transmitted original on the transaction report.
How to configure Activity Report Print Select Setting for Internet Fax?
Prints the Image Sending Activity Report stored in the machine memory periodically. The Image Sending Activity Report can be set to print each time the number of transactions reaches 200, or at a specified time (once a day only). (The settings can be simultaneously enabled.)
• If you only select the “Print Daily at Designated Time” setting and the number of recorded transactions reaches 200 before the specified time, each new transaction will delete the oldest transaction (the oldest transaction will not be printed).
• The Transaction Report can be printed out manually as needed.
How to configure Body Text Print Select Setting for Internet Fax?
Image files attached to Internet faxes are normally printed. This setting can be enabled to also have the e-mail body text (subject and message) printed. This setting also applies to printing of the body text of e-mail messages without file attachments. A maximum of 5 pages of body text can be printed.
How to configure Send Settings for Internet Fax?
These settings are used to configure the settings for Internet fax.
I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting: This setting is used to request a reception report when an Internet fax is sent.
I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout Setting: The duration of time that the machine will wait for a reception report from the destination machine can be set by any number from 1 hour to 240 hours in increments of 1 minute. This setting is only effective when “I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting” is enabled.
Number of Resend Times at Reception Error: The number of resend attempts when an error message is received from an I-Fax recipient can be set to any number from 0 to 15. This setting is only effective when “I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting” is enabled.
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments: To prevent the transmission of excessively large image files by Internet fax, a file size limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB. If the total size of the image files created by scanning the original exceeds the limit, the image files are discarded. If you do not wish to set a limit, select [Unlimited]. This setting is linked to “Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments(E-Mail)” in Scan Settings.
Rotation Sending Setting: When transmitting an image that is one of the following sizes, this function rotates the image 90 degrees counterclockwise. (The setting can be configured separately for each size.) A4, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2″x11″, 5-1/2″x8-1/2″R. A4R and 8-1/2″ x 11″R size images are not rotated.
Default Own Number Sending: You can include the date and your sender information (sender name and address) at the top of the page when the receiving machine prints an image that you send.
Printing Page Number at Receiver: When the transmitted image is printed by the receiving machine, the page number can be added to the top of each printed page.
Recall in Case of Line Busy: (This setting is only effective for Direct SMTP transmission.) This setting sets the number of recall attempts and the interval between recall attempts when a transmission is not successful due to the line being busy or other reason.
• Number of Times to Recall When Line is Busy: This setting specifies whether or not recalling is performed when the line is busy. During recalling, you can set the number of recall attempts. Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected.
• Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) When Line is Busy: The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.
Recall in Case of Communication Error: (This setting is only effective for Direct SMTP transmission.) This determines how many times the machine will automatically attempt the call again if a fax transmission fails due to a communication error.
• Number of Times to Recall in Case of Error: Specify how many times the machine will attempt the call again when a communication error occurs. During recalling, you can set the number of recall attempts. Any number from 0 to 15 can be selected.
• Interval to Wait Between Recall Attempts (min.) in Case of Error: The interval between recall attempts can be set. Any number of minutes from 1 to 15 can be selected.
How to configure Receive Settings for Internet Fax?
Configures the settings for Internet fax reception.
Auto Receive Reduce Setting: When a fax is received that includes printed information such as the sender’s name and address, the received image is slightly larger than the standard size. This setting is used to automatically reduce the image to fit the standard size.
• If Auto Receive Reduce is disabled, the edges of the image outside the standard size will be cut off. However, the image will be clearer because it will be printed at the same size as the original.
• Standard sizes are sizes such as A4 and B5 (8-1/2″ x 11″ and 8-1/2″ x 5-1/2″).
2-Sided Printing of Received Data: This is used to have received faxes printed on both sides of the paper. When this setting is enabled and a fax consisting of 2 or more pages is received (the pages must be the same size), the pages are printed on both sides of the paper.
Set Address for Data Forwarding: When the machine cannot print a received fax, the fax can be forwarded to another machine. This setting is used to configure the address of the other machine. Multiple forwarding addresses cannot be stored.
• Forwarding to: Enter the forwarding address (maximum of 64 characters).
• Direct SMTP: Select this to enable forwarding when direct SMTP is used.
• Add Hostname or IP Address.: Select this to separately enter a host name or IP address.
• Hostname or IP Address: Use this setting when “Add Hostname or IP Address.” is enabled. Enter the host name or IP address (maximum of 64 characters).
Letter Size RX Reduce Print: When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces the fax to ledger (11″ x 17″) size. When this setting is enabled, ledger (11″ x 17″) size faxes are also reduced.
Receiving Date & Time Print: Enable this setting to have the date and time of reception printed. Select [Inside the Received Image] or [Outside the Received Image] for the position. The [Outside the Received Image] cannot be selected if “Auto Receive Reduce Setting” is not enabled.
A3 RX Reduce: When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces the fax to ledger (11″ x 17″) size. When this setting is enabled, ledger (11″ x 17″) size faxes are also reduced.
POP3 Communication Timeout Setting: The duration of time the machine waits until stopping reception can be set from 30 to 300 seconds in increments of 30 seconds if no response is received from the mail server (POP3 server).
Reception Check Interval Setting: Specifies an interval at which the machine automatically checks the mail server (POP3 server) for received Internet faxes. The interval can be set from 0 minutes to 8 hours in increments of 1 minute. If 0 hours 0 minutes is specified, the machine does not automatically check the mail server for received Internet faxes. The machine also checks the mail server (POP3 server) for received Internet faxes when the main power is switched on (Except when 0 hours 0 minutes is specified).
I-Fax Output Setting: This sets the output tray for received Internet faxes. The items that appear will vary depending on the machine configuration.
How to configure Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Name Setting for Internet Fax?
This setting allows or refuses reception from specified addresses/domains. When there are no stored anti junk mail addresses or domains, only the [Add New] key can be selected.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Item | Reception from the stored address/domain is not allowed. |
| Allow Reception | Reception from the stored address/domain is allowed. |
| All Invalid | All Invalid |
| Add New | Adds a new address or domain (maximum of 50) from which reception is to be rejected or allowed. Enter the address/domain (maximum of 64 characters) and tap the [Store] key. If the first character of the entry is not “@”, the entry is identified as an address. If the first character is “@”, the entry is identified as a domain. Storing an address specifies only that address. Storing a domain specifies all addresses that include that domain. |
| Registered address or domain list | Displays a list of the stored addresses and domains. An address or domain can be deleted from the list when selected. |
How to configure Server Settings for Internet Fax Receive?
Receive Settings:
• Internet Fax Receive: Set whether or not Internet Fax reception is performed.
• POP3 Server: Enter a maximum of 127 half-width characters for the name of the POP3 server to be used.
• Port Number: Specify the port number of the POP3 server to be used.
• POP Authentication: Set to use POP authentication.
• User Name: Enter a maximum of 64 characters for the user name used to access the server.
• Password: Enter a maximum of 32 characters for the password used to access the server.
• POP3 Communication Timeout: Set a timeout for communication to the POP3 server.
• Reception Check Interval Setting: Enter an acknowledge cycle to the POP3 server.
• Enable SSL: Use SSL to encrypt data before transmission.
Default Settings – Own Number and Name Set:
• Set I-Fax Own Name: Enter a maximum of 20 full-width/half-width characters for the sender name for Internet Fax transmission.
• Source Address: Enter a maximum of 56 half-width characters for the sender address for Internet Fax transmission.
How to configure Direct SMTP Setting for Internet Fax?
Port Number (Receive), Port Number (Send): Specify the port number used for transmission and reception by direct SMTP.
Timeout: Set the wait time until transmission or reception is cancelled when a response is not received from the server during direct SMTP transmission/reception.
How to use Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) for Internet Fax?
These settings can be configured when the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Reception Start: Tap this key to immediately connect to your mail server (POP3 server) and check for received Internet faxes. If you have received Internet faxes, the faxes will be retrieved and printed. To enable “Reception Start”, the POP3 server settings must be configured.
Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen: This displays the [Internet Fax Manual Reception] key in the base screen of Internet fax mode.
Forward Received Data: When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes can be forwarded to another Internet fax machine. To register a forwarding address, refer to “Set Address for Data Forwarding”. If forwarding was not successful, the faxes return to the print queue. If initial pages were printed, only unprinted pages are forwarded. If “Hold Setting for Received Data Print” is enabled, a password may be required.
To cancel forwarding: Tap the job status display and cancel fax forwarding in a similar way as for a transmission job. Forwarding is not possible if no faxes were received or a forwarding fax number is not programmed.
How to configure Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings?
The fax and Internet fax received data can be forwarded according to the stored forwarding table. When this function is enabled, you can also have the received Internet faxes forwarded to a specified e-mail address without printing them. On a model that is not equipped with a hard disk, the setting name is indicated as “Inbound Routing Settings”.
Table Registration: You can store or edit the data forwarding table that has the received data forward settings. Up to 50 data forwarding tables can be stored. A single forwarding table can store up to 500 sets of sender number and source address combinations. Up to 1000 destinations can be stored in all data forwarding tables combined. Up to 100 destinations of FTP/Desktop/Network Folder data can be stored.
| List name | Settings |
|---|---|
| Table Name | Enter a forward table name. |
| Receive Line Select | Selects a data receive line. |
| Sender Address Setting | Select the sender facsimile number or the Internet fax address. Before you select a sender number or address, store the destination number or address. To forward all received data, select [Forward All Received Data]. |
| Forward Condition 1/2/3 | You can set the forwarding date and destination. • Forward Condition: Set the data forwarding conditions. • Day of the Week: Select a day of week to start data forwarding. • Start Time: Set a time to start data forwarding. • Completing Time: Set a time to end the data forwarding. • Format for Forwarding: Select a format of forwarding data. |
| Forwarding Destination List | Lists the addresses that can be set as the destination. Select a destination by setting it to marked. |
| Add (Selecting from Address Book) | Open the address book and enter a forwarding destination. |
| Add (Direct Entry) | Enter the destination name directly. |
| Delete | Deletes the selected address. |
Sender Address Registration: Stores new sender number or address to be used for inbound routing.
| List name | Settings |
|---|---|
| Address to be Entered | Displays the entered sender number or address. |
| Fax Number | Enter a facsimile number to be stored as the sender. When you enter multiple sender numbers, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,). When you tap the [Global Address Search] key, the global address search screen appears. |
| Internet Fax Address | Enter an Internet fax address to be stored as the sender. When you enter multiple sender numbers, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,). When you tap the [Global Address Search] key, the global address search screen appears. |
| Delete | Deletes the selected sender number or address. |
| Add to List | Adds the entered sender number to the list. |
Administration Settings: Stores the administration settings to be used for inbound routing.
| List name | Settings |
|---|---|
| Disable Registration of Forward Table | Disables the registration of forward table. |
| Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table | Disables a change of forward table. |
| Disabling of Forward Condition Change | Disables a change of data forwarding conditions. |
| Disable Temporal Forward Setting from Operation Panel | Disables a temporal data forward setting from the machine. |
| Print Style Setting | Sets a print style of received data. If you have selected the [Always Print] or [Save Only at Error] option, enter a file name. |
| Preset of Character | Set the characters added to the file name when a file is saved. When “Character 1” and “Character 2” are set in “File Naming No. 1 to No. 7”, the set characters are added to the file name. Enter up to 64 full-width/half-width characters. |
| File Naming No.1 – No.7 | Set the information included in the file name when saving a file. |
| If received from a contact registered in the address book, sender’s name is changed to contact’s name. | When the sender of the data is stored in the address book, the sender information is changed to the name stored in the address book. |
What is the procedure for setting up Inbound Routing?
1. Enable the [Inbound Routing] function. Tap the [Administration Settings] from the menu. Enable the [Inbound Routing] function from the setting screen.
2. Store the sender number or address. Tap the [Sender Number /Address Registration] from the menu. Enter the destination number or address that you wish to store. If you wish to forward all received data, you need not store the sender number and address separately.
3. Store a forwarding table. Tap the [Inbound Routing Settings] from the menu. Tap the [Add] key on the displayed screen. When the [Table Registration] screen appears, store the forwarding table.
4. Enable the stored forwarding table. Tap the [Inbound Routing Settings] from the menu. Set the forwarding table name that you wish to enable to marked. To specify forwarding conditions, select [Forward based on the Conditions of Forward Destination 1-3], and also select [Always Forward] or [Forward on Selected Day & Time]. If you have selected the [Forward on Selected Day & Time] option, you can set the forwarding date and time in advance.
How to configure Settings for HDD Storing of Received Data (Inbound Routing Storage)?
An external account application can be added and controlled. Configure settings for saving received faxes to the hard disk. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
| Item | Settings |
|---|---|
| Auto Storing of Received Data in HDD | Set whether received faxes are saved to the hard disk. |
| Specifying Data to be Stored | Select which received faxes are saved. Select from lines 1 to 3 and Internet Fax. |
| Specifying Stored Folder | Specify the folder in which received faxes are saved. Enter a folder name no longer than 32 full-width/half-width characters. |
| Sort Received Faxes by Date in Folders | Configure settings to have date folders created and received faxes saved to the folders by date. |
| File Format | Select the file format for inbound routing. |
| Print Style Setting | Configure print settings for received faxes. • Save and print: Save received faxes to hard disk, and also print. • Only print when save error occurs: Print received fax when save fails. • Save in inbound routing error box when save fails: When save fails, save the fax in the inbound routing error box. |
| Preset of Character | Set the characters added to the file name when a file is saved. When “Character 1” and “Character 2” are set in “File Naming No. 1 to No. 7”, the set characters are added to the file name. Enter up to 64 full-width/half-width characters. |
| File Naming No.1 to No.7 | Set the information included in the file name when saving a file. |
| If received from a contact registered in the address book, sender’s name is changed to contact’s name. | When Sender name of “File Naming” is enabled, you can change the sender name to a name in the address book. |
| Reception Notification Settings | Set whether notification is sent by e-mail when a fax is received. |
| Address of Notification Destination | Shows the address to which the notification is sent. |
| Direct Entry | Enter the notification address. Enter a maximum of 1500 half-width characters for the address. |
| Global Addr. Search | Select the address from the global addresses. |
| Add to List | An address directly entered or found by global address search is saved as the notification address. |
How to configure Common Settings for Device Control?
Paper Type for Auto Paper Selection: The paper types that the Auto Paper Selection function will select can be specified. Select one of the following settings: Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled. The Auto Paper Selection function will not select any paper types other than the paper types specified with this setting. The paper type set for each paper tray by selecting [System Settings] in “Settings” → [Paper Tray Settings].
Tandem Connection Setting: When two machines are used as network printers using TCP/IP protocol, use this setting to configure the port number and IP address of the machine used as the tandem client machine.
• Disabling of Master Machine Mode: To prohibit tandem transmission, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.)
• Disabling of Client Machine Mode: To prohibit tandem reception, enable this setting. (Normally this setting is not necessary.)
Note: To use the tandem function when user authentication is enabled, the same login name and password must be used on both the master machine and client machine. The factory default setting for the port number is [50001].
Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode: When the colour mode is set to auto in image send mode, the discrimination point for detecting whether originals are colour or black and white can be set to one of 5 levels. [Closer to B/W] makes originals easier to recognize as black and white. [Closer colour] makes originals easier to recognize as black and white (this appears to be a typo in the source, likely meant “colour”).
Total Setting for Finish: Select the finish setting. Set whether finishing positions are specified on the specified paper or on the original.
Plain Paper Weight Settings: These are used to control the toner fusing temperature according to the weight of the paper. These settings apply to plain paper, recycled paper, punched paper, pre-printed paper, letterhead paper, coloured paper, and user type paper. You can select “60g/m2 to 89g/m2” or “90g/m2 to 105g/m2”. This can only be set on the machine’s operation panel. Use only paper in the same weight range. Changes take effect after restart.
Data List: To specify [One Sided] or [Two Sided] printing in Data List.
Disabling of Duplex: This is used to disable 2-sided printing, such as when the duplex module malfunctions.
Disabling of Offset: Disable offset output.
Disabling of Stapler: This setting is used to prohibit the use of staple, such as when the staple of inner finisher, finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.
Disabling of Punch: This setting is used to prohibit the use of punch, such as when the punch module of inner finisher, finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions.
Disabling of Document Feeder: Use this setting to prohibit the use of the automatic document feeder, such as when the feeder malfunctions. (When the setting is enabled, scanning is still possible using the document glass.)
Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette: This setting is used to disable the large capacity cassette, such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer: This setting is used to disable the optional paper drawer, such as when it malfunctions.
Disabling of Tray Settings: This setting is used to prohibit tray settings (except for the bypass tray).
Disabling of Finisher: This setting is used to prohibit the use of inner finisher, finisher or saddle finisher, such as when it malfunctions.
How to configure Machine Identification Settings?
Enter a name or code to identify the machine. This is typically configured under System Settings -> Common Settings -> Machine Identification Settings.
How to adjust the Clock?
Use this to set the date and time in the machine’s built-in clock. If [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set.
Specify Time Zone: If your region is ahead of GMT, select [+]. If behind GMT, select [-]. Specify the time difference in hours and minutes.
Date&Time Settings: Select and set the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Synchronize with Internet Time Server: This can be used when the machine is connected to the Internet. The machine’s time is automatically adjusted to the time of an Internet time server.
How to set Daylight Saving Time?
Enable daylight saving time. If [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set for daylight saving.
Daylight Saving Time Setting: Select whether or not the Daylight Saving Time Setting is enabled. If disabled, the following settings will not be possible.
Select Setting Type: Specify whether the starting and ending day of daylight saving time are to be set using the day of the week or the date.
Start Time: Set the starting time of daylight saving time. If “Day of the Week” is selected, set the starting week and day. If “Date” is selected, set the starting date. Set the hour, minute, and UTC setting.
End Time: Set the ending time of daylight saving time in the same way as you set the starting time.
Adjustment Time: Set the time to be adjusted when daylight saving time begins.
The time changes at the beginning and end of daylight saving time as indicated in the table below:
| Area | Standard time → Daylight saving time | Daylight saving time → Standard time |
|---|---|---|
| Europe* | Last Sunday in March, 1:00 to 2:00 AM | Last Sunday in October, 1:00 to 0:00 AM |
| Australia, New Zealand | Last Sunday in October, 2:00 to 3:00 AM | Last Sunday in March 3:00 to 2:00 AM |
| Other countries | Select the [Daylight Saving Time Setting] checkbox so that a checkmark appears. The clock setting is configured to normal time plus one hour. When the checkmark is selected, clock returns to normal time. | |
* In some countries, the starting and ending times of daylight saving time may be different than the times set in the machine.
How to set the Date Format?
This is the first and basic setting for operating the machine. The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed. If [System Settings] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set for the date format.
Current Setting: The current time appears in the format set in Date Format.
Format: Set the order of display of the year, month, and day (YYYY/MM/DD).
Separator: Select one of three symbols or a blank space for the separator used in the date.
Day-Name Position: Select whether the day name appears before or after the date.
Time Display: Select 12-hour format or 24-hour format for the time. (24-Hour Display: 00:00 to 24:00; 12-Hour Display: 00:00 AM to 11:59 AM/00:00 PM to 11:59 PM)
How to enter a Product Key?
You must enter the machine product key to use the following advanced functions. It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the peripheral devices installed. For the product key to be entered, contact your dealer. This setting cannot be specified in some countries and regions.
Serial Number: This displays the serial number that is required to obtain the product key.
Font Kit for Barcode: Enter the product key of the barcode font kit.
Internet Fax Expansion Kit: Enter the product key of the Internet Fax Expansion Kit.
Application Integration Module: Enter the product key of the application integration module.
Application Communication Module: Enter the product key of the application communication module.
External Account Module: Enter the product key of the external account module.
Direct Print Expansion Kit: Enter the product key of the Direct Print Expansion Kit.
OCR Expansion Kit: Enter the product key of the OCR expansion kit.
Enhanced Compression Kit: Enter the product key of the enhanced compression kit.
How to use Custom Link Setting?
The stored Web addresses can be displayed in the display area of the setting menu. Click a custom link to jump to the website of the stored address.
How to use Quick Settings for network configuration?
Select the minimum required settings for the machine connection to the network using the Quick Settings option.
How to configure Wireless Settings?
On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, this setting appears when a wireless LAN adaptor is installed.
Connection Type: Use this setting to switch between [Wired Only], [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)].
Keep Wireless Access Point activated: This can only be enabled when “Connection Type” is “Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)”. If disabled, the NFC card reader must be touched to the mobile device or the [Easy Connect (QR code)] key must be tapped in the home screen to enable wireless LAN. When one of the conditions below occurs, the wireless LAN connection is automatically cancelled: When auto clear or auto power shutoff is performed on the machine, or when there is no connection to the access point for a certain period of time.
When “Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)” is selected in “Connection Type”:
• Access Point Search: Click this to search access points. When the search results are displayed, select the access point to use and click [OK]. [SSID], [Security Type], and [Encry.] are automatically applied.
• SSID: Enter an SSID using up to 32 characters.
• Security Type: Select a security type (WEP, WPA/WPA2-mixed Personal, WPA/WPA2-mixed Enterprise, WPA2 Personal, WPA2 Enterprise).
• Encry.: Select an encryption type.
• Security Key: Enter a security key. (WEP64bit: 5 characters or 10-digit hexadecimal number; WEP128bit: 13 characters or 26-digit hexadecimal number; WPA/WPA2: 8 to 63 characters or 64-digit hexadecimal number).
• Show Security Key: If it is set to ON, the security key appears.
Current Setting (Wireless Settings – Page 7-87): Shows settings, such as the SSID of a wireless LAN and security type. If the wireless LAN is disabled, “–” appears.
Current Wireless Status (Wireless Settings – Page 7-87): This shows reception levels (Max. 100) of the wireless LAN and IP addresses.
Show Wireless Setting Screen (Wireless Settings – Page 7-88): Click the [Setup] button. In the Wireless Setting screen, you can configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key.
Initialize Wireless Settings (Wireless Settings – Page 7-88): Click the [Initialize] button. The settings for SSID, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key are initialized.
How to configure IPv4 Settings for the network?
When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv4) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.
DHCP: Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)/BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol). When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address. If DHCP/BOOTP is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible. If the machine is used on a TCP/IP network, be sure to enable the TCP/IP settings detailed below.
If not using DHCP, configure the following manually:
IPv4 Address: Enter the IP address of the machine.
Subnet Mask: Enter the IP subnet mask.
Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway address.
How to configure DNS Settings for the network?
Primary Server: Enter the IP address of primary DNS server.
Secondary Server: Enter the IP address of secondary DNS server.
Domain Name: Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists.
These settings can also be found under Services Settings -> DNS, with additional options:
IPv4 Settings: Primary Server, Secondary Server.
IPv6 Settings: Primary Server, Secondary Server.
Timeout: Enter a timeout. The default setting is 2 seconds. This time is used until the connection to the DNS server is established according to the standard specifications.
Domain Name (Services Settings): Enter the domain name where the selected DNS server exists.
DNS Update: Set this option to use the dynamic updating of DNS server.
Update Interval: Enter an interval to update the DNS server.
How to configure SMTP Settings for network services?
General SMTP settings (found under Network Settings):
Primary Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server.
Sender Name: Enter the sender name.
Sender Address: If data transmission has failed, the undelivered e-mail may be returned from the server. Enter an e-mail address (a single address only) to receive such undelivered mails. Usually, enter the e-mail address of system administrator.
Enable SSL: If selected, the SMTP-over-TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command. This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the “Port Number” to the same port number as the normal SMTP.
SMTP Authentication: If set, the SMTP server authentication is carried out.
• User Name: Enter the user name.
• Password: Enter the password.
• Change Password: To change the password, set the checkbox.
Connection Test: Tap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the SMTP server.
Detailed SMTP Settings (found under Services Settings -> SMTP):
Primary Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the primary SMTP server.
Secondary Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server.
Port Number: Enter a port number. The default setting is port 25.
Timeout: Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. This value is used for connection to the SMTP server and for data transmission according to the e-mail system specifications.
Sender Name: Enter a maximum of 20 full-width/half-width characters for the sender name.
Sender Address: Enter a maximum of 64 half-width characters for the sender address.
Enable SSL: If the SSL is enabled, the SMTP-over-TLS encryption communication can be used by STARTTLS command. This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the “Port Number” to the same port number as the normal SMTP.
SMTP Authentication: Carries out the SMTP server authentication. If you use the Kerberos authentication, set the KDC server, port number, and realm on the Kerberos authentication settings page.
• User Name: Enter the user name.
• Password: Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to checked.
POP before SMTP: If checked, you are authenticated to the POP server before using the SMTP communication.
• POP3 Server: Enter the IP address or the host name of the secondary SMTP server.
• Port Number: Enter the POP3 port number for POP before SMTP communication. The default setting is port 110.
• POP Authentication: If checked, the authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server.
• User Name: Enter the user name for POP before SMTP communication.
• Password: Enter the password required for POP before SMTP communication. To change the password, set [Change Password] to checked.
• Enable SSL: If set to checked, the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the “Port Number” to the POP over SSL communication port number. To allow POP over TLS communication, set the “Port Number” to the same port number as for the normal POP3 communication.
Connection Test: Tap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the SMTP server.
How to configure LDAP Settings?
The following explains the LDAP settings. When you tap the [Store] key, the LDAP settings are updated with your entries. The default address book is set to checked. To add an item, tap the [Add] key. To delete an item, select it and tap the [Delete] key.
General LDAP Settings (found under Network Settings):
Name: Enter the address book name.
Search Root: Enters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree. Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = Everyone. Entries must be separated from each other by semicolons or commas.
LDAP Server: Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server.
User Name: Enter the account name for LDAP setting.
Password: Enter the password. To change the password, set the checkbox.
Authentication Type: Select the authentication server from the drop-down list.
KDC Server: Enter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server.
Realm: Enter the Kerberos realm.
Allow selection on operation panel.: Specify whether or not enable the global address to be selected on the operation panel of the machine.
Authenticate a User in Global Address Search: Select whether or not authenticate a user when a global address is searched for.
Enable SSL: If set, the SSL encryption communication is enabled.
Connection Test: Tap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the LDAP server.
Detailed LDAP Settings Table (Page 7-86):
| Setup Items | Setting |
|---|---|
| Name | Enter the address book name. |
| Search Root | Enters the search defaults to search for a specific area of the LDAP directory information tree. Example: o = ABC, ou = NY, cn = Everyone. Entries must be separated from each other by semicolons or commas. |
| LDAP Server | Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server. |
| Server Type | Select the Default or Custom from the service type list. The default setting is Default. |
| User Identity Attribute | Set the user ID property. The default setting is “uid”. |
| Search Attribute | Set the LDAP search property. The default setting is “cn”. |
| Obtain E-mail address from | Set the e-mail address search. The default setting is “mail”. |
| Obtain Internet Fax address from | Set the Internet Fax address search. The default setting is “mail”. |
| Obtain Fax number from | Set the fax number search. The default setting is “facsimileTelephoneNumber”. |
| Public Key Search | Sets the open key search. The default setting is “userCertificate”. |
| Pages Limit Group | Set the Storing Page Limit Group Search. The default setting is “pagelimit”. |
| Authority Group | Set the Storing Authority Group Search. The default setting is “authority”. |
| Favourite Operation Group | Set the Favourite Operation Group Search. The default setting is “favourite”. |
| My Folder* | Set the My Folder Search. The default setting is “myfolder”. |
| Card ID | Sets the card ID search. The default setting is “cardid”. |
| Custom Property 1-10 | Enter each custom property. |
| Port Number | Enter a port number. The default setting is port 389. |
| Timeout | Enter a timeout. The default setting is 5 seconds. |
| User Name | Enter the account name for LDAP setting. |
| Password | Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to checked. |
| Authentication Type | Select the authentication server from the drop-down list. |
| Bind Prefix | Set the Bind prefix. The default setting is “uid”. |
| Server Usage | Set the server application. Set the address book and user authentication. |
| Applicable Destination Type | Select the applicable destination type from E-mail Address, Fax Number, and Internet Fax. |
| Allow selection on operation panel. | Specify whether or not enable the global address to be selected on the operation panel of the machine. |
| To Be Used as Default | Specify whether or not to use the selected global address as default. |
| Authenticate a User in Global Address Search | Select whether or not authenticate a user when a global address is searched for. |
| Enable SSL | Enables the SSL encryption communication. |
| Connection Test | Tap the [Execute] button, and the connection test is executed and its result is displayed. |
* On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required. When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted.
How to configure Public Folder / NAS Setting?
Set each option to [Prohibited] if the storage is not used. When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required. This is typically found under Network Settings.
Specific settings for Public Folder / NAS are listed under System Settings -> Setting Mode List (page 7-39) and include ‘public’ (with Use of Storage), ‘shared’ (with Use of Storage), and ‘faxreceive’ (with Use of Storage).
How to configure Network Name Setting?
Device Name: Enter a device name.
Domain Name: Enter the domain name.
Comment: Enter a comment.
How to configure TCP/IP IPv6 Settings?
When using the machine on a TCP/IP (IPv6) network, use this setting to configure the IP address of the machine.
IPv6: Enable this setting.
DHCPv6: Use this setting to have the IP address obtained automatically using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) v6. When this setting is enabled, it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address. If DHCPv6 is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible. In an IPv6 environment, the machine can use LPD or IPP protocol.
If not using DHCPv6, configure the following manually:
Manual Address / Prefix Length: Enter the IP address and the prefix length (0 to 128) of the machine.
Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway address.
How to configure MTU Settings?
Set the maximum data size that can be forwarded. This is found under TCP/IP settings.
How to configure SMB Settings?
Set the version of SMB protocol that is used for functions such as Scan to Network Folder. Use this setting to connect to a device that cannot automatically change the SMB protocol version, or when there is a problem in the connection with another device due to different versions. Set the version to SMB2.0, SMB2.1, or SMB3.0.
• One of the settings is SMB1.0, however, this is always enabled and cannot be disabled.
• When a version is disabled, version settings higher than that version are all disabled. When a version is enabled, all version settings lower than that version are enabled.
How to use the Ping Command?
Checks if the machine can communicate with the PC of the network. Specify the IP address of the desired PC and tap the [Execute] key. A message indicating a response by the PC or not is displayed.
How to configure Kerberos Authentication Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> Kerberos.
KDC Server: Enter the IP address or host name of the Kerberos authentication server.
Port Number: Enter the port number of the Kerberos authentication server. The default setting is port 88.
Realm: Enter the Kerberos realm.
How to configure SNTP Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> SNTP.
SNTP: Set this option to use the SNTP protocol.
SNTP Server: Enter the IP address or host name of the SNTP server.
Port Number: Enter a port number. The default setting is port 123.
Timeout: Enter a timeout. The default setting is 5 seconds.
Synchronous Interval: Enter an interval to synchronize to the SNTP server.
Synchronize Upon Start: To establish synchronization during machine startup, set to checked.
Synchronize Now: When tapped, the machine is synchronized with the SNTP server time.
How to configure mDNS Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> mDNS.
mDNS: Set this option to use the mDNS settings.
Service Name: Enter a service name.
Domain Name: Display the domain name.
Highest Priority Service: Select a service you use with the priority.
How to configure SNMP v1 Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> SNMP -> SNMP v1 Settings.
SNMP v1 Settings: Set this option to use the SNMPv1 settings.
Access Method: Set an access method.
GET Community: Enter the GET community name to fetch the device information using SNMP.
SET Community: Enter the SET community name required for SNMP setting.
Change SET Community: To change the SET community, set checked.
TRAP Community: Enter the community name to be used for the SNMP TRAP sent from the device.
TRAP Target Address: Enter the IP address of the destination computer for SNMP TRAP communication.
How to configure SNMP v3 Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> SNMP -> SNMP v3 Settings.
SNMP v3 Settings: Set this option to use the SNMPv3 settings.
User Name: Enter the user name.
Authentication Key: Enter the authentication key.
Privacy Key: Enter the privacy key.
Context Name: Display the context name.
How to configure WINS Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> WINS.
Primary Server: Enter the IP address of primary WINS server.
Secondary Server: Enter the IP address of secondary WINS server.
Scope ID: Enter the scope ID.
How to configure LPD Print Port Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> Print Port Settings -> LPD.
LPD (Profile Expiring Date): Enter a profile expiring date.
LPD Settings:
• LPD: Set this option to use LPD.
• Timeout: Enter a timeout. The default setting is 90 seconds.
• Use Banner: Set this option to use the banner. The default setting is “Invalid”.
How to configure RAW Print Port Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> Print Port Settings -> RAW.
Raw Print Settings:
• Raw Print: Set this option to use RAW printing. The default setting is “Valid”.
• Port Number: Enter a port number. The default setting is port 9100.
• Timeout: Enter a timeout. The default setting is 90 seconds.
• Use Bidirectional: To use bidirectional communication, set to checked.
How to configure WSD Settings?
These settings are found under Services Settings -> WSD.
WSD Print: Set this option to use WSD printing.
Use Multicast Discovery: Set this option to use multicast discovery.
How to configure Google Cloud Print Settings?
These settings are found under External Print Services Settings.
Google Cloud Print: Specify whether or not Google Cloud Print is used.
Status: “Not Set”, “Registering”, “Registered”, or “Offline” will appear.
Always Retain Prints: The retention print function can be enabled in Google Cloud Print. When this setting is enabled, Google Cloud Print jobs are saved in the “Main Folder” of the document filing function of the machine. When this setting is disabled, the machine starts printing immediately after it receives a Google Cloud Print job.
E-mail: This shows the e-mail address of the Google account of the administrator who registered the machine in Google Cloud Print.
Device Name: Set the device name that appears on the client device. This setting is the same as the device name on the machine information page of the status.
Register with Google Cloud Print: This appears when the “Status” is “Not Set”. Tap this key to show the registration information on the operation panel. Open the Web browser on your device and go to the URL that is displayed. When the Google account login page appears in your Web browser, enter the Google account information of the administrator of the machine. Follow the instructions that appear after you log in to complete the registration procedure for the machine. When you have successfully completed registration, the “Status” changes to “Registered”. Complete the registration procedure within 10 minutes after the registration information is shown. If you fail to complete registration within this time, the status will change from “Registering” back to “Not Set”.
Delete from Google Cloud Print: This appears when the “Status” is “Registered”. Tap this key to delete the machine’s information from the Cloud server, and the Google Cloud Print settings from the machine.
Registration URL/QR code: This appears when the “Status” is “Registering”. Directly enter the URL for registration in the client device, or scan the QR code and access the registration page. When you complete final registration on the registration page, you will be able to use Google Cloud Print.
How to configure Proxy Settings for network access?
Use Proxy Settings to access the network through a proxy server.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Proxy Setting | Set whether proxy settings are used. |
| Proxy Server Address | Enter the proxy server address. |
| User Name | Enter a user name to access the proxy server. |
| Password | Enter a password to allow access to the proxy server. |
| Port Number | Enter the proxy server port number. |
| Address without Using Proxy | Specify exception addresses for a proxy that is used in the external service connect function, Google Cloud Print and Sharp OSA.
[Entry method] 1) Can be set using a host name or an IP address. 2) When using a host name, you can use a wildcard (*) at the beginning of the domain name. (Example: “*example.com” (equivalent to “example.com”, “sub.example.com”, etc.) 3) When using an IP address, you can use a wildcard (*) at the end of the address. (Example: “10.*” (equivalent to 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255) If the Sharp OSA application using “HTML Browser 3.5” is set to an exception address, rule (3) cannot be used. 4) You can use a separator (semicolon (;)) to enter multiple addresses. (Example: “99.99.99.99;example.com”) |
How to configure the Wireless Setting screen (Access Point Mode)?
If the [Setup] button is clicked while [Connection Type] is set to [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wired Only], the Wireless Settings (Access Point Mode) screen is displayed. Configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key. Clicking the [Submit] button stores the settings.
SSID: Enter an SSID using up to 32 characters.
Security Type: Select a security type.
Encry.: Select an encryption type.
Security Key: Enter a security key.
| Security Type | Security Key |
|---|---|
| • WEP | multirow=”3″>WEP64bit: 5 characters or 10-digit hexadecimal number|
| • WPA/WPA2-mixed Personal | |
| • WPA2 Personal |
Show Security Key: If it is set to ON, the security key appears.
Device IP Address (Access Point Mode): Enter the IP address.
Channel: Select the channel to be used in wireless LAN.
Sending Output: Configure the sending output.
Bandwidth: Use this setting when the communication mode is “11n”. Select the bandwidth to be used.
IP Address Distribution Range Setting: Configure the range to be used the IP address.
How to configure the Wireless Setting screen (Infrastructure Mode)?
If [Connection Type] is set to [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)] and the [Setup] button is clicked, the infrastructure mode wireless setting screen is displayed. Configure the SSID of a wireless LAN, Security Type, Encry., and Security Key. Clicking the [Submit] button stores the settings.
Access Point Search: Click this to search access points. When the search results are displayed, select the access point to use and click [OK]. [SSID], [Security Type], and [Encry.] are automatically applied.
SSID: Enter an SSID using up to 32 characters.
Security Type: Select a security type.
Encry.: Select an encryption type.
Security Key: Enter a security key.
| Security Type | Security Key |
|---|---|
| • WEP | multirow=”5″>WEP64bit: 5 characters or 10-digit hexadecimal number|
| • WPA/WPA2-mixed Personal | |
| • WPA/WPA2-mixed Enterprise | |
| • WPA2 Personal | |
| • WPA2 Enterprise |
Show Security Key: If it is set to ON, the security key appears.
How to configure Device Web Page Settings?
The following explains the access settings to Setting mode (Web version). When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted.
Number of Users who can Log-in at the Same Time: Enter a number of users who can access Setting mode (Web version) simultaneously.
Auto Logout Time: Enter a time to automatically log out when no communication continues with the machine.
View Login User: The user or users who have logged in this machine are displayed.
Current Login User: The currently logged in users are displayed.
Logout All Users: The current login users are logged out.
How to Restrict Device Web Page Access Via Password?
Use this setting to display the login screen and require login in order to access the Web server. This is found under Security Settings.
How to Change the Administrator Password?
The administrator password can be changed. When changing the password, be sure to remember the new password. (It is recommended that you periodically change the administrator password.)
Enter a password consisting of 5 to 32 characters, and tap the [Store] key. Your setting is made valid only when the machine is turned On again.
• The user-level authentication password is required to add, edit or delete the destination. When you log on, enter “users” as the user name. Then, enter the user password that you have registered with this option.
The administrator-level authentication password is required to select all settings and the same functions as those available with the user-level password. When you log on, enter “admin” as the user name. Then, enter the administrator password that you have registered with this option.
• If you tap the [Store] key without entering a password, the previously set value is assumed. Password protection is enabled by default.
In the factory default state, the user password must be entered.
How to configure Port Control for system ports?
Enable or disable main system ports, set the port numbers, and tap the [Store] key. The following ports can be configured for Server Port and Client Port side:
Server Ports: HTTP, HTTPS, FTP Print, Raw Print, LPD, IPP, IPP-SSL, Tandem Output Receive, PC Scan, Remote Operation Panel, SNMPD, NBT/WINS*, SMTP, BMLinkS, WSD, Print Release*, Sharp OSA (Expansion Platform), HTTP, HTTPS.
Client Ports: HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, FTPS, SMTP, SMTP-SSL, POP3, POP3-SSL, SNMP-TRAP, Notify Job End, LDAP, LDAP-SSL, SMB/WINS, SNTP, mDNS, Tandem Output Send, Data Backup (Send), Print Release, XMPP.
* On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required for some features.
How to use Filter Setting (IP or MAC address) for network access?
You can set the filter by an IP or MAC address to prevent an unauthorised access to the machine via a network. Set the IP or MAC address filter and tap the [Store] key.
IP Address Filter Settings: This option sets an IP address. You can specify whether to allow or prohibit access to the machine from the IP address you set.
MAC Address Filter Settings: This option sets a MAC address. It allows access to the machine from the MAC address you set.
The settings for IP Address Filter are found in System Settings -> Setting Mode List (Page 7-41) and include: Filter Mode (Allowed), Filter Address 1-4, Start IP Address, End IP Address. For MAC Address Filter, it includes Filter Address 1-10.
How to configure SSL Settings for secure data transmission?
SSL can be used for data transmission over a network. SSL is a protocol that enables the encryption of information communicated over a network.
Server Port SSL Configuration:
• HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication.
• IPP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to IPP communication.
• Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Setting mode (Web version) Access: When this setting is enabled, all communication that attempts to access the machine by HTTP is redirected to HTTPS.
Client Port SSL Configuration:
• HTTPS: Apply SSL encryption to HTTP communication.
• FTPS: Apply SSL encryption to FTP communication.
• SMTP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to SMTP communication.
• POP3-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to POP3 communication.
• LDAP-SSL: Apply SSL encryption to LDAP communication.
Level of Encryption: The encryption strength can be set to one of three levels (e.g., Low, as per page 7-42 in Setting Mode List).
Device Certificate management for SSL:
• Certificate Status: Shows the status of the certificate required for transmission using SSL. To install a certificate, click [Install].
• Export Certificate and Private Key: When a certificate is installed, you can export the certificate.
Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR) for SSL: Enter the information below and click the [Execute] key to create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
• Common Name (Required): Enter the name to be used.
• Organization: Enter the name of the organization.
• Organizational Unit: Enter the name of the unit within the organization.
• City/Locality: Enter the city or locality.
• State/Province: Enter the state or province.
• Country/Region (Required): Enter the country code.
• Key Length of Certificate: Enter the key length of the certificate.
• Certificate Signing Request (CSR): When you create a CSR, its content appears here.
Other SSL settings in Setting Mode List (Page 7-42): Condition Settings, Setting of SSL, + syslog-SSL (Enabled).
How to configure S/MIME Settings for secure e-mail?
Condition Settings: Set whether S/MIME is used for transmission (e.g., S/MIME Settings Disabled/Enabled, as per page 7-42 in Setting Mode List).
Device Certificate management for S/MIME:
• Certificate Status: Shows the status of the certificate required for transmission using S/MIME. To install a certificate, click [Install].
Sign Settings for S/MIME:
• Sign E-mail: Enable “Sign E-mail” to use a signature (e.g., Always Enable, as per page 7-42).
• Signature Algorithm: Set the algorithm for the signature (e.g., SHA-1, as per page 7-42).
Encryption Settings for S/MIME:
• Encrypt E-mail: Enable “Encrypt E-mail” to use encryption (e.g., Always Enable, as per page 7-42).
• Encrypt (Algorithm): Select encryption algorithm (e.g., AES-128, as per page 7-42).
• Disable sending to the addresses which cannot be encrypted: Prohibit transmission to addresses that cannot be encrypted (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-42).
Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR) for S/MIME: Enter the information below and click the [Execute] key to create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR).
• Common Name (Required): Enter the name to be used.
• Organization: Enter the name of the organization.
• Organizational Unit: Enter the name of the unit within the organization.
• City/Locality: Enter the city or locality.
• State/Province: Enter the state or province.
• Country/Region (Required): Enter the country code.
• Sender Address (Required): Enter the address of the sender.
• Key Length of Certificate: Enter the key length of the certificate.
• Certificate Signing Request (CSR): When you create a CSR, its content appears here.
How to configure IPsec Settings for network security?
IPsec can be used for data transmission/reception on a network. When IPsec is used, data can be sent and received safely without the need to configure settings for IP packet encryption in a Web browser or other higher-level application. When enabling these settings, note that it may take time to reflect, and connection issues or limitations in printing/scanning/Setting mode display might occur if Web version settings are incorrect.
Condition Settings – IPsec Settings: Specify whether or not IPsec is used for transmission (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-43).
IKEv1 Settings:
• Pre-Shared Key: Enter the Pre-Shared Key to be used for IKEv1.
• SA Lifetime (time): Set the SA lifetime (e.g., 28800 seconds, as per page 7-43).
• SA Lifetime (size): Set the SA lifetime size (e.g., 28800KB, as per page 7-43).
• IKE Lifetime: Set the IKE lifetime (e.g., 30sec., as per page 7-43).
IPsec Rules: The registered IPsec rules are displayed. To add a new rule, click the [Add] key. To delete a rule, select the rule you want to delete and click the [Delete] key.
IPsec Rule Registration:
• Rule Name: Enter a name for the IPsec rule.
• Priority: Set the priority level.
• Select the Rule Name to be the Registration Model: If there is a previously registered rule that is similar to the rule you want to create, you can create the new rule based on the registered rule.
• Device Address: Set the type of IP address to be used on the machine and the port number (for IPv6, set the port number / prefix length).
• Client Address: Set the destination IP address type and port number (for IPv6, set the port number / prefix length).
• Communication Type: Set the communication type used for IPsec.
• Protocol: Set the protocol to be used.
• Filter Mode: Set the filter to be used for IPsec.
• IPsec Encryption: Configure settings for the authentication method used for IPsec.
• ESP: Select to use ESP authentication.
• Allow Communication not using ESP: Specify whether or not communication that does not use ESP is allowed.
• AH: Select to use AH authentication.
• Allow Communication not using AH: Specify whether or not communication that does not use AH is allowed.
How to configure IEEE802.1X Authentication?
IEEE802.1X can be used to authenticate a user to allow use of the machine. It defines port-based authentication for wired and wireless networks. Depending on Web page settings, connection or functionality might be affected.
Condition Settings – IEEE802.1X Authentication: Set whether IEEE802.1X authentication is used (e.g., for Wired, Disabled, as per page 7-43).
EAP Authentication Method: Set the EAP authentication method in IEEE802.1X (e.g., EAP-TLS, as per page 7-43).
EAP User Name: Enter a maximum of 64 full-width/half-width characters for the EAP user name used for authentication.
Password: Enter a maximum of 64 half-width characters for the EAP password used for authentication. A “Change Password” option (e.g. Disabled) may be available.
Server Authentication: Set whether server authentication is used (e.g., Enabled, as per page 7-43).
EAP Timeout: Set the EAP Timeout (e.g., 10 seconds, as per page 7-43).
Number of EAP Retries: Set the number of EAP re-access times when transmission fails (e.g., 3 times, as per page 7-43).
Device Certificate for IEEE802.1X:
• Certificate Status: Shows the status of the certificate required for transmission using IEEE802.1X. To install a certificate, click [Install].
• CA Certificate Status: Shows the status of the CA certificate required for transmission using IEEE802.1X. To install a certificate, click [Install].
Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR) for IEEE802.1X: Enter the information below and click the [Execute] key to create a CSR.
• Common Name (Required): Enter the name to be used.
• Organization: Enter the name of the organization.
• Organizational Unit: Enter the name of the unit within the organization.
• City/Locality: Enter the city or locality.
• State/Province: Enter the state or province.
• Country/Region (Required): Enter the country code.
• Key Length of Certificate: Enter the key length of the certificate.
• Certificate Signing Request (CSR): When you create a CSR, its content appears here.
How to configure Security Control settings?
Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Hold Job: You can select settings to cancel print jobs that are not print hold jobs, or force all print jobs to be held. When this is ON, the settings below can be selected. On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required. (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-43).
• Force Retention: This setting forcibly sets all print jobs as print hold jobs, even jobs for which print hold is not selected.
• Disable Job: Prohibit all print jobs other than print hold jobs.
Restrict Operation: (e.g., Force Retention, as per page 7-43).
Reject Requests from External Sites: You can reject the request from external sites (e.g., Enabled, as per page 7-43).
How to configure Document Administration Function for forwarding data?
All of the transmitted image data (sent or received by facsimile or e-mail transfer) can be forwarded to any destination.
Forwarding Destination Settings (Send Data):
• Forward Send Data: Set a destination to forward the send data (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-43).
• E-mail/Network Folder/FTP/Desktop: Select a forwarding type of the send or received image data. When determined, select the destination from the address book. You can enter an e-mail directly. Format: Select a format for data forwarding (e.g., TIFF(Multi), as per page 7-43 for File Format).
• Clear Setting: Releases the destination settings.
• File Format: Select the file format for inbound routing.
Forwarding Destination Settings (Received Data):
• Forward Received Data: Set a destination to forward the received data (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-44).
• E-mail/Network Folder/FTP/Desktop: Select a forwarding type of the send or received image data. When determined, select the destination from the address book. You can enter an e-mail directly. Format: Select a format for data forwarding (e.g., TIFF(Multi), as per page 7-44 for File Format).
• Clear Setting: Releases the destination settings.
• File Format: Select the file format for inbound routing.
How to configure Hidden Pattern Print Setting?
Select Hidden Pattern Print Setting. The hidden pattern print function is effective at preventing unauthorised copying as the specified text emerges in the background on output sheets.
Initial Status Settings – Default Settings:
• Hidden Pattern Print Setting: A pattern print can be printed with this settings (e.g., All Invalid, as per page 7-44).
• Exposure: Select an exposure (e.g., Standard, as per page 7-44).
• Font Size: Select a font size (e.g., 48 points, as per page 7-44).
• Angle: Select a character angle (e.g., 0°, as per page 7-44).
• Font Style: Select the standard or italic character settings (e.g., Standard, as per page 7-44).
• Camouflage Pattern: Set a camouflage pattern (e.g., Pattern 1, as per page 7-44).
• Print Method: Select a character display pattern (Positive, Negative. e.g., Positive, as per page 7-44).
Print Contents Setting:
• Pre-Set Word: Allows you to select a preset character string. Examples: DO NOT COPY, Copy Ban, Internal Use Only, Handle with Care, CONFIDENTIAL, Copy Invalid, IMPORTANT, COPY (e.g., Enabled, DO NOT COPY, as per page 7-44).
• Fixed Phrase: Select a stored preset character string. This setting is ignored if [Direct Entry] is enabled. Examples: DO NOT COPY, Copy Ban, etc.
• Information Printing: Enables simultaneous printing of information sets like Serial number, account job ID, login name/user number, number of copy control, date and time. Specific items like Unit Serial Number, Account Job ID, Login Name/User Number, Control No., Date/Time can be Disabled/Enabled (as per page 7-44).
• Disable Direct Entry: Directly enters the user name. This setting is ignored if [Pre-set Text] is enabled (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-44).
Contrast: Set a character contrast. The black, magenta, and cyan can be set in any of 9 levels (e.g., Black 5, as per page 7-44).
Custom Text Registration: Stores the user-created print characters. Up to 30 characters can be stored.
How to configure Tracking Information Print?
Prints the tracking information at the top or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed.
Tracking Information Print Setting: Set this option to print the tracking information (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-44).
Print Information: The following information can be printed: Serial number, characters, account job ID, login name/user number, date and time. Specific items like Unit Serial Number, Text, Account Job ID, Login Name/User Number, Date/Time can be Enabled/Disabled (as per page 7-44).
Position: Set a print position on each page. Vertical position (Print Upper Side of Paper – Disabled, Print Lower Side of Paper – Enabled) and Horizontal position (Print Left Side of Paper – Enabled, Print Right Side of Paper – Disabled) can be set (as per page 7-45).
Select the Job to Print: Set a job to print the tracking information. Jobs include Copy, Print, Prints(Doc.Filing), Internet Fax Receive, Fax Receive, List Prints. These can be Enabled/Disabled (as per page 7-45).
How is the Audit Log managed and configured?
Logs are created and saved for various events relating to security functions and settings. Audit logs are created and saved in English. Setting values such as filenames input from external sources are saved as-is. Audit logs saved in internal storage can be exported by an administrator to a PC as TSV files. You can select either internal storage or an external server as the destination for saving audit logs. When the space for saving audit logs internally becomes full, the logs are overwritten starting from the oldest ones.
Accessing Audit Log settings: “Audit Log” can be carried out as follows. In “Settings (administrator)”, select [System Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Audit Log]. Select “Security Control”, “Storage/Send Settings” or “Save/Delete Audit Log”.
Security Control (for Audit Log): Set Audit Log to Disabled or Enabled (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-45).
Storage/Send Settings for Audit Log:
• Store Setting – Stored to Storage: (e.g., Enabled, as per page 7-45).
• Send Settings – Server Send: (e.g., Disabled, as per page 7-45).
• Hostname or IP Address (Required): Enter the server address.
• Enable SSL: (e.g., Off, as per page 7-45).
• Port Number: (e.g., 514, as per page 7-45).
• Port Number (Use SSL): (e.g., 6514, as per page 7-45).
Save/Delete Audit Log:
• Save Audit Log: This setting is configured in setting mode on the web page. “Save Audit Log” can only be carried out from the web page.
• Delete Audit Log: This setting is configured in setting mode on the web page.
Other Audit Log related settings (page 7-45): Initialize Private Data/Data in Machine, Security code input. These are configured in setting mode on the machine.
How to manage Job Log Operations?
Deletes or stores log of a job executed on the machine. Set the number of jobs for [The Number of Job Log to Notify by E-mail] (e.g., 50000, as per page 7-47) and click [Store]. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the job log. You can save the job log by selecting the [Job Log] in Setting mode (Web version).
How to View Job Log?
Views log of a job executed on the machine. Select a view item and period, and tap the [Show] key.
How to use Data Import/Export (CSV Format)?
You can import or export data.
Export Settings – Export Settings Type: Select the data to be exported from the address book or registered user information. Once you have selected the data, click the [Execute] key. The data will be exported in CSV format.
Import Settings – Import settings from file: You can import data that was exported in CSV format into the machine.
How to use Storage Backup with a USB memory device?
Address book information and user information stored in the machine can be saved to and retrieved from a USB memory device. To use the machine to manipulate a file, first insert the USB memory device in the machine. If you need to select settings on the Web page, use your computer to manipulate the file.
Export: Exports data.
Import: Imports data into the machine.
How does Device Cloning work?
Saves the machine setting information in XML format and copies the information to another machine. This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines. To use the machine to manipulate a file, first insert the USB memory device in the machine. If you need to select settings on the Web page, use your computer to manipulate the file.
Export: Exports data.
Import: Imports data into the machine.
• For models that can be imported, consult your dealer.
• The following data is not copied when device cloning is performed:
• List print and fax forwarding items.
• Count and device status display items.
• IP address of the machine, device name, administrator password, sender names for image send, and other information that is specific to the machine.
• The settings specific to each hardware such as screen contrast, colour adjustment, and saddle stitch position adjustment.
How to use Address Book Forward?
Forward the data stored in the address book of the machine to another machine. To forward the address book contents, enter the IP address of the destination machine and the password of the administrator of that machine, and tap the [Execute] key. This setting is configured in setting mode on the machine.
How to use Filing Data Backup?
You can back up a file saved with Document Filing, and restore a backed up file to the machine.
• Use setting mode (Web) to create backups of filed data.
• On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
Export Settings: Select the folder you want to back up and click [Execute]. The files are saved to your computer.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| Index | The displayed Folder names can be filtered by index. |
| Display Items | Set the number of files that are displayed. |
Import Settings: You can restore a file to the machine that was saved with “Export Settings”. Enter a maximum of 200 characters for the path of the saved file in “Import settings from file”, and click [Execute].
How to Store and Restore System Configurations?
You can reset the current Setting mode settings to the previously stored settings or to the factory default settings.
Store Current Configuration: Stores the currently configured Setting mode in the machine memory. The stored settings will be retained even if the [Power] button is turned off.
Items not stored:
• Network Settings: These are not stored as unexpected settings may cause damage to the network.
• Product Keys: Product Keys are not stored as reissue of keys may be necessary.
Restore Configuration: Restores the settings stored with “Store Current Configuration”. The current settings are replaced by the retrieved settings.
How to perform System Resets?
Restore Factory Defaults: Restores the current settings (you have selected in Setting mode) to the factory default settings. If you wish to create a record of the current settings before restoring, print the current settings by selecting [Status] in “Settings (administrator)” → [Data List] → [List for Administrator]”. When settings are changed, the changes will take effect after the machine is restarted.
Reset the NIC: This returns all “Network Settings” to the factory default settings.
How does Optimization of Hard Disk work?
Various devices mounted on the machine can be set. This function optimizes the hard drive of the machine by defragmenting data. If a job is in progress, a message will appear and optimization will not begin until the job is finished. During optimization, the following operations are not possible:
• Access to Setting mode (Web version), and reception of print data
• Use of keys on the operation panel
• Turning off the power with the main power switch of the machine.
• Auto Power Shut-Off
When optimization is completed, the machine will automatically restart.
• When the document filing function is frequently used and output of files seems somewhat slow, optimizing the hard drive may improve performance.
• On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required. This setting is configured in setting mode on the machine.
How to configure E-mail Status Messages (Standard and Advanced)?
Selects the Standard E-mail Status function or Advanced E-mail Status function settings. The E-mail Status function can periodically transmit the machine status information to the stored address.
Standard: Sets the E-mail status address list 1, E-mail status address list 2, and E-mail status dealer address list separately.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| E-mail Address | Enter the destination e-mail address for transmission of machine status information. When you enter multiple addresses, separate them by a semicolon (;) or a comma (,). |
| Send Now | When tapped, the status message is sent to the destination of the e-mail address list. |
| Send on Schedule 1 | If checked, an E-mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule. |
| Send on Schedule 2 | If checked, an E-mail is sent periodically according to the preset schedule. |
| Time Schedule | Select a schedule to send E-mails. |
Advanced (Bi-directional status message): Select whether or not bi-directional messages are enabled.
| Item | Description |
|---|---|
| POP3 Server | Enter the IP address or host name of the POP3 server. |
| Port Number | Enter the port number of the POP3 server. The default setting is port 110. |
| POP Authentication | The authentication protocol (including APOP) is used for authentication to the POP3 server. |
| User Name | Enter the user name. The special user account is required for bi-directional e-mail status transmission. |
| Password | Enter the password. To change the password, set [Change Password] to checked. |
| Check Interval | Enter the polling interval for the POP3 server. The default setting is five minutes. |
| Enable SSL | Allows the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication or the STLS command. To allow SSL communication, set the “Port Number” to the POP over SSL communication port number. To allow POP over TLS communication, set the “Port Number” to the same port number as for the normal POP3 communication. |
| Connection Test | Tap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the POP3 server. |
How to configure E-mail Alert Messages?
Selects the E-mail Alert function settings. The E-mail Alert function can report a trouble of the machine to the administrator or dealer using e-mail. Sets the E-mail Alert Message List 1, E-mail Alert Message List 2, and Dealer E-mail Alert Message List separately.
E-mail Address: Enter the destination E-mail address for alert message transmission. You can enter multiple addresses by separating them by a semicolon or comma. Example: aaa@xxxxx.com; bbb@xxxxx.com
A report will be sent by e-mail in the following situations: Jam, Toner Low, Toner Empty, Paper Empty, Service Request, PM Request, Waste Toner Almost Full, Waste Toner Full, Job Log Full.
How to use Fusing Cleaning Mode?
Use this function to clean the machine’s fusing unit when dots or other dirt appear on the printed side of the paper. When this function is executed, “V” printed paper is output and the fusing unit is cleaned. Fusing Cleaning Mode in [Collective Adjustment], all Common Functions, and removal of a toner cartridge can only be executed in setting mode on the machine. If improvement is not noticed after the first time you use the function, try executing the function again.
How to adjust Black Letter/Black Line Width?
Adjust black text and the width of black lines. After using this function to perform adjustment, perform [System Settings] – [Common Functions] – [Auto Grey Calibration (for Copy)], [Auto Grey Calibration (for Print)]. The setting is found under Collective Adjustment in Image Quality Adjustment (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 0, Page 7-48).
How to use Black Streak Reduction?
Specify to use the black streak reduction or not. The black streak reduction can be used for Scan Original, Copy, Image Send, and Scan to HDD functions. If the black streak reduction is enabled, select any of the following options (e.g. Factory Default Setting: Disabled, Page 7-48):
• Treat Thin Black Streaks: Use this setting to make thin black streaks less apparent. (Low level)
• Normal: Use this setting to make black streaks less apparent. (Medium level)
• Treat Up to Thick Black Streaks: Use this setting to make thick black streaks less apparent. (High level)
Increasing the level of black streak treatment may result in faint text and poor reproduction of lines.
How to enable display warning message for black streaks detection?
Set this option to display a warning message when black streaks are detected by the document feeder. This setting is found under Collective Adjustment in Image Quality Adjustment (e.g. Factory Default Setting: Disabled, Page 7-48).
How to adjust Copy Image Quality settings?
Quick Image Quality Adjustment: You can easily perform copy quality adjustment in the default state. You can change the default setting ([2]) to [1 (Smooth)] or [3 (Sharp)]. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 2, Page 7-48)
Grey Balance: You can adjust the gradation, and density of copies. The density is divided into 3 ranges, and you can adjust the level. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: All 0, Page 7-48)
Density Adjustment when [Auto] is selected for Exposure: Configure settings for black & white copying when [Auto] is selected for the copy exposure. The exposure can be adjusted separately for copying using the document glass and copying using the auto document feeder. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: Document Glass, Document Feeder: 5 (Normal), Page 7-48)
Sharpness: You can make copy images in the default state sharper or softer. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 2, Page 7-48)
Image Quality Priority: Specify image quality priority. Set this for the auto copy exposure and text / printed photo settings. (e.g. Settings for Auto and Text/Prtd.Photo, Factory Default Setting: 0 for both, Page 7-48)
How to adjust Print Image Quality settings?
Quick Image Quality Adjustment: Perform quick adjustment of print quality. You can change the default setting ([2]) to [1 (Smooth)] or [3 (Sharp)]. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 2, Page 7-48)
Grey Balance: You can adjust the tone and density of printing. You can adjust the gradation, and density of printing. The density is divided into 3 ranges, and you can adjust the level. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: All 0, Page 7-48)
Exposure Adjustment: Set the density of printing. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 3 (Normal), Page 7-48)
Line Thickness: When colour lines do not print correctly in special applications such as CAD, you can make lines thicker. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 5, Page 7-48)
How to adjust Scan Image Quality settings?
RGB Adjust: Set the colour tone (RGB) for scanning. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: All 0, Page 7-48)
Sharpness: Use this setting to obtain a sharp image when scanning an original. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 3 (Normal), Page 7-48)
Contrast: You can adjust the contrast of scanned images. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: 3 (Normal), Page 7-48)
How to perform Auto Grey Calibration and Screen Calibration for Copying and Printing?
These settings are found under Common Functions in Image Quality Adjustment. These settings are configured in setting mode on the machine.
Auto Grey Calibration (for Copy) / Auto Grey Calibration (for Print): Performs automatic greyscale correction. For copying, adjust with [Auto Grey Calibration (for Copy)]. For printing, adjust with [Auto Grey Calibration (for Print)]. If the greyscale is still off after performing Auto Grey Calibration, repeating it once again may improve the greyscale.
Copy Calibration by Screen / Printer Calibration by Screen: You can use [Copy Calibration by Screen] and [Printer Calibration by Screen] to perform even higher precision adjustment of each mode. The machine prints a test patch, the test patch is scanned, and the greyscale is automatically corrected. After the [Execute] key is tapped and a test patch is printed, a message appears prompting you to begin automatic calibration. Follow the instructions in the message to perform grey adjustment.
How to use Density Smoothing Adjustment?
If uneven density occurs in a copy and others, use this function to smooth the density. The uneven density is automatically corrected by scanning a test patch that you print. After the [Execute] key is tapped and a test patch is printed, a message appears prompting you to begin automatic adjustment. Follow the instructions in the message to perform density smoothing. If there are no problems after adjustment, perform “Auto Grey Calibration (for Copy)” and “Auto Grey Calibration (for Print)”. To return the adjusted values to their factory default state, tap [Return Density Smoothing Adjustment Value to Defaults]. If you tapped [Return to the Defaults], perform adjustment of the density that you want to readjust (medium density in the default mode). If the density is still uneven after you have performed density smoothing, repeating the procedure may provide improvement. To repeat density smoothing, you can either start from the beginning, or press the [Back] button after performing smoothing the first time. (e.g. Factory Default Setting: Middle, Page 7-48). This setting is configured in setting mode on the machine.
What are the Initial Installation Settings and where can their detailed explanations be found?
This groups together the items that were set initially when the machine was installed. The initial installation setting items are the same as the regular setting items that have the same name. For information on a setting item, see the explanation of the regular item.
| Item | Description (Reference to regular setting explanation) |
|---|---|
| Condition Settings (Name, Machine Code, Machine Location, Memo) | System Settings – Common Settings – Machine Identification Settings |
| Clock Adjust | System Settings – Common Settings – Clock Adjust |
| Daylight Saving Time Setting | System Settings – Common Settings – Clock Adjust (Daylight Saving Time section) |
| Preheat Mode Setting, Auto Power Shut-Off, Display Message When Extending Transition Time to Preheat/Auto Power Shut-Off Mode, Sleep Mode Power Level | System Settings – Energy Save – Eco Scan Setting (and related Energy Save settings) |
| Network Quick Settings | System Settings – Network Settings – Quick Settings |
| Tray Settings | System Settings – Common Settings – Paper Settings – Paper Tray Settings |
| Product Key | System Settings – Common Settings – Product Key |
How to configure default Fax Settings?
Resolution Setting: Default is ‘k’.
• Apply the Resolution Set when Stored*1: Default is Disabled.
• (No item): Default is Standard.
Dial Mode Setting*2: Default is Tone.
Auto Wake Up Print: Default is Enabled.
Pause Time Setting: Default is 2 seconds.
Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode: Default is Disabled.
Speaker Settings:
• Speaker Volume: Default is 5.
• Ringer Volume: Default is 2.
• Line Monitor Volume: Default is No Sound.
• Fax Receive Complete Signal: Default Volume: 2; Tone Pattern: 3; Transmission Complete Sound Time Setting: 3 sec.
• Fax Send Complete Signal: Default Volume: 2; Tone Pattern: 3; Transmission Complete Sound Time Setting: 3 sec.
• Fax Communication Error Signal: Default Volume: 2; Tone Pattern: 3; Transmission Complete Sound Time Setting: Every 0.3 seconds.
Remote Reception Number Setting: Default is 5.
Original Print on Transaction Report: Default is Print Out Error Report Only.
Transaction Report Print Select Setting:
• Single Sending: Default is Print Out Error Report Only.
• Broadcasting: Default is Print Out All Report.
• Receiving: Default is No Printed Report.
• Confidential Reception: Default is Print Out Notice Page.
Activity Report Print Select Setting:
• Auto Print at Memory Full: Default is Disabled.
• Print Daily at Designated Time: Default is Disabled.
ECM: Default is Enabled.
Digital Line Network: Default is Disabled.
Distinctive Ring Detection*2: Default is Off.
PBX Setting*2: Default is Disabled.
*1 On the MX-M2630/MX-M3050/MX-M3550/MX-M4050/MX-M5050/MX-M6050, the Hard disk expansion kit is required.
*2 This function is not available in some countries and regions.
How to configure Fax Send Settings?
Auto Reduction Sending Setting: Default is Enabled.
Rotation Sending Setting: Default is All Enabled.
Quick On Line Sending: Default is Enabled.
Printing Page Number at Receiver: Default is Enabled.
Default Own Number Sending: Default is Enabled.
Sender Destination Name Switch: Default is Fax No.
Date/Own Number Print Position Setting: Default is Outside the Original Image.
Recall in Case of Line Busy: Default varies depending on country and region.
Recall in Case of Communication Error: Default varies depending on country and region.
Disable Fax Broadcasting: Default is Disabled.
How to configure Fax Receive Settings?
Number of Calls in Auto Reception: Default is 2 times.
Switching to Automatic Reception: Default is Disabled.
2-Sided Printing of Received Data: Default is Disabled.
Auto Receive Reduce Setting: Default is Enabled.
Print Style Setting: Default is Auto Size Select.
Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding: Default is – (not set).
Letter Size RX Reduce Print*2: Default is Disabled.
Receiving Date & Time Print: Default is Disabled.
A3 RX Reduce*2: Default is Disabled.
Number of Prints: Default is 1.
• Staple Settings*3: Default is 1 Staple at Back.
• Paper Size: Default is A4 or A4R (8-1/2″ x 11″ or 8-1/2″ x 11″R).
Allow/Reject Number Setting: Default is All Invalid.
Polling Setting – Set Fax Polling Security: Default is Enabled.
F-Code Memory Box: Default is – (not set).
*2 This function is not available in some countries and regions.
*3 When an inner finisher, finisher, finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is installed.
How to configure Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) settings?
These settings are typically for manual operations related to fax data.
Receive Settings (under Fax Data Receive/Forward Manual): Default is Auto Reception.
Multiple Set Print*4: Default is Disabled.
Staple (under Fax Data Receive/Forward Manual): Default is Disabled.
Forward Received Data (under Fax Data Receive/Forward Manual): Default is – (not set).
*4 When the number of copies is set.
CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD SHARP MX-M2630 (01) PDF MANUAL